Ibm Storeviz 3700

Front cover
Implementing the IBM Storwize V3700

Easily manage and deploy systems with embedded GUI Experience rapid and flexible provisioning Protect data with remote mirroring
Jon Tate Saiprasad Prabhakar Parkar Lee Sirett Chris Tapsell Paulo Tomiyoshi Takeda
ibm.com/redbooks
International Technical Support Organization Implementing the IBM Storwize V3700 October 2013
SG24-8107-01
Note: Before using this information and the product it supports, read the information in Notices on page ix.
Second Edition (October 2013) This edition applies to Version 7 Release 1 of IBM Storwize V3700 machine code.
Copyright International Business Machines Corporation 2013. All rights reserved. Note to U.S. Government Users Restricted Rights -- Use, duplication or disclosure restricted by GSA ADP Schedule Contract with IBM Corp.
Contents
Notices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ix Trademarks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .x Preface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xi Authors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xii Now you can become a published author, too! . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xiii Comments welcome. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xiv Stay connected to IBM Redbooks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xiv Summary of changes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xv October 2013, Second Edition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xv Chapter 1. Overview of the IBM Storwize V3700 system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 1.1 IBM Storwize V3700 overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 1.2 IBM Storwize V3700 terminology . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 1.3 IBM Storwize V3700 models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 1.4 IBM Storwize V3700 hardware . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 1.4.1 Control enclosure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 1.4.2 Expansion enclosure. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 1.4.3 Host interface cards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 1.4.4 Disk drive types. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 1.5 IBM Storwize V3700 terms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 1.5.1 Hosts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 1.5.2 Node canister . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 1.5.3 I/O Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 1.5.4 Clustered system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 1.5.5 RAID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 1.5.6 Managed disks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 1.5.7 Quorum disks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 1.5.8 Storage pools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 1.5.9 Volumes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17 1.5.10 iSCSI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 1.5.11 SAS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 1.6 IBM Storwize V3700 features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 1.6.1 Volume mirroring. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 1.6.2 Thin provisioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21 1.6.3 Easy Tier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21 1.6.4 Turbo Performance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22 1.6.5 Storage Migration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22 1.6.6 FlashCopy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22 1.6.7 Remote Copy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23 1.7 Problem management and support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24 1.7.1 IBM Assist On-site and remote service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24 1.7.2 Event notifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24 1.7.3 SNMP traps. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24 1.7.4 Syslog messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25 1.7.5 Call Home email . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25 1.7.6 Useful IBM Storwize V3700 websites . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
Copyright IBM Corp. 2013. All rights reserved.
iii
Chapter 2. Initial configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.1 Hardware installation planning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.2 SAN configuration planning. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.3 SAS direct attach planning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.4 LAN configuration planning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.4.1 Management IP address considerations. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.4.2 Service IP address considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.5 Host configuration planning. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.6 Miscellaneous configuration planning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.7 System management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.7.1 Graphical user interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.7.2 Command-line interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.8 First-time setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.9 Initial configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.9.1 Adding enclosures after initial configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.9.2 Configure Call Home, email alert, and inventory. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.9.3 Service Assistant tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
27 28 30 32 34 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 50 61 66 69
Chapter 3. Graphical user interface overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73 3.1 Getting started. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74 3.1.1 Supported browsers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74 3.1.2 Access the management GUI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75 3.1.3 Overview panel layout. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78 3.2 Navigation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79 3.2.1 Function icons navigation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80 3.2.2 Extended help navigation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81 3.2.3 Breadcrumb navigation aid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84 3.2.4 Suggested Tasks aid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84 3.2.5 Presets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85 3.2.6 Access actions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87 3.2.7 Task progress . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88 3.2.8 Navigating panels with tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88 3.3 Status Indicators menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94 3.3.1 Horizontal bars . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94 3.3.2 Allocated status bar menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94 3.3.3 Running tasks bar menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96 3.3.4 Health status bar menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97 3.4 Function Icon menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99 3.4.1 Home menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100 3.4.2 Monitoring menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100 3.4.3 Pools menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110 3.4.4 Volumes menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120 3.4.5 Hosts menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123 3.4.6 Copy Services menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126 3.4.7 Access menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130 3.4.8 Settings menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134 3.5 Management GUI help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147 3.5.1 IBM Storwize V3700 Information Center. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147 3.5.2 Watching an e-Learning videos . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147 3.5.3 Learning more . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148 3.5.4 Embedded panel help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148 3.5.5 Hidden question mark help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149 3.5.6 Hover help. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
iv
3.5.7 IBM endorsed YouTube videos. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150 Chapter 4. Host configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.1 Host attachment overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.2 Preparing the host operating system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.2.1 Windows 2008 R2: Preparing for Fibre Channel attachment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.2.2 Windows 2008 R2: Preparing for iSCSI attachment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.2.3 Windows 2008 R2: Preparing for SAS attachment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.2.4 VMware ESX: Preparing for Fibre Channel attachment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.2.5 VMware ESX: Preparing for iSCSI attachment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.2.6 VMware ESX: Preparing for SAS attachment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.3 Configuring hosts on IBM Storwize V3700 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.3.1 Considerations when creating hosts on IBM Storwize V3700. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.3.2 Creating Fibre Channel hosts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.3.3 Creating iSCSI hosts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.3.4 Configuring IBM Storwize V3700 for iSCSI host connectivity. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.3.5 Creating SAS hosts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Chapter 5. Basic volume configuration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.1 Provisioning storage from IBM Storwize V3700 and making it available to the host. . 5.1.1 Creating a generic volume . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.1.2 Creating a thin-provisioned volume. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.1.3 Creating a mirrored volume. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.1.4 Creating a thin-mirror volume . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.2 Mapping a volume to the host . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.2.1 Mapping newly created volumes to the host by using the wizard . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.2.2 Manually mapping a volume to the host . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.3 Discovering the volumes from the host and specifying multipath settings . . . . . . . . . 5.3.1 Windows 2008 Fibre Channel volume attachment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.3.2 Windows 2008 iSCSI volume attachment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.3.3 Windows 2008 Direct SAS volume attachment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.3.4 VMware ESX Fibre Channel volume attachment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.3.5 VMware ESX iSCSI volume attachment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.3.6 VMware ESX Direct SAS volume attachment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Chapter 6. Storage migration wizard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.1 Interoperability and compatibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.2 Storage migration wizard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.2.1 External virtualization capability . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.2.2 Overview of the storage migration wizard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.2.3 Storage migration wizard tasks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.3 Storage migration wizard example scenario . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.3.1 Storage migration wizard example scenario description. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.3.2 Using the storage migration wizard for example scenario . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Chapter 7. Storage pools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.1 Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.2 Working with internal drives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.2.1 Internal storage window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.2.2 Actions on internal drives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.3 Configuring internal storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.3.1 RAID configuration presets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.3.2 Customize initial storage configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.3.3 Create new MDisk and pool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Contents
151 152 153 153 156 161 164 166 174 175 175 177 181 183 186 189 190 192 195 198 203 207 207 210 213 215 220 228 232 240 252 261 262 262 262 262 263 276 276 278 313 314 315 316 318 326 326 328 329 v
7.3.4 Using the recommended configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.3.5 Selecting a different configuration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.4 Working with MDisks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.4.1 MDisk by Pools panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.4.2 RAID action for MDisks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.4.3 Other actions on MDisks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.5 Working with Storage Pools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.5.1 Create Pool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.5.2 Actions on storage pools. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Chapter 8. Advanced host and volume administration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.1 Advanced host administration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.1.1 Modifying Mappings menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.1.2 Unmapping volumes from a host . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.1.3 Duplicate Mappings option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.1.4 Renaming a host . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.1.5 Deleting a host . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.1.6 Host properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.2 Adding and deleting host ports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.2.1 Adding a host port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.2.2 Adding a Fibre Channel port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.2.3 Adding a SAS host port. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.2.4 Adding an iSCSI host port. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.2.5 Deleting a host port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.3 Host mappings overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.3.1 Unmap Volumes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.3.2 Properties (Host) option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.3.3 Properties (Volume) option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.4 Advanced volume administration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.4.1 Advanced volume functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.4.2 Mapping a volume to a host . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.4.3 Unmapping volumes from all hosts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.4.4 Viewing a host that is mapped to a volume. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.4.5 Duplicate Volume option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.4.6 Renaming a volume . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.4.7 Shrinking a volume . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.4.8 Expanding a volume . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.4.9 Migrating a volume to another storage pool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.4.10 Deleting a volume . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.5 Volume properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.5.1 Overview tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.5.2 Host Maps tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.5.3 Member MDisk tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.5.4 Adding a mirrored volume copy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.5.5 Editing Thin-Provisioned volume properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.6 Advanced volume copy functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.6.1 Thin-provisioned . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.6.2 Splitting into a new volume . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.6.3 Validate Volume Copies option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.6.4 Delete Volume Copy option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.6.5 Migrating volumes by using the volume copy features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.7 Volumes by Pool feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.8 Volumes by Host feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
330 333 338 340 341 345 348 350 350 353 354 356 360 363 364 366 367 371 372 373 374 375 376 377 378 379 379 379 380 383 384 384 385 387 387 388 388 390 391 391 394 395 396 398 400 402 402 404 405 406 407 410
vi
Chapter 9. Easy Tier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.1 Easy Tier overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.2 Easy Tier for IBM Storwize V3700 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.2.1 Tiered storage pools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.3 Easy Tier process . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.3.1 I/O Monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.3.2 Data Placement Advisor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.3.3 Data Migration Planner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.3.4 Data Migrator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.3.5 Easy Tier operating modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.3.6 Easy Tier rules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.4 Easy Tier configuration using the GUI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.4.1 Creating multitiered pools: Enable Easy Tier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.4.2 Downloading Easy Tier I/O measurements. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.5 Easy Tier configuration using the CLI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.5.1 Enabling Easy Tier evaluation mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.5.2 Enabling or disabling Easy Tier on single volumes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.6 IBM Storage Tier Advisor Tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.6.1 Creating graphical reports. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.6.2 STAT reports. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.7 Tivoli Storage Productivity Center . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.7.1 Features of Tivoli Storage Productivity Center . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.7.2 Adding IBM Storwize V3700 in Tivoli Storage Productivity Center . . . . . . . . . . . 9.8 Administering and reporting an IBM Storwize V3700 system through Tivoli Storage Productivity Center . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.8.1 Basic configuration and administration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.8.2 Report Generation by using the GUI. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.8.3 Report Generation using Tivoli Storage Productivity Center web page . . . . . . . Chapter 10. Copy services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.1 FlashCopy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.1.1 Business requirements for FlashCopy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.1.2 FlashCopy functional overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.1.3 Planning for FlashCopy. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.1.4 Managing FlashCopy by using the GUI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.1.5 Managing FlashCopy mappings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.1.6 Managing a FlashCopy consistency group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.2 Remote Copy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.2.1 Remote Copy license consideration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.2.2 Remote Copy concepts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.2.3 Global Mirror with Change Volumes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.2.4 Remote Copy planning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.3 Troubleshooting Remote Copy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.3.1 1920 error . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.3.2 1720 error . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.4 Managing Remote Copy using the GUI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.4.1 Managing cluster partnerships . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.4.2 Managing stand-alone Remote Copy relationships . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.4.3 Managing a Remote Copy consistency group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Chapter 11. RAS, monitoring, and troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.1 Reliability, availability, and serviceability on the IBM Storwize V3700 . . . . . . . . . . . 11.2 IBM Storwize V3700 components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.2.1 Enclosure midplane assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Contents
411 412 413 413 414 415 415 415 415 416 417 419 419 426 427 428 431 433 433 434 436 436 436 439 439 441 443 449 450 450 451 459 460 467 489 498 498 499 505 510 513 513 515 515 515 520 531 543 544 545 545 vii
11.2.2 Node canisters: Ports and LED. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.2.3 Node canister replaceable hardware components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.2.4 Expansion canister: Ports and LED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.2.5 Disk subsystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.2.6 Power Supply Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.3 Configuration backup procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.3.1 Generating a configuration backup using the CLI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.3.2 Downloading a configuration backup using the GUI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.4 Software upgrade . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.4.1 Upgrading software automatically . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.4.2 GUI upgrade process . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.4.3 Upgrading software manually . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.5 Event log . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.5.1 Managing the event log. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.5.2 Alert handling and recommended actions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.6 Collecting support information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.6.1 Support data via GUI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.6.2 Support information via Service Assistant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.6.3 Support Information onto USB stick . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.7 Powering on and shutting down IBM Storwize V3700 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.7.1 Shutting down the system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.7.2 Powering on . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Appendix A. Command-line interface setup and SAN Boot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Command-line interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Basic setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Example commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SAN Boot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Enabling SAN Boot for Windows. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Enabling SAN Boot for VMware . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Windows SAN Boot migration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Related publications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . IBM Redbooks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . IBM Storwize V3700 publications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . IBM Storwize V3700 support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Help from IBM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
546 550 554 555 558 560 560 561 564 564 565 568 573 574 577 585 585 586 587 588 588 591 593 594 594 603 606 606 606 607 609 609 609 609 609
Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 611
viii
Notices
This information was developed for products and services offered in the U.S.A. IBM may not offer the products, services, or features discussed in this document in other countries. Consult your local IBM representative for information on the products and services currently available in your area. Any reference to an IBM product, program, or service is not intended to state or imply that only that IBM product, program, or service may be used. Any functionally equivalent product, program, or service that does not infringe any IBM intellectual property right may be used instead. However, it is the user's responsibility to evaluate and verify the operation of any non-IBM product, program, or service. IBM may have patents or pending patent applications covering subject matter described in this document. The furnishing of this document does not grant you any license to these patents. You can send license inquiries, in writing, to: IBM Director of Licensing, IBM Corporation, North Castle Drive, Armonk, NY 10504-1785 U.S.A. The following paragraph does not apply to the United Kingdom or any other country where such provisions are inconsistent with local law: INTERNATIONAL BUSINESS MACHINES CORPORATION PROVIDES THIS PUBLICATION "AS IS" WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EITHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF NON-INFRINGEMENT, MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. Some states do not allow disclaimer of express or implied warranties in certain transactions, therefore, this statement may not apply to you. This information could include technical inaccuracies or typographical errors. Changes are periodically made to the information herein; these changes will be incorporated in new editions of the publication. IBM may make improvements and/or changes in the product(s) and/or the program(s) described in this publication at any time without notice. Any references in this information to non-IBM websites are provided for convenience only and do not in any manner serve as an endorsement of those websites. The materials at those websites are not part of the materials for this IBM product and use of those websites is at your own risk. IBM may use or distribute any of the information you supply in any way it believes appropriate without incurring any obligation to you. Any performance data contained herein was determined in a controlled environment. Therefore, the results obtained in other operating environments may vary significantly. Some measurements may have been made on development-level systems and there is no guarantee that these measurements will be the same on generally available systems. Furthermore, some measurements may have been estimated through extrapolation. Actual results may vary. Users of this document should verify the applicable data for their specific environment. Information concerning non-IBM products was obtained from the suppliers of those products, their published announcements or other publicly available sources. IBM has not tested those products and cannot confirm the accuracy of performance, compatibility or any other claims related to non-IBM products. Questions on the capabilities of non-IBM products should be addressed to the suppliers of those products. This information contains examples of data and reports used in daily business operations. To illustrate them as completely as possible, the examples include the names of individuals, companies, brands, and products. All of these names are fictitious and any similarity to the names and addresses used by an actual business enterprise is entirely coincidental. COPYRIGHT LICENSE: This information contains sample application programs in source language, which illustrate programming techniques on various operating platforms. You may copy, modify, and distribute these sample programs in any form without payment to IBM, for the purposes of developing, using, marketing or distributing application programs conforming to the application programming interface for the operating platform for which the sample programs are written. These examples have not been thoroughly tested under all conditions. IBM, therefore, cannot guarantee or imply reliability, serviceability, or function of these programs.
ix
Trademarks
IBM, the IBM logo, and ibm.com are trademarks or registered trademarks of International Business Machines Corporation in the United States, other countries, or both. These and other IBM trademarked terms are marked on their first occurrence in this information with the appropriate symbol ( or ), indicating US registered or common law trademarks owned by IBM at the time this information was published. Such trademarks may also be registered or common law trademarks in other countries. A current list of IBM trademarks is available on the Web at http://www.ibm.com/legal/copytrade.shtml The following terms are trademarks of the International Business Machines Corporation in the United States, other countries, or both:
AIX DS8000 Easy Tier FlashCopy IBM Netfinity Power Systems Redbooks Redbooks (logo) Storwize System i System Storage Tivoli VIA XIV xSeries
The following terms are trademarks of other companies: VIA, and TEALEAF device are trademarks or registered trademarks of Tealeaf, an IBM Company. Intel, Intel logo, Intel Inside logo, and Intel Centrino logo are trademarks or registered trademarks of Intel Corporation or its subsidiaries in the United States and other countries. Linux is a trademark of Linus Torvalds in the United States, other countries, or both. Microsoft, Windows, and the Windows logo are trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States, other countries, or both. Java, and all Java-based trademarks and logos are trademarks or registered trademarks of Oracle and/or its affiliates. UNIX is a registered trademark of The Open Group in the United States and other countries. Other company, product, or service names may be trademarks or service marks of others.
Preface
Organizations of all sizes are faced with the challenge of managing massive volumes of increasingly valuable data. But storing this data can be costly, and extracting value from the data is becoming more and more difficult. IT organizations have limited resources but must stay responsive to dynamic environments and act quickly to consolidate, simplify, and optimize their IT infrastructures. The IBM Storwize V3700 system provides a smarter solution that is affordable, easy to use, and self-optimizing, which enables organizations to overcome these storage challenges. Storwize V3700 delivers efficient, entry-level configurations that are specifically designed to meet the needs of small and midsize businesses. Designed to provide organizations with the ability to consolidate and share data at an affordable price, Storwize V3700 offers advanced software capabilities that are usually found in more expensive systems. Built upon innovative IBM technology, Storwize V3700 addresses the block storage requirements of small and midsize organizations. Providing up to 240 TB of capacity packaged in a compact 2U, Storwize V3700 is designed to accommodate the most common storage network technologies to enable easy implementation and management. Storwize V3700 includes the following features: Web-based GUI provides point-and-click management capabilities. Internal disk storage virtualization enables rapid, flexible provisioning and simple configuration changes. Thin provisioning enables applications to grow dynamically but only use space they actually need. Enables simple data migration from external storage to Storwize V3700 storage (one way from another storage device). Remote Mirror to create copies of data at remote locations for disaster recovery. IBM FlashCopy creates instant application copies for backup or application testing. This IBM Redbooks publication is intended for pre- and post-sales technical support professionals and storage administrators. The concepts in this book also relate to the IBM Storwize V3500. This book was written at a software level of Version 7 Release 1.
xi
Authors
This book was produced by a team of specialists from around the world working at the IBM Manchester Lab, UK.
Jon Tate is a Project Manager for IBM System Storage SAN Solutions at the International Technical Support Organization, San Jose Center. Before joining the ITSO in 1999, he worked in the IBM Technical Support Center, providing Level 2/3 support for IBM storage products. Jon has over 27 years of experience in storage software and management, services, and support, and is an IBM Certified Consulting IT Specialist and an IBM SAN Certified Specialist. He is also the UK Chairman of the Storage Networking Industry Association. Saiprasad Prabhakar Parkar is a senior IT Specialist for IBM at the ISTL Pune, India. He has worked for IBM for five years and provides Level 3 support for UNIX, IBM Power Systems, and storage products. Sai has 10 years of experience in UNIX and Power System and Storage. He is IBM Certified Solution Specialist.
Lee Sirett is a Storage Technical Advisor for the European Storage Competency Centre in Mainz, Germany. Before joining the ESCC, he worked in IBM Technical Support Services for 10 years providing support on a range of IBM Products including Power Systems. Lee has 24 years experience in the IT Industry. He is IBM Storage Certified and an IBM Certified XIV Administrator and Certified XIV Specialist.
Chris Tapsell is a Presales Storage Technical Specialist for IBM Systems & Technology Group. Before his current role, in his 25+ years at IBM, he has worked as a CE covering products such as Golf Ball typewriters up to AS400 (System i), as a Support Specialist for all of the IBM Intel server products (PC Server, Netfinity, xSeries & System x), PCs and notebooks, and as a Presales Technical Specialist for System x. Chris holds a number of IBM Certifications covering System x and storage products.
xii
Paulo Tomiyoshi Takeda is a SAN and Storage Disk specialist at IBM Brazil. He has over eight years of experience in the IT arena. He holds a bachelors degree in Information Systems from UNIFEB (Universidade da Fundao Educacional de Barretos) and is IBM Certified for IBM DS8000 and IBM Storwize V7000. His areas of expertise include planning, configuring and troubleshooting DS8000, SAN Volume Controller and IBM Storwize V7000. He is involved in storage-related projects such as capacity growth planning, SAN consolidation, storage microcode upgrades, and copy services in the Open Systems environment. Thanks to the following people for their contributions to this project: Martyn Spink Djihed Afifi Karl Martin Imran Imtiaz Doug Neil David Turnbull Stephen Bailey IBM Manchester Lab John Fairhurst Paul Marris Paul Merrison IBM Hursley Mary Connell IBM STG Thanks to the following authors of the previous edition of this book: Uwe Dubberke Justin Heather Andrew Hickey Imran Imtiaz Nancy Kinney Dieter Utesch
Now you can become a published author, too!

Heres an opportunity to spotlight your skills, grow your career, and become a published authorall at the same time! Join an ITSO residency project and help write a book in your area of expertise, while honing your experience using leading-edge technologies. Your efforts will help to increase product acceptance and customer satisfaction, as you expand your network of technical contacts and relationships. Residencies run from two to six weeks in length, and you can participate either in person or as a remote resident working from your home base. Find out more about the residency program, browse the residency index, and apply online at this website: http://www.ibm.com/redbooks/residencies.html
Preface
xiii
Comments welcome
Your comments are important to us! We want our books to be as helpful as possible. Send us your comments about this book or other IBM Redbooks publications in one of the following ways: Use the online Contact us review Redbooks form found at this website: http://www.ibm.com/redbooks Send your comments in an email to: redbooks@us.ibm.com Mail your comments to: IBM Corporation, International Technical Support Organization Dept. HYTD Mail Station P099 2455 South Road Poughkeepsie, NY 12601-5400
Stay connected to IBM Redbooks

Find us on Facebook: http://www.facebook.com/IBMRedbooks Follow us on Twitter: http://twitter.com/ibmredbooks Look for us on LinkedIn: http://www.linkedin.com/groups?home=&gid=2130806 Explore new Redbooks publications, residencies, and workshops with the IBM Redbooks weekly newsletter: https://www.redbooks.ibm.com/Redbooks.nsf/subscribe?OpenForm Stay current on recent Redbooks publications with RSS Feeds: http://www.redbooks.ibm.com/rss.html
xiv
Summary of changes
This section describes the technical changes made in this edition of the book and in previous editions. This edition might also include minor corrections and editorial changes that are not identified. Summary of Changes for SG24-8107-01 for Implementing the IBM Storwize V3700 as created or updated on October 9, 2013.
October 2013, Second Edition

This revision reflects the addition, deletion, or modification of new and changed information described below.
New information
FlashCopy Remote Mirror Easy Tier
Changed information
Screen shots updated to 7.1 CLI command issuance and output
xv
xvi
Chapter 1.
Overview of the IBM Storwize V3700 system

This chapter provides an overview of the IBM Storwize V3700 architecture and includes a brief explanation of storage virtualization. This chapter includes the following topics: IBM Storwize V3700 overview IBM Storwize V3700 terminology IBM Storwize V3700 models IBM Storwize V3700 hardware IBM Storwize V3700 terms IBM Storwize V3700 features Problem management and support
1.1 IBM Storwize V3700 overview

The IBM Storwize V3700 solution provides a modular storage system that includes the capability to virtualize its own internal storage. The IBM Storwize V3700 system is a virtualizing RAID entry storage system. IBM Storwize V3700 features the following benefits: Brings enterprise technology to entry storage Speciality administrators are not required Easy client setup and service Ability to grow the system incrementally as storage capacity and performance needs change Simple integration into the server environment The IBM Storwize V3700 addresses the block storage requirements of small and midsize organizations and consists of one 2U control enclosure and, optionally, up to four 2U expansion enclosures that are connected via SAS cables, which make up one system that is called an I/O Group. The control and expansion enclosures are available in the following factors and can be intermixed within an I/O group: 12x 3.5" drives in a 2U unit 24x 2.5" drives in a 2U unit Within each enclosure are two canisters. Control enclosures contain two node canisters, and expansion enclosures contain two expansion canisters. The IBM Storwize V3700 scales up to 60 x 3.5-inch or 120 x 2.5-inch or a combination of both drive form factors. Drive types supported are: The SAS, NL-SAS and solid-state drives (SSDs) are the supported drive types. IBM Storwize V3700 provides host attachment through 6 Gb SAS and 1 Gb iSCSI host interfaces with optional 8 Gb Fibre Channel, 10 Gb iSCSI/Fibre Channel over Ethernet host ports or 6 Gb SAS 4-port host interface card (HIC). Important: IBM Storwize V3700 can be direct attached to a host. For more information about restrictions, see the IBM System Storage Interoperation Center (SSIC) at this website: http://www.ibm.com/systems/support/storage/ssic/interoperability.wss Host attachment information also is available at this website: http://pic.dhe.ibm.com/infocenter/storwize/v3700_ic/topic/com.ibm.storwize.v370 0.710.doc/svc_hostattachmentmain.html
The IBM Storwize V3700 is a virtualized storage solution that groups its internal drives into RAID arrays, which are called Managed Disks (MDisks). These MDisks are then grouped into Storage Pools. Volumes are then created from these Storage Pools and provisioned out to hosts. Storage Pools are normally created with MDisks of the same type and capacity of drive. Volumes can be moved non-disruptively between Storage Pools with differing performance characteristics. For example, a volume can be moved between a Storage Pool made up of NL-SAS drives to a Storage Pool made up of SAS drives. The IBM Storwize V3700 system also provides several configuration options that are aimed at simplifying the implementation process. It also provides configuration presets and automated wizards, called Directed Maintenance Procedures (DMP) to help resolve any events that might occur. IBM Storwize V3700 system provides a simple and easy to use graphical user interface (GUI) that is designed to allow storage to be deployed quickly and efficiently. The GUI runs on any supported browser. The management GUI contains a series of preestablished configuration options called presets that use commonly used settings to quickly configure objects on the system. Presets are available for creating volumes and IBM FlashCopy mappings and for setting up a RAID configuration. You can also use the command-line interface (CLI) to set up or control the system.
1.2 IBM Storwize V3700 terminology

The IBM Storwize V3700 system introduced some terminology, which is consistent with the entire IBM Storwize family and SAN Volume Controller, as shown in Table 1-1.
Table 1-1 IBM Storwize V3700 terminology IBM Storwize V3700 term Battery Canister Definition Each control enclosure node canister in a IBM Storwize V3700 contains a battery. Canisters are hardware units that are subcomponents of a IBM Storwize V3700 enclosures. Each enclosure contains two canisters. A set of enclosures that is attached to provide redundant access to the drives that are inside the enclosures. Each control enclosure has two chains. A copy of a volume on a server at a particular point. The contents of the copy can be customized while the contents of the original volume are preserved. A hardware unit that includes the chassis, node canisters, drives, and power sources. By using IBM Storwize V3700, you can migrate data from existing external storage to its internal volumes. IBM Storwize V3700 supports a range of hard disk drives (HDDs) and solid-state drives (SSDs). An enclosure is the basic housing unit for the IBM Storwize V3700. It is the rack-mounted hardware that contains all the main components of the system: canisters, drives, and power supplies.
Chain
Clone
Control enclosure Data migration Drive Enclosure
Chapter 1. Overview of the IBM Storwize V3700 system
IBM Storwize V3700 term Event
Definition An occurrence that is significant to a task or system. Events can include completion or failure of an operation, a user action, or the change in the state of a process. A hardware unit that includes the serial-attached SCSI (SAS) interface hardware that enables the node hardware to use the drives of the expansion enclosure. A hardware unit that includes expansion canisters, drives, and power supply units. Fibre Channel ports are connections for the hosts to get access to the IBM Storwize V3700. The process of controlling which hosts can access specific volumes within a IBM Storwize V3700. Internet Protocol (IP)-based storage networking standard for linking data storage facilities. Array MDisks and drives that are held in enclosures and nodes that are part of the IBM Storwize V3700. A component of a storage pool that is managed by a clustered system. An MDisk is part of a RAID array of internal storage. An MDisk is not visible to a host system on the storage area network. A hardware unit that includes the node hardware, fabric, and service interfaces, serial-attached SCSI (SAS), expansion ports, and battery. A single SAS lane. There are four PHYs in each SAS cable. Each enclosure has two power supply units (PSU). A disk that contains a reserved area that is used exclusively for cluster management. The quorum disk is accessed when it is necessary to determine which half of the cluster continues to read and write data. SAS ports are connections for the host to get direct attached access to the IBM Storwize V3700 and expansion enclosure. An image backup type that consists of a point-in-time view of a volume. A collection of storage capacity that provides the capacity requirements for a volume. The SAS connectivity of a set of drives within multiple enclosures. The enclosures can be control enclosures or expansion enclosures. The ability to define a storage unit (full system, storage pool, or volume) with a logical capacity size that is larger than the physical capacity that us assigned to that storage unit. Increases system maximum IOPS and maximum throughput. A discrete unit of storage on disk, tape, or other data recording medium that supports some form of identifier and parameter list, such as a volume label or input/output control.
Expansion canister
Expansion enclosure Fibre Channel port Host mapping iSCSI (Internet Small Computer System Interface) Internal storage Managed disk (MDisk)
Node canister
PHY Power Supply Unit Quorum disk
Serial-Attached SCSI (SAS) ports Snapshot Storage pool Strand
Thin provisioning or thin provisioned Turbo Performance Volume
IBM Storwize V3700 term Worldwide port names
Definition Each Fibre Channel or SAS port is identified by their physical port number and worldwide port name (WWPN).
1.3 IBM Storwize V3700 models

The IBM Storwize V3700 platform consists of several different models. More information: For more information about the features, benefits, and specifications of IBM Storwize V3700 models, see this website: http://www.ibm.com/systems/storage/disk/storwize_v3700/overview.html The information in this book is accurate at the time of writing. However, as the IBM Storwize V3700 matures, expect to see new features and enhanced specifications.
The IBM Storwize V3700 models are described in Table 1-2. All models have two node canisters. C models are control enclosures and E models are expansion enclosures.
Table 1-2 IBM Storwize V3700 models Model 2072-12C (with two node canister) 2072-24C (with two node canister) 2072-12E (one expansion enclosure) 2072-24E (one expansion enclosure) Total System Cache 8 GB upgradeable to 16 GB 8 GB upgradeable to 16 GB N/A N/A Drive slots 12 x 3.5-inch per enclosure 24 x 2.5-inch per enclosure 12 x 3.5-inch 24 x 2.5-inch
Figure 1-1 shows the front view of the 2072-12C and 12E enclosures.
Figure 1-1 IBM Storwize V3700 front view for 2072-12C and 12E enclosures
The drives are positioned in four columns of three horizontal-mounted drive assemblies. The drive slots are numbered 1 - 12, starting at upper left and going left to right, top to bottom.
Figure 1-2 shows the front view of the 2072-24C and 24E enclosures.
Figure 1-2 IBM Storwize V3700 front view for 2072-24C and 24E enclosure
The drives are positioned in one row of 24 vertically mounted drive assemblies. The drive slots are numbered 1 - 24, starting from the left. There is a vertical center drive bay molding between slots 12 and 13.
1.4 IBM Storwize V3700 hardware

The IBM Storwize V3700 solution is a modular storage system that is built on a common enclosure (control enclosure and expansion enclosure). Figure 1-3 shows an overview of the hardware components of the IBM Storwize V3700 solution.
Figure 1-3 IBM Storwize V3700 hardware components
Figure 1-4 shows the controller rear view of IBM Storwize V3700 models 12C and 24C.
Figure 1-4 IBM Storwize V3700 controller rear view - models 12C and 24C
In Figure 1-4, you can see that there are two power supply slots at the bottom of the enclosure. The Power Supply units are identical and exchangeable. There are two canister slots at the top of the chassis. In Figure 1-5, you can see the rear view of an IBM Storwize V3700 expansion enclosure.
Figure 1-5 IBM Storwize V3700 expansion enclosure rear view - models 12E and 24E
You can see that the only difference between the control enclosure and the expansion enclosure are the canisters. The canisters of the expansion have only the two SAS ports. For more information about the expansion enclosure, see Expansion enclosure on page 10.
1.4.1 Control enclosure

Each IBM Storwize V3700 system has one control enclosure that contains two node canisters, disk drives, and two power supplies. Figure 1-6 shows a single node canister.
Figure 1-6 IBM Storwize V3700 node canister
Each node canister contains the following hardware: Battery Memory: 4 GB memory (upgradeable to 8 GB) Host Interface Card slot (different options are possible) Four 6 Gbps SAS ports Two 10/100/1000 Mbps Ethernet ports Two USB 2.0 ports (one port is used during installation) System flash The battery is used in case of power loss. The IBM Storwize V3700 system uses this battery to power the canister while the cache data is written to the internal system flash. This memory dump is called a fire hose memory dump. After the system is up again, this data is loaded back to the cache for destage to the disks. Figure 1-6 on page 8 also shows the following ports, which are provided by the IBM Storwize V3700 node canister: Two 10/100/1000 Mbps Ethernet ports Port 1 (left port) must be configured. The second port is optional and is used for management. Both ports can be used for iSCSI traffic. For more information, see Chapter 4, Host configuration on page 151. Two USB ports. One port is used during the initial configuration or when there is a problem. They are numbered 1 on the left and 2 on the right. For more information about usage, see Chapter 2, Initial configuration on page 27. Four serial attached SCSI (SAS) ports. These ports are numbered 1 on the left to 4 on the right. The IBM Storwize V3700 uses ports 1, 2 and 3 for host connectivity and port 4 to connect to the optional expansion enclosures. The IBM Storwize V3700 incorporates one SAS chains and four expansion enclosures can be connected to each chain. Service port: Do not use the port that is marked with a wrench. This port is a service port only. The two nodes act as a single processing unit and form an I/O Group that is attached to the SAN fabric, an iSCSI infrastructure or directly attached to hosts via FC or SAS. The pair of node is responsible for serving I/O to a volume. The two nodes provide a highly available fault-tolerant controller so that if one node fails, the surviving node automatically takes over. Nodes are deployed in a pair that is called an I/O Group. One node is designated as the configuration node, but each node in the control enclosures holds a copy of the control enclosure state information. The IBM Storwize V3700 only supports one I/O group in a clustered system. The terms node canister and node are used interchangeably throughout this book.
1.4.2 Expansion enclosure

The optional IBM Storwize V3700 expansion enclosure contains two expansion canisters, disk drives, and two power supplies. Figure 1-7 shows an overview of the expansion enclosure.
Figure 1-7 Expansion enclosure of the IBM Storwize V3700
The expansion enclosure power supplies are the same as the control enclosure. There is a single power lead connector on each power supply unit. Figure 1-8 shows the expansion canister ports.
Figure 1-8 Expansion canister ports
Each expansion canister that is shown in Figure 1-8 provides two SAS interfaces that are used to connect to the control enclosure and any optional expansion enclosures. The ports are numbered 1 on the left and 2 on the right. SAS port 1 is the IN port and SAS port 2 is the OUT port. The use of the SAS connector 1 is mandatory because the expansion enclosure must be attached to a control enclosure or another expansion enclosure. SAS connector 2 is optional because it is used to attach to more expansion enclosures. Each port includes two LEDs to show the status. The first LED indicates the link status and the second LED indicates the fault status. For more information about LED or ports, see this website: http://pic.dhe.ibm.com/infocenter/storwize/v3700_ic/topic/com.ibm.storwize.v3700.7 10.doc/tbrd4_expcanindi.html
10
1.4.3 Host interface cards

In addition to 1Gb iSCSI, 6Gb SAS, there are options to purchase host interface cards for your control enclosure. Table 1-3 lists the IBM Storwize V3700 configurations available.
Table 1-3 IBM Storwize V3700 configurations available Standard 1Gb iSCSI 4 ports 4 ports 4 ports 4 ports 4 ports 6Gb SAS 6 ports 6 ports 6 ports 6 ports 6 ports Optional 1Gb iSCSI 8 ports 6Gb SAS 8 ports 8Gb FC 8 ports 10Gb iSCSI/FCoE 4 ports
1.4.4 Disk drive types

IBM Storwize V3700 enclosures support SSD, SAS, and Nearline SAS drive types. Each drive has two ports (two PHYs) and I/O can be issued down both paths simultaneously. Table 1-4 shows the IBM Storwize V3700 Disk Drive types that are available at the time of writing.
Table 1-4 IBM Storwize V3700 Disk Drive types Drive type 2.5-inch form factor 2.5-inch form factor 2.5-inch form factor 2.5-inch form factor 3.5-inch form factor 3.5-inch form factor 3.5-inch form factor Solid-state disk SAS SAS Nearline SAS SAS SAS Nearline SAS Speed N/A 10,000 rpm 15,000 rpm 7,200 rpm 10,000 rpm 15,000 rpm 7,200 rpm Size 200 and 400 GB 600 GB, 900 GB and 1.2 TB 146 and 300 GB 500 GB and 1 TB 900 GB and 1.2 TB (1) 300 GB(1) 2, 3 and 4TB
(1) 2.5 drive in a 3.5 drive carrier.
11
1.5 IBM Storwize V3700 terms

In this section, we introduce the terms that are used for the IBM Storwize V3700 throughout this book.
1.5.1 Hosts
A host system is a server that is connected to IBM Storwize V3700 through a Fibre Channel connection, an iSCSI connection, or through a SAS connection. Hosts are defined on IBM Storwize V3700 by identifying their worldwide port names (WWPNs) for Fibre Channel and SAS hosts. iSCSI hosts are identified by using their iSCSI names. The iSCSI names can be iSCSI qualified names (IQNs) or extended unique identifiers (EUIs). For more information, see Chapter 4, Host configuration on page 151. Hosts can be Fibre Channel attached via an existing Fibre Channel network infrastructure or direct attached, iSCSI/FCoE attached via an existing IP network, or directly attached via SAS. A significant benefit of having direct attachment is that you can attach the host directly to the IBM Storwize V3700 without the need for an FC or IP network.
1.5.2 Node canister

Each single processing unit is a node canister, which is also called a node. A node canister provides host interfaces, management interfaces, and SAS interfaces to the control enclosure. A node canister has the cache memory, the internal storage to store software and logs, and the processing power to run the IBM Storwize V3700 virtualizing and management software. A clustered system consists of a one node pairs. One of the nodes within the system is known as the configuration node that manages configuration activity for the clustered system. If this node fails, the system nominates the other node to become the configuration node.
1.5.3 I/O Group

Within IBM Storwize V3700, there is one pair of node canisters known as an I/O group. The IBM Storwize V3700 supports maximum of the two node canisters in the clustered system, which provides a single I/O Group. When a host server performs I/O to one of its volumes, all the I/Os for a specific volume are directed to the I/O Group. Also, under normal conditions, the I/Os for that specific volume are always processed by the same node within the I/O Group. Both nodes of the I/O Group act as preferred nodes for their own specific subset of the total number of volumes that the I/O Group presents to the host servers (a maximum of 2048 volumes per system). However, both nodes also act as a failover node for its partner node. Therefore, a node takes over the I/O workload from its partner node (if required) without affecting the servers application. In a IBM Storwize V3700 environment that uses active-active architecture, the I/O handling for a volume can be managed by both nodes. Therefore, servers that are connected through Fibre Channel connectors must use multipath device drivers to handle this capability.
12
The IBM Storwize V3700 I/O Group can be connected to the SAN so that all application servers can access the volumes from the I/O Group. Up to 256 host server objects can be defined to the IBM Storwize V3700. Important: The active/active architecture provides availability to process I/Os for both control nodes and allows the application to continue running smoothly, even if the server has only one access route or path to the storage controller. This type of architecture eliminates the path/LUN thrashing typical of an active/passive architecture.
1.5.4 Clustered system

A clustered system consists of two node canisters or a single I/O Group. All configuration, monitoring, and service tasks are performed at the system level. The configuration settings are replicated across the node canisters in the clustered system. To facilitate these tasks, one or two management IP addresses are set for the clustered system. By using this configuration, you can manage the clustered system as a single entity. There is a process to back up the system configuration data on to disk so that the clustered system can be restored in the event of a disaster. This method does not back up application data; only IBM Storwize V3700 system configuration information is backed up. System configuration backup: After the system configuration is backed up, save the backup data on your hard disk (or at the least outside of the SAN). If you are unable to access the IBM Storwize V3700, you do not have access to the backup data if it is on the SAN. Perform this configuration backup after each configuration change to be on the safe side. The system can be configured by using the IBM Storwize V3700 management software (GUI), the CLI, or the USB key.
1.5.5 RAID
The IBM Storwize V3700 contains a number of internal drives, but these drives cannot be directly added to Storage Pools. The drives must be included in a Redundant Array of Independent Disks (RAID) array to provide protection against the failure of individual drives. These drives are referred to as members of the array. Each array has a RAID level. RAID levels provide different degrees of redundancy and performance, and have different restrictions regarding the number of members in the array. The IBM Storwize V3700 supports hot spare drives. When an array member drive fails, the system automatically replaces the failed member with a hot spare drive and rebuilds the array to restore its redundancy. Candidate and spare drives can be manually exchanged with array members. Each array has a set of goals that describe the required location and performance of each array. A sequence of drive failures and hot spare takeovers can leave an array unbalanced, that is, with members that do not match these goals. The system automatically rebalances such arrays when the appropriate drives are available. The following RAID levels are available: RAID 0 (striping, no redundancy) RAID 1 (mirroring between two drives, implemented as RAID 10 with 2 drives)
13
RAID 5 (striping, can survive one drive fault, with parity) RAID 6 (striping, can survive two drive faults, with parity) RAID 10 (RAID 0 on top of RAID 1) RAID 0 arrays stripe data across the drives. The system supports RAID 0 arrays with one member, which is similar to traditional JBOD attach. RAID 0 arrays have no redundancy, so they do not support hot spare takeover or immediate exchange. A RAID 0 array can be formed by one to eight drives. RAID 1 arrays stripe data over mirrored pairs of drives. A RAID 1 array mirrored pair is rebuilt independently. A RAID 1 array can be formed by two drives only. RAID 5 arrays stripe data over the member drives with one parity strip on every stripe. RAID 5 arrays have single redundancy. The parity algorithm means that an array can tolerate no more than one member drive failure. A RAID 5 array can be formed by 3 - 16 drives. RAID 6 arrays stripe data over the member drives with two parity stripes (which is known as the P-parity and the Q-parity) on every stripe. The two parity strips are calculated by using different algorithms, which give the array double redundancy. A RAID 6 array can be formed by 5 - 16 drives. RAID 10 arrays have single redundancy. Although they can tolerate one failure from every mirrored pair, they cannot tolerate two-disk failures. One member out of every pair can be rebuilding or missing at the same time. A RAID 10 array can be formed by 2 - 16 drives.
1.5.6 Managed disks

A managed disk (MDisk) refers to the unit of storage that IBM Storwize V3700 virtualizes. This unit is a RAID array consisting of internal drives. The IBM Storwize V3700 then can allocate these MDisks into storage pools. An MDisk is not visible to a host system on the storage area network because it is internal in the IBM Storwize V3700 system. An MDisk features the following modes: Array Array mode MDisks are constructed from internal drives by using the RAID functionality. Array MDisks are always associated with storage pools. Image Image MDisks are LUNs presented by external storage systems to an IBM Storwize V3700 and assigned directly to a volume with a one-to-one mapping of extents between the MDisk and the volume. For more information, see Chapter 6, Storage migration wizard on page 261.
1.5.7 Quorum disks

A quorum disk is an MDisk that contains a reserved area for use exclusively by the system. In the IBM Storwize V3700, internal drives can be considered as quorum candidates. The clustered system uses quorum disks to break a tie when exactly half the nodes in the system remain after a SAN failure. The clustered system automatically forms the quorum disk by taking a small amount of space from an MDisk. It allocates space from up to three different MDisks for redundancy, although only one quorum disk is active. 14
If the environment has multiple storage systems, you should allocate the quorum disk on different storage systems to avoid the possibility of losing all of the quorum disks because of a failure of a single storage system. It is possible to manage the quorum disks by using the CLI.
1.5.8 Storage pools

A storage pool is a collection of MDisks (up to 128) that are grouped to provide capacity for volumes. All MDisks in the pool are split into extents with the same size. Volumes are then allocated out of the storage pool and are mapped to a host system. MDisks can be added to a Storage Pool at any time to increase the capacity of the pool. MDisks can belong in only one storage pool. For more information, see Chapter 7, Storage pools on page 313. Each MDisk in the storage pool is divided into a number of extents. The size of the extent ranges from 16 MB - 8 GB. Default extent size: The GUI of IBM Storwize V3700 has a default extent size value of 1 GB when you define a new Storage Pool. This is a change in the IBM Storwize code v7.1. The GUI does not have the option to change the extent size. Therefore, if you want to create Storage Pools with a different extent size, this must be done via the CLI by using the mkmdiskgrp commands. The extent size directly affects the maximum volume size and storage capacity of the clustered system. A system can manage 2^22 (4,194,304) extents. For example, with a 16 MB extent size, the system can manage up to 16 MB x 4,194,304 = 64 TB of storage
15
The effect of extent size on the maximum volume and cluster size is shown in Table 1-5.
Table 1-5 Maximum volume and cluster capacity by extent size Extent size (MB) 16 32 64 128 256 512 1024 2048 4096 8192 Maximum volume capacity for normal volumes (GB) 2048 (2 TB) 4096 (4 TB) 8192 (8 TB) 16384 (16 TB) 32768 (32 TB) 65536 (64 TB) 131072 (128 TB) 262144 (256 TB) 262144 (256 TB) 262144 (256 TB) Maximum storage capacity of cluster 64 TB 128 TB 256 TB 512 TB 1 PB 2 PB 4 PB 8 PB 16 PB 32 PB
Use the same extent size for all storage pools in a clustered system, which is a prerequisite if you want to migrate a volume between two storage pools. If the storage pool extent sizes are not the same, you must use volume mirroring to copy volumes between storage pools, as described in Chapter 8, Advanced host and volume administration on page 353. A storage pool can have a threshold warning set that automatically issues a warning alert when the used capacity of the storage pool exceeds the set limit.
Single-tiered Storage Pool

MDisks that are used in a single-tiered Storage Pool should have the following characteristics to prevent performance and other problems: They should have the same hardware characteristics, for example, the same RAID type, RAID array size, disk type, and disk revolutions per minute (rpms). The disk subsystems providing the MDisks must have similar characteristics, for example, maximum input/output operations per second (IOPS), response time, cache, and throughput. Use MDisks of the same size, and ensure that the MDisks provide the same number of extents. If this configuration is not feasible, you must check the distribution of the volumes extents in that storage pool.
Multitiered Storage Pool

A multitiered Storage Pool has a mix of MDisks with more than one type of disk tier attribute; for example, a storage pool that contains a mix of generic_hdd AND generic_ssd MDisks. A multitiered Storage Pool contains MDisks with different characteristics as opposed to the single-tiered Storage Pool. However, each tier should have MDisks of the same size and MDisks that provide the same number of extents. A multitiered Storage Pool is used to enable automatic migration of extents between disk tiers using the IBM Storwize V3700 Easy Tier function, as described in Chapter 9, Easy Tier on page 411.
16
1.5.9 Volumes
A volume is a logical disk that is presented to a host system by the clustered system. In our virtualized environment, the host system has a volume that is mapped to it by IBM Storwize V3700. The IBM Storwize V3700 translates this volume into a number of extents, which are allocated across MDisks. The advantage with storage virtualization is that the host is decoupled from the underlying storage, so the virtualization appliance can move around the extents without impacting the host system. The host system cannot directly access the underlying MDisks in the same manner as it can access RAID arrays in a traditional storage environment. The following types of volumes are available: Striped A striped volume is allocated one extent in turn from each MDisk in the storage pool. This process continues until the space that is required for the volume is satisfied. It also is possible to supply a list of MDisks to use. Figure 1-9 shows how a striped volume is allocated, assuming 10 extents are required.
Figure 1-9 IBM Storwize V3700 Striped volume
17
Sequential A sequential volume is a volume in which the extents are allocated one after the other from one MDisk to the next MDisk, as shown in Figure 1-10.
Figure 1-10 Sequential volume
Image mode Image mode volumes are special volumes that have a direct relationship with one MDisk. They are used to migrate existing data into and out of the clustered system to or from external FC SAN-attached storage. When the image mode volume is created, a direct mapping is made between extents that are on the MDisk and the extents that are on the volume. The logical block address (LBA) x on the MDisk is the same as the LBA x on the volume, which ensures that the data on the MDisk is preserved as it is brought into the clustered system, as shown in Figure 1-11 on page 19.
18
Figure 1-11 Image mode volume
Some virtualization functions are not available for image mode volumes, so it is often useful to migrate the volume into a new storage pool. After it is migrated, the MDisk becomes a managed MDisk. If you want to migrate data from an existing storage subsystem, use the Storage Migration wizard, which guides you through the process. For more information, see Chapter 6, Storage migration wizard on page 261. If you add an MDisk containing data to a storage pool, any data on the MDisk is lost. If you are presenting externally virtualized LUNs that contain data to an IBM Storwize V3700, import them as image mode volumes to ensure data integrity or use the migration wizard.
1.5.10 iSCSI
iSCSI is an alternative method of attaching hosts to the IBM Storwize V3700. The iSCSI function is a software function that is provided by the IBM Storwize V3700 code, not hardware. In the simplest terms, iSCSI allows the transport of SCSI commands and data over an Internet Protocol network that is based on IP routers and Ethernet switches. iSCSI is a block-level protocol that encapsulates SCSI commands into TCP/IP packets and uses an existing IP network, instead of requiring FC HBAs and a SAN fabric infrastructure. The following concepts of names and addresses are carefully separated in iSCSI: An iSCSI name is a location-independent, permanent identifier for an iSCSI node. An iSCSI node has one iSCSI name, which stays constant for the life of the node. The terms initiator name and target name also refer to an iSCSI name.
19
An iSCSI address specifies the iSCSI name of an iSCSI node and a location of that node. The address consists of a host name or IP address, a TCP port number (for the target), and the iSCSI name of the node. An iSCSI node can have any number of addresses, which can change at any time, particularly if they are assigned by way of Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol (DHCP). An IBM Storwize V3700 node represents an iSCSI node and provides statically allocated IP addresses. Each iSCSI node, that is, an initiator or target, has a unique iSCSI Qualified Name (IQN), which can have a size of up to 255 bytes. The IQN is formed according to the rules that were adopted for Internet nodes. The IQNs can be abbreviated by using a descriptive name, which is known as an alias. An alias can be assigned to an initiator or a target. The IBM Storwize V3700 also supports the use of the FCoE protocol, which encapsulates the native Fibre Channel frames into Ethernet frames.
1.5.11 SAS
SAS standard is an alternative method of attaching hosts to the IBM Storwize V3700. The IBM Storwize V3700 supports direct SAS host attachment that provides easy-to-use, affordable storage needs. Each SAS port device has a worldwide unique 64-bit SAS address.
1.6 IBM Storwize V3700 features

The features that are available with the IBM Storwize V3700 are described in this section.
1.6.1 Volume mirroring

IBM Storwize V3700 provides a function that is called storage volume mirroring, which enables a volume to have two physical copies. Each volume copy can belong to a different storage pool and can be generic or thin-provisioned which provides a high-availability solution. When a host system issues a write to a mirrored volume, IBM Storwize V3700 writes the data to both copies. When a host system issues a read to a mirrored volume, IBM Storwize V3700 requests it from the primary copy. If one of the mirrored volume copies is temporarily unavailable, the IBM Storwize V3700 automatically uses the alternative copy without any outage for the host system. When the mirrored volume copy is repaired, IBM Storwize V3700 resynchronizes the data. A mirrored volume can be converted into a non-mirrored volume by deleting one copy or by splitting away one copy to create a non-mirrored volume. The use of mirrored volumes also can assist with migrating volumes between storage pools that have different extent sizes. Mirrored volumes also can provide a mechanism to migrate fully allocated volumes to thin-provisioned volumes without any host outages. The Volume Mirroring feature is included as part of the base machine code and no license is required.
20
1.6.2 Thin provisioning

Volumes can be configured to be thin-provisioned or fully allocated. Concerning application reads and writes, a thin-provisioned volume behaves as though they were fully allocated. When a volume is created, the user specifies two capacities: the real capacity of the volume and its virtual capacity. The real capacity determines the quantity of MDisk extents that are allocated for the volume. The virtual capacity is the capacity of the volume that is reported to IBM Storwize V3700 and to the host servers. The real capacity is used to store the user data and the metadata for the thin-provisioned volume. The real capacity can be specified as an absolute value or a percentage of the virtual capacity. The thin provisioning feature can be used on its own to create over-allocated volumes, or it can be used with FlashCopy. Thin-provisioned volumes can be used with the mirrored volume feature as well. A thin-provisioned volume can be configured to autoexpand, which causes IBM Storwize V3700 to automatically expand the real capacity of a thin-provisioned volume as its real capacity is used. This parameter prevents the volume from going offline. Autoexpand attempts to maintain a fixed amount of unused real capacity on the volume. This amount is known as the contingency capacity. The default setting is 2%. The contingency capacity is initially set to the real capacity that is assigned when the volume is created. If the user modifies the real capacity, the contingency capacity is reset to be the difference between the used capacity and real capacity. A volume that is created with a zero contingency capacity goes offline as soon as it needs expand. A volume with a non-zero contingency capacity stays online until it is used up. Autoexpand does not cause the real capacity to grow much beyond the virtual capacity. The real capacity can be manually expanded to more than the maximum that is required by the current virtual capacity, and the contingency capacity is recalculated. To support the autoexpansion of thin-provisioned volumes, the storage pools from which they are allocated have a configurable warning capacity. When the used free capacity of the group exceeds the warning capacity, a warning is logged. For example, if a warning of 80% is specified, the warning is logged when 20% of the free capacity remains. A thin-provisioned volume can be converted to a fully allocated volume by using volume mirroring (and vice versa). The thin provisioning feature is included as part of the base machine code and no license is required.
1.6.3 Easy Tier

IBM Easy Tier provides a mechanism to seamlessly migrate hot spots to the most appropriate tier within the IBM Storwize V3700 solution. This migration might be to different tiers of internal drive within IBM Storwize V3700. The Easy Tier function can be turned on or off at the storage pool and volume level.
21
It is possible to demonstrate the potential benefit of Easy Tier in your environment before installing SSDs by using the IBM Storage Advisor Tool. The Easy Tier is described in more detail in Chapter 10, Copy services on page 449. The IBM Easy Tier feature is licensed per Storwize V3700 Storage system.
1.6.4 Turbo Performance

Turbo Performance is a licensed function that provides enhanced performance for the system. A 90-day trial version of this function is available. If a license is not purchased and activated before the trial period expires, the system reverts to non-turbo performance. The Turbo Performance feature does not require hardware changes and is nondisruptive upgrade. The Turbo Performance feature is licensed per IBM V3700 Storage system.
1.6.5 Storage Migration

The IBM Storwize V3700 Storage Migration feature allows you to easily move data from other Fibre Channel attached external storage to the internal capacity of the IBM Storwize V3700. Migrating data from other storage to the IBM Storwize V3700 storage system provides benefit from more functionality, such as the easy-to-use GUI, internal virtualization, thin provisioning, and Copy Services. The Storage Migration feature is included as part of the base machine code and no license is required.
1.6.6 FlashCopy
FlashCopy copies a source volume on to a target volume. The original contents of the target volume are lost. After the copy operation starts, the target volume has the contents of the source volume as it existed at a single point. Although the copy operation takes time, the resulting data at the target appears as though the copy was made instantaneously. FlashCopy is sometimes described as an instance of a time-zero (T0) copy or a point-in-time (PiT) copy technology. FlashCopy can be performed on multiple source and target volumes. FlashCopy permits the management operations to be coordinated so that a common single point-in-time is chosen for copying target volumes from their respective source volumes. IBM Storwize V3700 also permits multiple target volumes to be FlashCopied from the same source volume. This capability can be used to create images from separate points in time for the source volume, and to create multiple images from a source volume at a common point in time. Source and target volumes can be thin-provisioned volumes. Reverse FlashCopy enables target volumes to become restore points for the source volume without breaking the FlashCopy relationship and without waiting for the original copy operation to complete. IBM Storwize V3700 supports multiple targets and thus multiple rollback points. The base FlashCopy feature, which requires no license, provides up to 64 mappings. An optional license is available to upgrade FlashCopy mappings up to 2,040 mappings. 22
1.6.7 Remote Copy

Remote Copy can be maintained in one of two modes: synchronous or asynchronous. With the IBM Storwize V3700, Metro Mirror and Global Mirror are the IBM branded terms for the functions that are synchronous Remote Copy and asynchronous Remote Copy. The Metro Mirror and Global Mirror Copy Services features enable you to set up a relationship between two volumes so that updates that are made by an application to one volume are mirrored on the other volume. The volumes can be in the same system or on two different systems. For Metro Mirror and Global Mirror copy types, one volume is designated as the primary and the other volume is designated as the secondary. Host applications write data to the primary volume and updates to the primary volume are copied to the secondary volume. Normally, host applications do not perform I/O operations to the secondary volume. The Metro Mirror feature provides a synchronous-copy process. When a host writes to the primary volume, it does not receive confirmation of I/O completion until the write operation has completed for the copy on both the primary volume and the secondary volume. This ensures that the secondary volume is always up-to-date with the primary volume in the event that a failover operation must be performed. The Global Mirror feature provides an asynchronous-copy process. When a host writes to the primary volume, confirmation of I/O completion is received before the write operation has completed for the copy on the secondary volume. If a failover operation is performed, the application must recover and apply any updates that were not committed to the secondary volume. If I/O operations on the primary volume are paused for a small length of time, the secondary volume can become an exact match of the primary volume. Global Mirror can operate with or without cycling. When operating without cycling, write operations are applied to the secondary volume as soon as possible after they are applied to the primary volume. The secondary volume is generally less than 1 second behind the primary volume, which minimizes the amount of data that must be recovered in the event of a failover. However, this requires that a high-bandwidth link be provisioned between the two sites. When Global Mirror operates with cycling mode, changes are tracked and where needed copied to intermediate change volumes. Changes are transmitted to the secondary site periodically. The secondary volumes are much further behind the primary volume, and more data must be recovered in the event of a failover. Because the data transfer can be smoothed over a longer time period, however, lower bandwidth is required to provide an effective solution. For more information about the IBM Storwize V3700 Copy Services, see Chapter 10, Copy services on page 449. IBM Remote Copy is licensed per IBM Storwize V3700 Storage system.
Copy Services configuration limits

For the most up-to-date list of these limits, see this website: http://www-01.ibm.com/support/docview.wss?rs=591&uid=ssg1S1004380
23
1.7 Problem management and support

In this section, we introduce problem management and support topics.
1.7.1 IBM Assist On-site and remote service

The IBM Assist On-site tool is a remote desktop-sharing solution that is offered through the IBM website. With it, the IBM service representative can remotely view your system to troubleshoot a problem. You can maintain a chat session with the IBM service representative so that you can monitor this activity and understand how to fix the problem yourself or allow the representative to fix it for you. To use the IBM Assist On-site tool, the management PC that is used to manage the IBM Storwize V3700 must be able to access the Internet. For more information about this tool, see this website: http://www.ibm.com/support/assistonsite/ When you access the website, you sign in and enter a code that the IBM service representative provides to you. This code is unique to each IBM Assist On-site session. A plug-in is downloaded on to your PC to connect you and your IBM service representative to the remote service session. The IBM Assist On-site contains several layers of security to protect your applications and your computers. You also can use security features to restrict access by the IBM service representative.
1.7.2 Event notifications

IBM Storwize V3700 can use Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP) traps, syslog messages, and a Call Home email to notify you and the IBM Support Center when significant events are detected. Any combination of these notification methods can be used simultaneously. Each event that IBM Storwize V3700 detects is sent to a different recipient. You can configure IBM Storwize V3700 to send each type of notification to specific recipients or only the alerts that are important to the system.
1.7.3 SNMP traps

SNMP is a standard protocol for managing networks and exchanging messages. IBM Storwize V3700 can send SNMP messages that notify personnel about an event. You can use an SNMP manager to view the SNMP messages that IBM Storwize V3700 sends. You can use the management GUI or the IBM Storwize V3700 CLI to configure and modify your SNMP settings. You can use the Management Information Base (MIB) file for SNMP to configure a network management program to receive SNMP messages that are sent by the IBM Storwize V3700. This file can be used with SNMP messages from all versions of IBM Storwize V3700 software.
24
1.7.4 Syslog messages

The syslog protocol is a standard protocol for forwarding log messages from a sender to a receiver on an IP network. The IBM Storwize V3700 can send syslog messages that notify personnel about an event. IBM Storwize V3700 can also transmit syslog messages in expanded or concise format. You can use a syslog manager to view the syslog messages that IBM Storwize V3700 sends. IBM Storwize V3700 uses the User Datagram Protocol (UDP) to transmit the syslog message. You can use the management GUI or the CLI to configure and modify your syslog settings.
1.7.5 Call Home email

The Call Home feature transmits operational and error-related data to you and IBM through a Simple Mail Transfer Protocol (SMTP) server connection in the form of an event notification email. When it is configured, this function alerts IBM service personnel about hardware failures and potentially serious configuration or environmental issues. You can use the call home function if you have a maintenance contract with IBM or if the IBM Storwize V3700 is within the warranty period. To send email, you must configure at least one SMTP server. You can specify as many as five other SMTP servers for backup purposes. The SMTP server must accept the relaying of email from the IBM Storwize V3700 clustered system IP address. You can then use the management GUI or CLI to configure the email settings, including contact information and email recipients. Set the reply address to a valid email address. Send a test email to check that all connections and infrastructure are set up correctly. You can disable the Call Home function at any time by using the management GUI or CLI.
1.7.6 Useful IBM Storwize V3700 websites

For more information about the IBM Storwize V3700, see the following websites: The IBM Storwize V3700 home page: http://www.ibm.com/systems/storage/disk/storwize_v3700/index.html IBM Storwize V3700 Configuration Limit and Restrictions: http://www.ibm.com/support/docview.wss?rs=591&uid=ssg1S1004380 IBM Storwize V3700 Online Information Center: http://pic.dhe.ibm.com/infocenter/storwize/v3700_ic/index.jsp lBM Redbooks publications about IBM Storwize V3700: http://www.redbooks.ibm.com/cgi-bin/searchsite.cgi?query=V3700&SearchOrder=1&Se archFuzzy=
25
IBM Storwize V3700 learning videos on YouTube

Videos are available on YouTube that describe the Storwize GUI and are available at the URLs that are shown in Table 1-6.
Table 1-6 Videos available on YouTube Video description Introducing IBM Storwize V3700 IBM Storwize V3700 whats new IBM Storwize V7000 Volume management IBM Storwize V7000 Migration IBM Storwize V7000 Introduction to FlashCopy IBM SAN Volume Controller and Storwize V7000 Performance Panel Sped-up! (HD) IBM Storwize V3700 Hardware Installation IBM Storwize V3700 - Effortless Management IBM Storwize V3700 Initial Setup IBM Storwize V7000 Installation URL http://www.youtube.com/watch?v=AePPKiXE4xM http://www.youtube.com/watch?v=IdxnH9YWF9s http://www.youtube.com/watch?v=YXeKqH8Sd9o http://www.youtube.com/watch?v=dXxnUN6dk74 http://www.youtube.com/watch?v=MXWgGWjBzG4 http://www.youtube.com/watch?v=7noC71tLkWs http://www.youtube.com/watch?v=VuEfmfXihrs http://www.youtube.com/watch?v=BfGbKWcCsR4 http://www.youtube.com/watch?v=oj9uhTYe6gg http://www.youtube.com/watch?v=kCCFxM5ZMV4
These videos are applicable not only to IBM Storwize V3700 but also to the IBM Storwize V7000 because the GUI interface, functions, and features are similar to both products.
26
Chapter 2.
Initial configuration
This chapter provides a description of the initial configuration steps for the IBM Storwize V3700. This chapter includes the following topics: Planning for IBM Storwize V3700 installation First time setup Initial configuration steps Call Home, email event alert, and inventory settings
27
2.1 Hardware installation planning

Proper planning before the actual physical installation of the hardware is required. The following checklist of requirements can be used to plan your installation: Install the hardware as described in IBM Storwize V3700 Quick Installation Guide, GC27-4219 For more information about planning the IBM Storwize V3700 environment, see this website: http://pic.dhe.ibm.com/infocenter/storwize/v3700_ic/index.jsp?topic=%2Fcom.ibm. storwize.v3700.710.doc%2Fsvc_webplanning_21pb8b.html An appropriate 19-inch rack with 2 - 10 U of space should be available, depending on the number of enclosures to install. Each enclosure measures 2 U and a single control enclosure with up to four expansion enclosures constitutes an IBM Storwize V3700 system. There should be redundant power outlets in the rack for each of the two power cords that are included per enclosure. In all, 2 - 10 outlets are required, depending on the number of enclosures to install. The power cords conform to the IEC320 C13/C14 standards. A minimum of four Fibre Channel ports that are attached to the fabric are required. However, it is a best practice to use eight 2-, 4-, or 8-Gbps Fibre Channel ports. Fibre Channel ports: Fibre Channel ports are required only if you are using FC hosts. You can use the IBM Storwize V3700 with Ethernet-only cabling for iSCSI hosts or use SAS cabling for direct attach hosts. You should have eight 2-, 4-, or 8-Gbps compatible Fibre Channel cable drops. Up to six hosts can be directly connected by using SAS ports 1, 2, and 3 on each node canister, with SFF-8644 mini SAS HD cabling. You should have a minimum of two Ethernet ports on the LAN, with four preferred for more configuration access redundancy or iSCSI host access. You should have a minimum of two Ethernet cable drops, with four preferred for more configuration access redundancy or iSCSI host access. Ethernet port one on each node canister must be connected to the LAN, with port two as optional. Ports: Port 1 on each node canister must be connected to the same physical LAN or be configured in the same VLAN and be on the same subnet or set of subnets. Verify that the default IP addresses that are configured on Ethernet port 1 on each of the node canisters (192.168.70.121 on node one and 192.168.70.122 on node 2) do not conflict with existing IP addresses on the LAN. The default mask that is used with these IP addresses is 255.255.255.0 and the default gateway address that is used is 192.168.70.1. You should have a minimum of three IPv4 or IPv6 IP addresses for system configuration. One is for the clustered system and is what the administrator uses for management, and one for each node canister for service access as needed.
28
IP addresses: A fourth IP address should be used for backup configuration access. This other IP address allows a second system IP address to be configured on port 2 of either node canister, which the storage administrator can also use for management of the IBM Storwize V3700 system. A minimum of one and up to four IPv4 or IPv6 addresses are needed if iSCSI-attached hosts access volumes from the IBM Storwize V3700. A single 1, 3, or 6 meter SAS cable per expansion enclosure is required. The length of the cables depends on the physical rack location of the expansion relative to the control enclosure or other expansion enclosures. Locate the control enclosure so that up to four enclosures can be located, as shown in Figure 2-1. The IBM Storwize V3700 supports one external SAS chain using SAS port 4 on the control enclosure node canisters.
Figure 2-1 Connecting the SAS expansion cables example
The following connections must be made: Connect SAS port 4 of the left node canister in the control enclosure to SAS port 1 of the left expansion canisters in the first expansion enclosure.
Chapter 2. Initial configuration
29
Connect SAS port 4 of the right node canister in the control enclosure to SAS port 1 of the right expansion canisters in the first expansion enclosure. Connect SAS port 2 of the left node canister in the first expansion enclosure to SAS port 1 of the left expansion canister in the second expansion enclosure. Connect SAS port 2 of the right node canister in the first expansion enclosure to SAS port 1 of the right expansion canister in the second expansion enclosure Continue in this fashion, adding expansion controllers on the SAS chains originating at port 4 on the control enclosure node canisters. Disk drives: The disk drives that are included with the control enclosure (model 2072-12C or 2072-24C) are part of the single SAS chain. The expansion enclosures should be connected to the SAS chain as shown in Figure 2-1 on page 29 so that they can use the full bandwidth of the system.
2.2 SAN configuration planning

The recommended SAN configuration is composed of a minimum of two fabrics that encompass all host ports, and any ports on external storage systems that are to be virtualized by IBM Storwize V3700. The IBM Storwize V3700 ports are evenly split between the two fabrics to provide redundancy in the event one of the fabrics goes offline (planned or unplanned). Virtualized Storage: External storage systems that are to be virtualized are used for migration purposes only. Zoning must be implemented after the IBM Storwize V3700, hosts, and optional external storage systems are connected to the SAN fabrics. To enable the node canisters to communicate with each other in band, create a zone with only the IBM Storwize V3700 WWPNs (two from each node canister) on each of the two fabrics. If there is an external storage system that is to be virtualized, create a zone in each fabric with the IBM Storwize V3700 WWPNs (two from each node canister) with up to a maximum of eight WWPNs from the external storage system. Assuming every host has a Fibre Channel connection to each fabric, then in each fabric, create a zone with the host WWPN and one WWPN from each node canister in the IBM Storwize V3700 system. The critical point is that there should only ever be one initiator (host HBA) in any zone. For load balancing between the node ports on the IBM Storwize V3700, alternate the host Fibre Channel ports between the ports of the IBM Storwize V3700. There should be a maximum of eight paths through the SAN from each host to the IBM Storwize V3700. Hosts where this number is exceeded are not supported. The restriction is there to limit the number of paths that the multi-pathing driver must resolve. A host with only two host bus adapters (HBAs) should not exceed this limit with proper zoning in a dual fabric SAN. Maximum ports or WWPNs: IBM Storwize V3700 supports a maximum of 16 ports or WWPNs from a virtualized external storage system.
30
Figure 2-2 shows how to cable devices to the SAN. Refer to this example as we describe the zoning.
Figure 2-2 SAN cabling and zoning diagram
Create a host/IBM Storwize V3700 zone for each server to which volumes are mapped to and from the clustered system, as shown in the following examples in Figure 2-2: Zone Host 1 port 1 (HBA 1) with both node canister ports 1 Zone Host 1 port 2 (HBA 2) with both node canister ports 2 Zone Host 2 port 1 (HBA 1) with both node canister ports 3 Zone Host 2 port 2 (HBA 2) with both node canister ports 4 Similar zones should be created for all other hosts with volumes that are on the IBM Storwize V3700. Verify interoperability with which the IBM Storwize V3700 connects to SAN switches or directors by starting at this website: http://www.ibm.com/support/docview.wss?uid=ssg1S1004388 Switches or directors are at the firmware levels that are supported by the IBM Storwize V3700. Important: IBM Storwize V3700 port login maximum that is listed in the restriction document must not be exceeded. The document is available at this website: http://www-01.ibm.com/support/docview.wss?rs=591&uid=ssg1S1004380
Connectivity issues: If you have any connectivity issues between IBM Storwize V3700 ports and Brocade SAN Switches or Directors at 8 Gbps, see this website for the correct setting of the fillword port config parameter in the Brocade operating system: http://www-01.ibm.com/support/docview.wss?rs=591&uid=ssg1S1003699
31
IBM Storwize V3700 can be used with a direct attach Fibre Channel host configuration. The recommended configuration for direct attachment is to have at least one Fibre Channel cable from the host connected to each node of the IBM Storwize V3700 to provide redundancy in the event one of the nodes goes offline, as shown in Figure 2-3.
Figure 2-3 FC direct-attach host configuration
Verify direct attach interoperability with the IBM Storwize V3700 and the supported server operating systems by following the requirements that are provided at this website: http://www.ibm.com/systems/support/storage/ssic/interoperability.wss
2.3 SAS direct attach planning

There are three SAS ports (ports 1,2 and 3) per node canister that are available for direct host attach on an IBM Storwize V3700. Do not use port 4 because it is reserved for expansion enclosure connectivity only. See Figure 2-4 on page 33 to correctly identify ports 1,2 and 3. Also, note the keyway in the top of the SAS connector. Important: It is possible to insert the cables upside down despite the keyway. Ensure the blue tag on the SAS connector is underneath when inserting the cable.
32
Figure 2-4 SAS port identification
Although it is possible to attach six hosts, one to each of the three available SAS ports on the two node canisters, the recommended configuration for direct attachment is to have at least one SAS cable from the host connected to each node of the IBM Storwize V3700. This configuration provides redundancy in the event one of the nodes goes offline, as shown in Figure 2-5.
Figure 2-5 SAS host direct attach
33
2.4 LAN configuration planning

There are two Ethernet ports per node canister that are available for connection to the LAN on an IBM Storwize V3700 system. Ethernet port 1 is for accessing the management GUI, the service assistant GUI for the node canister, and iSCSI host attachment. Port 2 can be used for the management GUI and iSCSI host attachment. Each node canister in a control enclosure connects over an Ethernet cable from Ethernet port 1 of the canister to an enabled port on your Ethernet switch or router. Optionally, you can attach an Ethernet cable from Ethernet port 2 on the canister to your Ethernet network. Configuring IP addresses: There is no issue with configuring multiple IPv4 or IPv6 addresses on an Ethernet port or the use of the same Ethernet port for management and iSCSI access. However, you cannot use the same IP address for management and iSCSI host use. Table 2-1 shows possible IP configuration of the Ethernet ports on the IBM Storwize V3700 system.
Table 2-1 IBM Storwize V3700 IP address configuration options per node canister Storwize V3700 Management Node Canister 1 IPv4/6 management address IPv4/6 service address IPv4/6 iSCSI address IPv4/6 management address IPv4/6 iSCSI address ETH PORT 2 IPv4/6iSCSI address ETH PORT 2 ETH PORT 1 Storwize V3700 Partner Node Canister 2 IPv4/6 service address IPv4/6 iSCSI address ETH PORT 1
IP management addresses: The IP management address that is shown on Node Canister 1 in Table 2-1 on page 34 is an address on the configuration node; in case of failover, this address transfers to Node Canister 2 and this node canister becomes the new configuration node. The management addresses are managed by the configuration node canister only (1 or 2; in this case by Node Canister 1).
2.4.1 Management IP address considerations

Because Ethernet port 1 from each node canister must be connected to the LAN, a single management IP address for the clustered system is configured as part of the initial setup of the IBM Storwize V3700 system. The management IP address is associated with one of the node canisters in the clustered system and that node then becomes the configuration node. Should this node go offline (planned or unplanned), the management IP address fails over to the other nodes Ethernet port 1. For more clustered system management redundancy, you should connect Ethernet port 2 on each of the node canisters to the LAN, which allows for a backup management IP address to be configured for access, if necessary. 34
Figure 2-6 shows a logical view of the Ethernet ports that are available for configuration of the one or two management IP addresses. These IP addresses are for the clustered system and therefore are associated with only one node, which is then considered the configuration node.
Figure 2-6 Ethernet ports available for configuration
2.4.2 Service IP address considerations

Ethernet port 1 on each node canister is used for system management and for service access when required. In normal operation, the service IP addresses are not needed. However, in the event of a node canister problem, it might be necessary for service personnel to log on to the node to perform service actions. Figure 2-7 on page 36 shows a logical view of the Ethernet ports that are available for configuration of the service IP addresses. Only port one on each node can be configured with a service IP address.
35
Figure 2-7 Service IP addresses available for configuration
2.5 Host configuration planning

Hosts should have two Fibre Channel connections for redundancy, but the IBM Storwize V3700 also supports hosts with a single HBA port connection. However, if that HBA, its link to the SAN fabric, or the fabric fails, the host loses access to its volumes. Even with a single connection to the SAN, the host has multiple paths to the IBM Storwize V3700 volumes because that single connection must be zoned with at least one Fibre Channel port per node. Therefore, a multipath driver is required. This is also true for direct attach SAS hosts. They can be connected by using a single host port that allows up to six hosts to be configured. However, two SAS connections per host are recommended for redundancy. If two connections per host are used, then a multipath driver also is required on the host. If iSCSI host is to be used, they also require an MPIO driver. Both node canisters should be configured and connected to the network so any iSCSI hosts see at least two paths to volumes and an MPIO driver is required to resolve these. SAN Boot is supported by IBM Storwize V3700. The requirements are listed on the IBM Storwize V3700 support matrix and configuration instructions are provided in the IBM Storwize V3700 Host Attachment Guide, which can be found at this website: http://pic.dhe.ibm.com/infocenter/storwize/v3700_ic/index.jsp?topic=%2Fcom.ibm.sto rwize.v3700.710.doc%2Fsvc_hostattachmentmain.html
36
Verify that the hosts that access volumes from the IBM Storwize V3700 meet the requirements that are found at this website: http://www-947.ibm.com/support/entry/portal/overview/hardware/system_storage/disk_ systems/entry-level_disk_systems/ibm_storwize_v3700 Multiple OSs are supported by IBM Storwize V3700. For more information about HBA/Driver/multipath combinations, see this website: http://www-03.ibm.com/systems/support/storage/ssic/interoperability.wss As per the IBM System Storage Interoperation Center (SSIC), keep the following items under consideration: Host operating systems are at the levels that are supported by the IBM Storwize V3700. HBA BIOS, device drivers, firmware, and multipathing drivers are at the levels that are supported by IBM Storwize V3700. If boot from SAN is required, ensure that it is supported for the operating systems that are deployed. If host clustering is required, ensure that it is supported for the operating systems that are deployed. All direct connect hosts should have the HBA set to point-to-point. For more information about host configuration, see Chapter 4, Host configuration on page 151.
2.6 Miscellaneous configuration planning

During the initial setup of the IBM Storwize V3700 system, the installation wizard asks for various information that you should have available during the installation process. Several of these fields are mandatory to complete the initial configuration. The information in the following checklist is helpful to have before the initial setup is performed. The date and time can be manually entered, but to keep the clock synchronized, use a network time protocol (NTP) service: Document the LAN NTP server IP address that is used for synchronization of devices. For alerts to be sent to storage administrators and to set up Call Home to IBM for service and support, you need the following information: Name of primary storage administrator for IBM to contact, if necessary. Email address of the storage administrator for IBM to contact, if necessary. Phone number of the storage administrator for IBM to contact, if necessary. Physical location of the IBM Storwize V3700 system for IBM service (for example, Building 22, first floor). SMTP or email server address to direct alerts to and from the IBM Storwize V3700. For the Call Home service to work, the IBM Storwize V3700 system must have access to an SMTP server on the LAN that can forward emails to the default IBM service address: callhome1@de.ibm.com for Americas-based systems and callhome0@de.ibm.com for the rest of the world. Email address of local administrators that must be notified of alerts.
37
IP address of SNMP server to direct alerts to, if required (for example, operations or Help desk). After the IBM Storwize V3700 initial configuration, you might want to add more users who can manage the system. You can create as many users as you need, but the following roles generally are configured for users: Security Admin Administrator CopyOperator Service Monitor The user in the Security Admin role can perform any function on the IBM Storwize V3700. The user in the Administrator role can perform any function on the IBM Storwize V3700 system, except create users. User creation: The create users function is allowed by the Security Admin role only and should be limited to as few users as possible. The user in the CopyOperator role can view anything in the system, but the user can configure and manage only the copy functions of the FlashCopy capabilities. The user in the Monitor role can view object and system configuration information but cannot configure, manage, or modify any system resource. The only other role that is available is the service role, which is used if you create a user ID for the IBM service representative. This user role allows IBM service personnel to view anything on the system (as with the monitor role) and perform service-related commands, such as adding a node back to the system after it is serviced or including disks that were excluded. For more information about creating users, see Chapter 3, Graphical user interface overview on page 73.
2.7 System management

The GUI is used to configure, manage, and troubleshoot the IBM Storwize V3700 system. It is used primarily to configure RAID arrays and logical drives, assign logical drives to hosts, replace and rebuild failed disk drives, and expand the logical drives. It allows for troubleshooting and management tasks, such as checking the status of the storage server components, updating the firmware, and managing the storage server. The GUI also offers advanced functions, such as FlashCopy, Volume Mirroring, Remote Mirroring and EasyTier. A command-line interface (CLI) for the IBM Storwize V3700 system is also available. This section describes system management by using the GUI and CLI.
38
2.7.1 Graphical user interface

A web browser is used for GUI access. You must use a supported web browser to access the management GUI. For more information about supported web browsers, see Checking your web browser settings for the management GUI, which is available at this website: http://pic.dhe.ibm.com/infocenter/storwize/v3700_ic/index.jsp?topic=%2Fcom.ibm.sto rwize.v3700.710.doc%2Fsvc_configuringbrowser_1obg15.html Complete the following steps to open the Management GUI from any web browser: 1. Browse to one of the following locations: a. http(s)://host name of your cluster/ b. http(s)://cluster IP address of your cluster/ (for example, https://192.168.70.120) 2. Use the following default login information: User ID: superuser Password: passw0rd For more information about how to use this interface, see this website: http://pic.dhe.ibm.com/infocenter/storwize/v3700_ic/index.jsp?topic=%2Fcom.ibm.sto rwize.v3700.710.doc%2Fsvc_managementgui_971012.html More information also can be found in Chapter 3, Graphical user interface overview on page 73.
39
After the initial configuration that is described in 2.9, Initial configuration on page 50 is completed, the IBM Storwize V3700 Welcome window opens, as shown in Figure 2-8.
Figure 2-8 Setup wizard: Welcome window
2.7.2 Command-line interface

The CLI is a flexible tool for system management that uses the SSH protocol. A public/private SSH key pair is optional for SSH access. For more information about setting up SSH access for Windows, Linux, or UNIX systems, see Appendix A, Command-line interface setup and SAN Boot on page 593. The storage system can be managed by using the CLI, as shown in Example 2-1.
Example 2-1 System management by using the CLI IBM_Storwize:mcr-atl-cluster-01:superuser>lsenclosureslot enclosure_id slot_id port_1_status port_2_status drive_present 1 1 online online yes 1 2 online online yes 1 3 online online yes 1 4 online online yes 1 5 online online yes 1 6 online online yes 1 7 online online yes 1 8 online online yes 1 9 online online yes 1 10 online online yes 1 11 online online yes 1 12 online online yes drive_id 20 22 21 23 17 12 10 18 9 11 8 14
40
1 13 online online 1 14 online online 1 15 online online 1 16 online online 1 17 online online 1 18 online online 1 19 online online 1 20 online online 1 21 online online 1 22 online online 1 23 online online 1 24 online online IBM_Storwize:mcr-atl-cluster-01:superuser>
yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes
15 13 16 19 1 3 6 0 4 7 2 5
The initial IBM Storwize V3700 system setup should be done by using the process and tools that are described in 2.8, First-time setup.
2.8 First-time setup

This section describes how to perform a first-time IBM Storwize V3700 system setup. IBM Storwize V3700 uses an easy to use initial setup process that is contained within a USB key. The USB key is delivered with each storage system and contains the initialization application file InitTool.exe. The tool is configured with your IBM Storwize V3700 system management IP address, the subnet mask, and the network gateway address by first plugging the USB stick into a Windows or Linux system. The IBM Storwize V3700 starts the initial setup when you plug in the USB key with the newly created file in to the storage system. USB key: If you are unable to find the official USB key that is supplied with the IBM Storwize V3700, you can use any USB key that you have and download and copy the initTool.exe application from the following IBM Storwize V3700 Support website: http://www.ibm.com/storage/support/Storwize/V3700 The USB stick contains a readme file that provides details abut how to use the tool with various operating systems. The following operating systems are supported: Microsoft Windows 7 (64-bit) Microsoft Windows XP (32-bit only) Apple Mac OS(R) X 10.7 Red Hat Enterprise Server 5 Ubuntu desktop 11.04
41
We use Windows in the following examples. Complete the following steps to complete the initial setup using the USB key: 1. Plug the USB key into a Windows system and start the initialization tool. If the system is configured to autorun USB keys, the initialization tool starts automatically; otherwise, open My Computer and double-click the InitTool.bat file. The opening window of the tool is shown in Figure 2-9. After the tool is started, select Next and select Create a new system.
Figure 2-9 System Initialization: Welcome window
Mac OS or Linux: For Mac OS or Linux, complete the following steps: a. Open a terminal window. b. Locate the root directory of the USB flash drive: For Mac systems, the root directory is often in the /Volumes/ directory. For Linux systems, the root directory is often in the /media/ directory. If an automatic mount system is used, the root directory can be located by entering the mount command.
c. Change the directory to the root directory of the flash drive. d. Enter: sh InitTool.sh
42
2. The option for creating a system is shown in Figure 2-10.
Figure 2-10 System Initialization: Create a new system
There are other options available through the Tasks section; however, these are generally only required after initial configuration. There is the option to reset the superuser password or set the service IP of a node canister. Selecting Next (as shown in Figure 2-10) progresses through the initial configuration of the IBM Storwize V3700.
43
3. Set the Management IP address, as shown in Figure 2-11.
Figure 2-11 System Initialization: Management IP
44
4. Click Apply and Next to show the IBM Storwize V3700 power up instructions, as shown in Figure 2-12.
Figure 2-12 Initialization application: V3700 Power up
Any expansion enclosures that are part of the system should be powered up and allowed to come ready before the control enclosure. Follow the instructions to power up the IBM Storwize V3700 and wait for the status LED to flash. Then insert the USB stick in one of the USB ports on the left node canister. This node becomes the control node and the other node is the partner node. The fault LED begins to flash. When it stops, return the USB stick to the Windows PC. Clustered system creation: While the clustered system is created, the amber fault LED on the node canister flashes. When this LED stops flashing, remove the USB key from IBM Storwize V3700 and insert it in your system to check the results.
45
The wizard then attempt to verify connectivity to the IBM Storwize V3700, as shown in Figure 2-13.
Figure 2-13 Verify system connectivity
46
If successful, a summary page is displayed that shows the settings that were applied to the IBM Storwize V3700, as shown in Figure 2-14.
Figure 2-14 Initialization Summary
47
If the connectivity to the IBM Storwize V3700 cannot be verified, the wizard shows the error message as shown in Figure 2-15.
Figure 2-15 Initialization Failure
Follow the instructions to resolve any issues. The wizard assumes the system you are using can connect to the IBM Storwize V3700 through the network. If it is not, you must follow step 1 from a machine that does have network access to the IBM Storwize V3700. After the initialization process completes successfully, click Finish. 5. The initial setup is now complete. If you have a network connection to the IBM Storwize system, the wizard re-directs you, as shown in Figure 2-16 on page 49.
48
Figure 2-16 System Initialization complete
We review system initial configuration by using the GUI in 2.9, Initial configuration on page 50.
49
2.9 Initial configuration

This section describes how to complete the initial configuration, including the following tasks: Setting name, date, and time Initial storage configuration by using the setup wizard If you just completed the initial setup, that wizard automatically re-directs to the IBM Storwize V3700 GUI. Otherwise, complete the following steps to complete the initial configuration process: 1. Start the configuration wizard by using a web browser on a workstation and point it to the system management IP address that was defined in Figure 2-11 on page 44. Enter the default superuser password <passw0rd> (where 0 = zero), as shown in Figure 2-17.
Figure 2-17 Setup wizard: Login
50
2. After you are logged in, a welcome window opens, as shown in Figure 2-18.
Figure 2-18 GUI welcome window
Click Next to start the configuration wizard. 3. The first window that is opened is the Licensed Functions window, as shown in Figure 2-19.
Figure 2-19 IBM Storwize V3700 licensing setup window
51
The IBM Storwize V3700 includes a trial license for EasyTier, Remote Copy, and Turbo Performance. Additionally, there is an upgrade option to FlashCopy to increase the number of flash copies from the standard 64 to a maximum of 2,048. In our example, the trial licenses for Remote Copy and EasyTier are active and show their expiration date. 4. Set up the system name as shown in Figure 2-20.
Figure 2-20 Setup wizard: Insert system name
52
5. There are two options for configuring the date and time, as shown in Figure 2-21.
Figure 2-21 Setup wizard: Date and time
Select the required method and enter the data and time manually or specify a network address for a Network Time Protocol server. After this is complete, click Apply and Next to continue. 6. The configuration wizard continues with the hardware configuration. Verify the hardware, as shown in Figure 2-22 on page 54.
53
Figure 2-22 Setup wizard: Verify the detected hardware
Click Apply and Next. 7. The next window in the configuration process is setting up Call Home, as shown in Figure 2-23.
Figure 2-23 Call home setup
54
It is possible to configure your system to send email reports to IBM if an issue that requires hardware replacement is detected. This function is called Call Home. When this email is received, IBM automatically opens a problem report and contacts you to verify whether replacements parts are required. Call Home: When Call Home is configured, the IBM Storwize V3700 automatically creates a Support Contact with one of the following email addresses, depending on country or region of installation: US, Canada, Latin America, and Caribbean Islands: callhome1@de.ibm.com All other countries or regions: callhome0@de.ibm.com IBM Storwize V3700 can use Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP) traps, syslog messages, and Call Home email to notify you and the IBM Support Center when significant events are detected. Any combination of these notification methods can be used simultaneously. To set up up Call Home, you need the location details of the IBM Storwize V3700, Storage Administrators details, and at least one valid SMTP server IP address. If you do not want to configure Call Home, it is possible to do it later by using the GUI option Settings Event Notification (for more information, see 2.9.2, Configure Call Home, email alert, and inventory on page 66). If your system is under warranty or you have a hardware maintenance agreement to enable pro-active support of the IBM Storwize V3700, it is recommended that Call Home be configured. Select Yes and click Next to move to the window in which you can enter the location details, as shown in Figure 2-24.
Figure 2-24 Location details
These details are shown on the Call Home data to enable IBM Support to correctly identify where the IBM Storwize V3700 is located.
55
Important: Unless the IBM Storwize V3700 is in the US the state or province box should be filled with XX. Follow the instructions for correct entries for locations inside the US. The next window allows you to enter the contact details of the main storage administrator, as shown in Figure 2-25. You can choose to enter the details for a 24-hour operations desk. These details also are sent with any Call Home, which allows IBM Support to contact the correct people quickly to process any issues.
Figure 2-25 Contact details
The next window shows the details of the email server. To enter more than one email server, click the green + icon, as shown in Figure 2-26 on page 57.
56
Figure 2-26 Email server details
The IBM Storwize V3700 also has the option to configure local email alerts. These can be sent to a storage administrator or to an email alias for a team of administrators or operators. To add more than one recipient, click the green + icon, as shown in Figure 2-27.
Figure 2-27 Event notification
57
Click Apply and Next to show the summary window for the call home options, as shown in Figure 2-28.
Figure 2-28 Call home summary
Click Apply and Next to move onto Configure Storage. 8. The initial configuration wizard moves on to the Configure Storage option next. This option takes all of the disks in the IBM Storwize V3700 and automatically configures them into optimal RAID arrays for use as MDisks. If you do not want to automatically configure disks now, select No and you exit the wizard to the IBM Storwize V3700 GUI, as shown in Figure 2-29 on page 59.
58
Figure 2-29 Configure Storage option
Select Yes and click Next to move to the summary window that shows the RAID configuration that the IBM Storwize V3700 implements, as shown in Figure 2-30.
Figure 2-30 Storage Configuration Summary
The storage pool is created when you click Finish. Depending on the disks available, this process might take some time to complete as a background task. 59
Closing the task box completes the Initial Configuration wizard. From the GUI, select the Overview option, as shown in Figure 2-31.
Figure 2-31 Overview menu option
60
From the Overview, you can select the Suggested Tasks, as shown in Figure 2-32.
Figure 2-32 Suggested tasks
From here you can configure host access, iSCSI, create volumes, call home (if it has not already been done through the setup wizard) and configure remote access authentication. More information about each of these tasks can be found later in this publication.
2.9.1 Adding enclosures after initial configuration

When the initial installation of the IBM Storwize V3700 is complete, all expansion enclosures that were purchased at that time should be installed as part of the initial configuration. This process enables the system to make the best use of the enclosures and drives that you have. If you are expanding the IBM Storwize V3700 after the initial installation by adding expansion enclosures, follow the physical installation procedures as described in IBM Storwize V3700 Quick Installation Guide Version, GC27-4219. After the hardware is installed, cabled, and powered on, complete the following steps to add an expansion enclosure: 1. In the Monitoring tab, select System details Actions Add Expansion Enclosure, as shown in Figure 2-33 on page 62.
61
Figure 2-33 Adding new expansion enclosure
2. A message appears that informs you to check and confirm cabling and power to the new expansion enclosure. Click Next to continue, as shown in Figure 2-34.
Figure 2-34 Expansion enclosure cable check
62
3. A task runs and completes to discover the new hardware, as shown in Figure 2-35. Click Close to continue.
Figure 2-35 New enclosure discovery task
4. A window opens that shows the details of the new hardware to be added, as shown in Figure 2-36 on page 64. There is an option to identify the new enclosure by flashing the identify light and another option to view the SAS chain that relates to the enclosure.
63
Figure 2-36 New hardware to be added
64
5. To add the enclosure, highlight it and click Finish, as shown in Figure 2-37.
Figure 2-37 Highlight the new expansion enclosure
65
6. The new expansion enclosure now shows up as part of the cluster that is attached to the control enclosure, as shown in Figure 2-38.
Figure 2-38 The new enclosure as part of the cluster
For more information about how to provision the new storage in the expansion enclosure, see Chapter 7, Storage pools on page 313.
2.9.2 Configure Call Home, email alert, and inventory

If your system is under warranty or you have a hardware maintenance agreement, it is recommended to configure your system to send email reports to IBM if an issue that requires hardware investigation is detected. This feature is known as Call Home and is typically configured during the Initial Configuration of the system as described in item 7 on page 54 To configure the Call Home and email alert event notification in IBM Storwize V3700 after the Initial Configuration, complete the following steps: 1. Go to Settings Event Notifications, as shown in Figure 2-39 on page 67.
66
Figure 2-39 Enabling Call Home
67
2. Go to Email Enable Email Event Notification, as shown in Figure 2-40.
Figure 2-40 Selecting Event Notification
68
The wizard that is used to configure Call Home starts, as shown in Figure 2-41.
Figure 2-41 Call Home wizard
3. You are prompted to enter the system details, contact details, event notification details, and email server details, as previously shown in Figure 2-23 on page 54, Figure 2-24 on page 55, Figure 2-25 on page 56, Figure 2-26 on page 57, Figure 2-27 on page 57, and Figure 2-28 on page 58.
2.9.3 Service Assistant tool

The IBM Storwize V3700 is initially configured with three IP addresses: one service IP address for each node canister and a management IP address, which is set when the cluster is started. The following methods are available to configure the IBM Storwize V3700 system: The Inittool Program, as described in 2.8, First-time setup on page 41. The Service Assistant tool, which is described next. Additionally, the Management IP and Service IP addresses can be changed within the GUI, as described in Chapter 3, Graphical user interface overview on page 73.
69
The Service Assistant (SA) tool is a web-based GUI that is used to service individual node canisters, primarily when a node has a fault and is in a service state. A node cannot be active as part of a clustered system while it is in a service state. The SA is available even when the management GUI is not accessible. The following information and tasks are included: Status information about the connections and the node canister. Basic configuration information, such as configuring IP addresses. Service tasks, such as restarting the common information model object manager (CIMOM) and updating the worldwide node name (WWNN). Details about node error codes and hints about what to do to fix the node error. Important: The Service Assistant Tool can be accessed only by using the superuser account. The Service Assistance GUI is available by using a service assistant IP address on each node. The SA GUI is accessed through the cluster IP addresses by appending service to the cluster management URL. If the system is down, the only other method of communicating with the node canisters is through the SA IP address directly. Each node can have a single SA IP address on Ethernet port 1. It is recommended that these IP addresses are configured on all IBM Storwize V3700 node canisters. The default IP address of canister 1 is 192.168.70.121, with a subnet mask of 255.255.255.0. The default IP address of canister 2 is 192.168.70.122, with a subnet mask of 255.255.255.0. To open the SA GUI, enter one of the following URLs into any web browser: http(s)://cluster IP address of your cluster/service http(s)://service IP address of a node/service Fro example: Management address: http://1.2.3.4/service SA access address: http://1.2.3.5/service
70
When you are accessing SA by using the <cluster address>/service, the configuration node canister SA GUI login window opens, as shown in Figure 2-42.
Figure 2-42 Service Assistant Login
The SA interfaces can view status and run service actions on other nodes, in addition to the node where user is connected.
71
After you are logged in, you see the Service Assistant Home window, as shown in Figure 2-43.
Figure 2-43 Service Assistant Home Window
The Current canister node is displayed in the upper left corner of the GUI. As shown in Figure 2-43, this is node 2. To change the canister, select the relevant node in the Change Node section of the window. You see the details in the upper left change to reflect the new canister. The SA GUI provides access to service procedures and shows the status of the node canisters. It is recommend that these procedures should only be carried out if directed to do so by IBM Support. For more information about how to use the SA tool, see this website: http://pic.dhe.ibm.com/infocenter/storwize/v3700_ic/index.jsp?topic=%2Fcom.ibm.sto rwize.v3700.710.doc%2Ftbrd_sagui_1938wd.html
72
Chapter 3.
Graphical user interface overview

This chapter provides an overview of the IBM Storwize V3700 graphical user interface (GUI) and shows how to navigate the configuration panels. This chapter includes the following topics: Getting started Navigation Status Indicators menus Function Icon menus Management GUI help
73
3.1 Getting started

This section provides information about accessing the IBM Storwize V3700 management GUI. It covers topics such as supported browsers, log in modes, and the layout of the Overview panel.
3.1.1 Supported browsers

The IBM Storwize V3700 management software is a browser-based GUI. It is designed to simplify storage management by providing a single point of control for monitoring, configuration, and management. Table 3-1 lists the web browsers that are supported by the management GUI. For the latest version of this table, see IBM Storwize V3700 Quick Installation Guide, GC27-4219-00.
Table 3-1 Supported web browsers Browser Mozilla Firefox Microsoft Internet Explorer Supported versions 3.5 or later 8.0 or later
Important: The web browser requirements, recommended configuration settings to access the IBM Storwize V3700 management GUI, and the IBM Storwize V3700 Quick Installation Guide, GC27-4219 can be found in the IBM Storwize V3700 Information Center at this website: http://pic.dhe.ibm.com/infocenter/storwize/v3700_ic/index.jsp
74
3.1.2 Access the management GUI

To log in to the management GUI, open a supported web browser and enter the management IP address or Hostname of the IBM Storwize V3700. The login panel is displayed, as shown in Figure 3-1.
Figure 3-1 IBM Storwize V3700 login panel
Default user name and password: Use the following information to log in to the IBM Storwize V3700 storage management: User name: superuser Password: passw0rd (a zero replaces the letter O)
Chapter 3. Graphical user interface overview
75
A successful login shows the Overview panel by default, as shown in Figure 3-2. Alternatively, the last opened window from the previous session is displayed.
Figure 3-2 IBM Storwize V3700 overview panel
Figure 3-1 on page 75 shows the IBM Storwize V3700 login panel and the option to enable low graphics mode. This feature can be useful for remote access over narrow bandwidth links. The Function Icons no longer enlarge and list the available functions. However, navigation is achieved by clicking a Function Icon and by using the breadcrumb navigation aid. For more information about the Function Icons, see 3.1.3, Overview panel layout on page 78. For more information about the breadcrumb navigation aid, see 3.2.3, Breadcrumb navigation aid on page 84. Figure 3-3 shows the management GUI in low graphics mode.
76
Figure 3-3 Management GUI low graphics mode
77
3.1.3 Overview panel layout

As shown in Figure 3-4, the Overview panel has three main sections: Function Icons, Extended Help, and Status Indicators.
Figure 3-4 The three main sections of the IBM Storwize V3700 overview panel
The Function Icons section shows a column of images. Each image represents a group of interface functions. The icons enlarge with mouse hover and show the following menus: Home Monitoring Pools Volumes Hosts Copy Services Access Settings The Extended Help section has a flow diagram that shows the available system resources. The flow diagram is consists of system resource images and green arrows. The images represent the physical and logical elements of the system. The green arrows show the order to perform storage allocation tasks and highlight the various logical layers between the physical internal disks and the logical volumes. Clicking the objects in this area shows more information. This information provides Extended Help references, such as the online version of the Information Center and e-Learning modules. This information also provides direct links to the various configuration panels that relate to the highlighted image.
78
The Status Indicators section shows the following horizontal status bars: Allocated: Status that is related to the storage capacity of the system. Running Tasks: Status of tasks that are running and the recently completed tasks. Health Status: Status relating to system health, which is indicated by using the following color codes: GreenHealthy YellowDegraded RedUnhealthy Hovering the mouse pointer and clicking the horizontal bars provides more information and menus, which is described in 3.3, Status Indicators menus on page 94.
3.2 Navigation
Navigating the management GUI is simple and like most systems, there are many ways to navigate. The two main methods are to use the Function Icons section or the Extended Help section of the Overview panel. For more information about these sections, see 3.1.3, Overview panel layout on page 78. This section describes the two main navigation methods and introduces the well-known breadcrumb navigation aid and the Suggested Tasks aid. Information regarding the navigation of panels with tables also is provided.
79
3.2.1 Function icons navigation

Hovering the mouse pointer over one of the eight function icons on the left side of the panel enlarges the icon and provides a menu with which to access various functions. Move the pointer to the required function and click the function. Figure 3-5 shows the results of hovering the mouse pointer over a function icon.
Figure 3-5 Hovering the pointer over a function icon
80
Figure 3-6 shows all of the menus with options under the Function Icons section.
Figure 3-6 Options listed under Function Icons
3.2.2 Extended help navigation

Selecting an image in the flow diagram of the Extended Help section in the Overview panel shows information beneath the flow diagram. This information contains links to e-Learning modules and configuration panels that are related to the selected image. This feature is convenient when the system is implemented because it is possible to work from left to right, following the flow, and select each object in order. Figure 3-7 on page 82 shows the selection of Internal Drives in the flow diagram. The information below the flow diagram now relates to the internal storage.
81
Figure 3-7 Navigating GUI with the extended help section
To access the e-Learning modules, click Need Help. To configure the internal storage, click Pools. Figure 3-8 shows the selection of Pools in the Extended Help section, which opens the Internal Storage panel.
Figure 3-8 Using the extended help section
82
Figure 3-9 shows the Internal Storage panel, which is shown because Pools was selected in the information area of the Extended Help section.
Figure 3-9 The internal storage configuration panel
83
3.2.3 Breadcrumb navigation aid

The IBM Storwize V3700 panels use the breadcrumb navigation aid to show the trail that was browsed. This breadcrumb navigation aid is in the top area of the panel and includes a System menu on the last breadcrumb. Figure 3-10 shows the breadcrumb navigation aid for the System panel.
Figure 3-10 Breadcrumb navigation aid
3.2.4 Suggested Tasks aid

The Suggested Tasks feature is a navigation and configuration aid that is in the top area of the Overview panel. The list of suggested tasks changes, depending on the configuration of the system. This aid can be useful to follow during the system installation process. Figure 3-11 on page 85 shows the Suggested Tasks navigation and configuration aid.
84
Figure 3-11 Suggested Tasks navigation and configuration aid
3.2.5 Presets
The management GUI contains a series of preestablished configuration options that are called presets that use commonly used settings to quickly configure objects on the system. Presets are available for creating volumes, IBM FlashCopy mappings and for setting up a RAID configuration. Figure 3-12 on page 86 shows the available internal storage presets.
85
Figure 3-12 Internal Storage preset selection
86
3.2.6 Access actions

The IBM Storwize V3700 functional panels provide access to a range of actions that can be performed, such as: modify attributes and rename, add, or delete objects. The available actions menus can be accessed by two main methods: highlight the resource and use the Actions drop box (as shown in Figure 3-13), or right-click the resources, as shown in Figure 3-14.
Figure 3-13 Actions menu
Figure 3-14 Right-clicking the Actions menu
87
3.2.7 Task progress

An action starts a running task and shows a task progress box, as shown in Figure 3-15. Click Details to show the underlying Command-line Interface (CLI) commands. The commands are highlighted in blue and can be cut and pasted into a configured IBM Storwize V3700 SSH terminal session, if required. This ability can be helpful when developing CLI scripts.
Figure 3-15 Task progress box
3.2.8 Navigating panels with tables

Many of the configuration and status panels show information in a table format. This section describes the following useful methods to navigate panels with rows and columns: Sorting columns Reordering columns Adding or removing columns Multiple selections Filtering objects
Sorting columns
Columns can be sorted by clicking the column heading. Figure 3-16 on page 89 shows the result of clicking the heading of the Slot ID column. The table is now sorted and lists Slots IDs in descending order.
88
Figure 3-16 Sorting columns by clicking the column heading
Reordering Columns
Columns can be reordered by dragging the column to the required location. Figure 3-17 shows the location of the column with the heading Slot ID positioned between the headings MDisk Name and Enclosure ID. Dragging this heading reorders the columns in the table.
Figure 3-17 Reordering columns
89
Figure 3-18 shows the column heading Slot ID being dragged to the required location.
Figure 3-18 Dragging a column heading to the required location
Figure 3-19 shows the result of dragging the column heading Slot ID to the new location.
Figure 3-19 Reordering column headings
Adding or removing columns

To add or remove a column, right-click the heading bar and select the required column headings by selecting the tick box that is next to the heading name. Figure 3-20 on page 91 shows the addition of the column heading Technology Type.
90
Figure 3-20 Adding column heading Technology Type
Important: Some users might encounter a problem where a context menu from the Firefox browser is shown by right-clicking to change the column heading. This issue can be fixed by clicking in Firefox: Tools Options Content Advanced (for Java setting) Select: Display or replace context menus The web browser requirements and recommended configuration settings to access the IBM Storwize V3700 management GUI can be found in the IBM Storwize V3700 Information Center at this website: http://pic.dhe.ibm.com/infocenter/storwize/v3700_ic/index.jsp
Multiple selections
By using the management tool, you also can select multiple items in a list by using a combination of the Shift or Ctrl keys.
Using the Shift key

To select multiple items in a sequential order, click the first item that is listed, press and hold the Shift key, and then click the last item in the list. All of the items in between the first and last items are selected, as shown in Figure 3-21.
Figure 3-21 Selection of three sequential items
91
Using the Ctrl key

To select multiple items that are not in sequential order, click the first item, press and hold the Ctrl key, and click the other items that you require. Figure 3-22 shows the selection of two non-sequential items.
Figure 3-22 Selection of two non-sequential items: Part 1
Figure 3-23 shows the result of the use of the Ctrl key to select multiple non-sequential items.
Figure 3-23 Selection of two non-sequential items: Part 2
Filtering objects
To focus on a subset of the listed items that are shown in a panel with columns, use the filter field, which is found at the upper right side of the table. This tool shows items that match the required value. Figure 3-24 shows the text bvol was entered into the filter field. Now, only volumes with the text bvol in any column are listed and the filter word also is highlighted.
Figure 3-24 Filtering objects to display a subset of the volumes
92
Filter by column
Click the magnifying glass that is next to the filter field to activate the filter by column feature. Figure 3-25 shows the Filter by Column drop-down menu. This feature allows the filter field value to be matched to a specific column. Figure 3-26 shows the column filter is set to Host Mappings and the filter value set to Yes and the resulting Volumes with Hosts mapped.
.
Figure 3-25 Filter by column
Figure 3-26 Choosing the filter value
93
3.3 Status Indicators menus

This section provides more information about the horizontal bars that are shown at the bottom of the management GUI panels. The bars are status indicators, and include associated bar menus. This section describes the Allocated, Running Tasks, and Health Status bar menus.
3.3.1 Horizontal bars

As described in 3.1.3, Overview panel layout on page 78, the status indicators include the allocated, running tasks, and health status horizontal bars and are shown at the bottom of the panel. The status indicators are color-coded and draw attention to alerts, events, and errors. Hovering over and clicking the bars shows more menus.
3.3.2 Allocated status bar menu

The allocated status bar shows capacity status. Hovering over the image of two arrows on the right side of the Allocated status bar shows a description of the allocated menu comparison that is in use. Figure 3-27 shows the comparison of the used capacity to the real capacity.
Figure 3-27 Allocated bar, comparing used capacity to real capacity
94
To change the allocated bar comparison, click the image of two arrows on the right side of the Allocated status bar. Figure 3-28 shows the new comparison, virtual capacity to real capacity.
Figure 3-28 Changing the allocated menu comparison, virtual capacity to real capacity
95
3.3.3 Running tasks bar menu

To show the Running Tasks bar menu, click the circular image at the left of the running tasks status bar. This menu lists running and recently completed tasks and groups similar tasks. Figure 3-29 shows the Running Tasks menu.
Figure 3-29 Running Tasks menu
For an indication of task progress, browse to the Running Tasks bar menu and click the task. Figure 3-30 shows the selection of a task from the Running Tasks menu.
Figure 3-30 Selecting a task from the Running Task menu for and indication of task progress
Figure 3-31 on page 97 shows the Recently Completed tasks.
96
Figure 3-31 Recently Completed tasks
3.3.4 Health status bar menu

The health status bar provides an indication of the overall health of the system. The following color of the status bar indicates the state of IBM Storwize V3700: Green: Healthy Yellow: degraded Red: Unhealthy If a status alert occurs, the health status bar can turn from green to yellow, or red. To show the health status menu, click the attention icon on the left side of the health status bar. Figure 3-32 shows the revealed health status menu.
Figure 3-32 Health status menu
97
In Figure 3-33, the health status bar menu shows that the system as Degraded status and provides a description of Internal Storage for the type of event that occurred. To investigate the event, open the health status bar menu and click the description of the event, as shown in Figure 3-33.
Figure 3-33 Status and description of an alert via the health status menu
Click the description of the event in the health status menu to show the Events panel (Monitoring Events), as shown in Figure 3-34. This panel lists all events and provides directed maintenance procedures (DMP) to help resolve errors. For more information, see Events panel on page 105.
Figure 3-34 Events panel via health status menu
98
3.4 Function Icon menus

The IBM Storwize V3700 management GUI provides Function Icons that are an efficient and quick mechanism for navigation. As described in section 3.1.3, Overview panel layout on page 78, each graphic on the left side of the panel is a function icon that presents a group of interface functions. Hovering over one of the eight Function Icons shows a menu that lists the functions. Figure 3-35 shows all of the Function Icon menus.
Figure 3-35 All function icon menus
99
3.4.1 Home menu

The Home menu, as shown in Figure 3-36, provides access to the Overview panel.
Figure 3-36 Home menu
Overview panel
Select Overview in the Home menu to open the panel. For more information, see 3.1.3, Overview panel layout on page 78.
3.4.2 Monitoring menu

The Monitoring menu, as shown in Figure 3-37, provides access to the System, System Details, Events, and Performance panels.
Figure 3-37 Monitoring menu
100
System panel
Select System in the Monitoring menu to open the panel. As shown in Figure 3-38, the System panel shows capacity usage, enclosures, and all drives in the system.
Figure 3-38 The system panel
Selecting the name and version of the system shows more information that is related to storage allocation. The information is presented under two tabs: Info and Manage. Figure 3-39 shows the System panel Info tab.
Figure 3-39 System panel Info tab
101
Select the Manage tab to show the name of the system and shutdown and upgrade actions. Figure 3-40 shows the System panel Manage tab.
Figure 3-40 System panel Manage tab
Selecting a rack-mounted enclosure shows more information. Hovering over a drive shows the drive status, size, and speed details. Identify starts the blue identification LED on the front of the enclosure. Click Enclosure 1 to show the System Details panel. For more information, see System details panel on page 103. Figure 3-41 shows the System panel enclosure view.
Figure 3-41 System panel enclosure view
102
System details panel

Select System Details in the Monitoring menu to open the panel. The System Details panel provides the status and details of the components that make up the system. Figure 3-42 shows the System Details panel.
Figure 3-42 System details panel
Actions and environmental statistics

Actions, such as adding expansion enclosures, viewing the SAS chain connections, and performing a software upgrade and a system shutdown can be run from the System Details panel. Information that relates to environmental statistics, such as power consumption and temperature, is also accessible from this panel. Figure 3-43 on page 104 shows the possible actions and the environmental statistics of the enclosure.
103
Figure 3-43 System details actions and environmental statistics
Node canister information

Node canister information, such as FC and SAS WWPNs and ISCSI IQNs, is useful for host attachment purposes. This information is shown by clicking the control enclosure node canister in the System Details panel. Figure 3-44 shows node canister information.
Figure 3-44 Node canister information via system details panel
104
Events panel
Select Events in the Monitoring menu to open the panel. The machine is optimal when all errors are addressed and there are no items that are found in the Events panel. Figure 3-45 shows the Events panel with no recommended actions.
Figure 3-45 Events panel with all errors addressed
Filtering events view

To view Unfixed Messages and Alerts or Show All, select the appropriate option from the menu next to the filter field. Figure 3-46 shows this menu. For more information, see Filtering objects on page 92.
Figure 3-46 Unfixed Messages and Alerts or the Show All options in the events panel
105
Event properties
To show actions and properties that are related to an event, or to repair an event that is not the Next Recommended Action, right-click the event to show other options. Figure 3-47 shows the selection of the Properties option.
Figure 3-47 Selecting event properties
Figure 3-48 shows the properties of an event.
Figure 3-48 Event properties
106
Show events entries within

To show events that occurred within a certain time of a particular event, select the required event entry, then select Show entries within... from the Actions menu and set the period value. Figure 3-49 shows the selection of the Show entries within... option with a period value of 5 minutes. This shows all events within 5 minutes of the selected event.
Figure 3-49 Showing events within a set time
Saving events to a file

It is possible to save the events that are listed in the events panel to a file. To do this, click the diskette icon and select the format you require to save the file. This results in a comma-delimited file that can be saved in text format or as a .csv file for input to a spreadsheet program such as MS Excel. Figure 3-50 on page 108 shows saving the events as formatted values.
107
Figure 3-50 Saving events as formatted values
Performance panel
Select Performance in the Monitoring menu to open the panel. This panel shows graphs that represent the last 5 minutes of performance statistics. The performance graphs include statistics that are related to CPU usage, volumes, MDisks, and interfaces. Figure 3-51 shows the Performance panel.
Figure 3-51 Performance panel
108
Custom-tailoring performance graphs

The Performance panel can be customized to show the workload of a single node, which is useful to help determine whether the system is working in a balanced manner. Figure 3-52 shows the custom-tailoring of the performance graphs by selecting node 1 from the System Statistics menu. The measurement type can also be changed between throughput (MBps) or IOPS by selecting the relevant value.
Figure 3-52 Graphs representing performance statistics of a single node
Performance peak value

Peak values over the last 5-minute period can be seen by hovering over the current value, as shown in Figure 3-53 for CPU usage.
Figure 3-53 Peak CPU usage value over the last 5 minutes
109
3.4.3 Pools menu

The Pools menu provides access to the Volumes by Pools, Internal Storage, MDisks by Pools, and System Migration functions, as shown in Figure 3-54.
Figure 3-54 Pools menu
Volumes by Pool panel

Select Volumes by Pool in the Pools menu to open the panel. By using the Volumes by Pool panel, you can display volumes using the Pool Filter function. This view makes it easy to manage volumes and determine the amount of real capacity that is available for more allocations. Figure 3-55 shows the Volumes by Pool panel.
Figure 3-55 Volumes by pools panel
110
Volume allocation
The upper right corner of the Volumes by Pool panel shows the Volume Allocation which, in this example, shows the physical capacity (8.14TB), the virtual capacity (21.25TB), and the used capacity (1.65TB in the green portion). The red bar shows the threshold at which a warning is generated when the used capacity in the pool first exceeds the threshold set for the physical capacity of the Pool. By default, this threshold is set to 80% but can be altered in the Pool properties. Figure 3-56 shows the volume allocation information that is displayed in the Volumes by Pool panel.
Figure 3-56 Volume allocation
Renaming pools
To rename a pool, select the pool from the pool filter and click the name of the pool. Figure 3-57 shows that pool mdiskgrp1 was renamed to Gold Pool.
Figure 3-57 Renaming a pool
111
Changing pool icons

To change the icon that is associated with a pool, select the pool in the pool filter, click the large pool icon that is above New Volume and Actions, then use the Choose Icon buttons to select the wanted image. This change helps to manage and differentiate between the classes of drive or the tier of the storage pool. Figure 3-58 shows the pool change icon panel.
Figure 3-58 Changing the pool icon
112
Volume functions
The Volumes by Pool panel also provides access to the volume functions via the Actions menu, the New Volume option, and by right-clicking a listed volume. For more information about navigating the Volume panel, see 3.4.4, Volumes menu on page 120. Figure 3-59 shows the volume functions that are available via the Volumes by Pool panel.
Figure 3-59 Volume functions are available via the Volume by Pools panel
113
Internal storage panel

Select Internal Storage in the Pools menu to open the Internal Storage panel, as shown in Figure 3-60. The internal storage consists of the drives that are contained in the IBM Storwize V3700 control enclosure and any SAS-attached IBM Storwize V3700 expansion enclosures. By using the Internal Storage panel, you can configure the internal storage into RAID protected storage (MDisks). This panel also allows the displayed drive list to be filtered by drive class.
Figure 3-60 Drive actions menu of the internal storage panel
Drive actions
Drive level functions, such as identifying a drive, and marking a drive as offline, unused, candidate, or spare can be accessed here. Right-click a listed drive to show the actions menu. Alternatively, the drives can be selected and the Action menu is used. For more information, see Multiple selections on page 91. Figure 3-60 shows the drive actions menu.
Drive properties
Drive properties and dependent volumes can be displayed from the Internal Storage panel. Select Properties from the Disk Actions menu. The drive Properties panel shows drive attributes and the drive slot SAS port status. Figure 3-61 on page 115 shows the drive properties with the Show Details option selected.
114
Figure 3-61 Drive properties
Configure internal storage wizard

Click Configure Storage to show the Configure Internal Storage wizard, as shown in Figure 3-62.
Figure 3-62 Internal Storage panel
115
By using this wizard, you can configure the RAID properties and pool allocation of the internal storage. Figure 3-63 shows Step 1 of the Configure Internal Storage wizard.
Figure 3-63 Configure internal storage wizard: Step 1
Figure 3-64 shows Step 2 of the Configure Internal Storage wizard.
Figure 3-64 Configuring internal storage wizard: Step 2
For more information about configuring internal storage, see Chapter 7, Storage pools on page 313.
116
MDisks by Pool panel

Select MDisks by Pool in the Pools menu to open the MDisks by Pool panel. By using this panel, you can perform such tasks as display MDisks in each pool, create pools, delete pools, and detect externally virtualized storage (for migration). Figure 3-65 shows the MDisks by Pool panel.
Figure 3-65 MDisks by Pool panel
Pool actions
To delete a pool or change the pool name or icon, right-click the listed pool. Alternatively, the Actions menu can be used. Figure 3-66 shows the pool actions.
Figure 3-66 Pool actions
RAID actions
By using the MDisks by Pool panel, you can perform MDisk RAID tasks, such as set spare goal, swap drive, and delete. To access these functions, right-click the MDisk, as shown in Figure 3-67 on page 118.
117
Figure 3-67 RAID actions menu
System Migration panel

Select System Migration in the Pools menu to open the System Migration panel. This panel is used to migrate data from externally virtualized storage systems to the internal storage of the IBM Storwize V3700. The panel displays image mode volume information. To begin a migration, click Start New Migration and the Start Migration wizard is shown. Figure 3-68 shows the System Migration panel.
Figure 3-68 System Migration panel
118
Storage Migration wizard

The Storage Migration wizard is used for data migration from other Fibre Channel attached storage systems to the IBM Storwize V3700. Figure 3-69 shows Step 1 of the Storage Migration Wizard. For more information, see Chapter 6, Storage migration wizard on page 261.
Figure 3-69 Storage migration wizard
119
3.4.4 Volumes menu

As shown in Figure 3-70, the Volumes menu provides access to the Volumes, Volumes by Pool, and Volumes by host functions.
Figure 3-70 Selection of the volumes menu
Volumes panel
Select Volumes in the Volumes menu to open the panel, as shown in Figure 3-71. The Volumes panel shows all of the volumes in the system. The information that is displayed is dependent on the columns that are selected.
Figure 3-71 The volumes panel
120
Volume actions
Volume actions such as map, unmap, rename, shrink, expand, migrate to another pool, delete, and mirror can be performed from this panel.
Create new volumes

Click New Volume to open the New Volume panel, as shown in Figure 3-72. By using this panel, you can select a preset when a volume is created. The presets are designed to accommodate most user cases. The presets are generic, thin-provisioned, mirror, or thin mirror. After a preset is determined, select the storage pool from which the volumes are allocated. An area to name and size the volumes is shown. For more information, see Chapter 5, Basic volume configuration on page 189 and Chapter 8, Advanced host and volume administration on page 353.
Figure 3-72 New Volume panel
Creating multiple volumes

A useful feature is available for quickly creating multiple volumes of the same type and size. Specify the number of volumes required in the Quantity field, then complete the volume capacity and name. A number range can also be specified. The New Volumes panel displays a summary that shows the real and virtual capacity that is used if the proposed volumes are created. Click Create or Create and Map to Host to continue.
121
Figure 3-73 shows the quantity of 5 in the Quantity field.
Figure 3-73 Creating multiple volumes quickly
Volume advanced settings

Click Advanced to show more volume configuration options. Use this feature when the preset does not meet requirements. After the advanced settings are configured, click OK to return to the New Volumes panel. Figure 3-74 shows the Advanced Settings panel.
Figure 3-74 New volume advanced settings
Volumes by Pool panel

This method is an alternative method to access the volumes by pool panel. For more information, see Volumes by Pool panel on page 110. 122
Volumes by Host panel

Select Volumes by Host in the Volumes menu to open the panel. By using the Volume by Hosts panel, you can focus volumes that are allocated to a particular host by using the host selection filter.
3.4.5 Hosts menu

As shown in Figure 3-75, the Hosts menu provides access to the Hosts, Ports by Host, Host Mappings, and Volumes by Host functions.
Figure 3-75 Selecting the Hosts menu
123
Hosts panel
Select the Hosts item in the Hosts menu to open the panel, as shown in Figure 3-76. The Hosts panel shows all of the hosts that are defined in the system.
Figure 3-76 The hosts panel
Host Actions
Host Actions such as Modify Mappings, Unmap All Volumes, Rename, Delete and Properties can be performed from the Hosts panel. Figure 3-76 shows the actions available from the Hosts panel. For more information about the Hosts Actions menu, see Chapter 8, Advanced host and volume administration on page 353.
Creating a new host

Click New Host and the Create Host panel opens. Choose the host type from Fibre Channel (FC), iSCSI or SAS host and the applicable host configuration panel is shown. After the host type is determined, the host name and port definitions can be configured. Figure 3-77 on page 125 shows the Choose the Host Type panel of the Create Host window. For more information about how to create hosts, see Chapter 4, Host configuration on page 151.
124
Figure 3-77 Choose the Host Type panel
Ports by Host panel

Select Ports by Host in the Hosts menu to open the panel, as shown in Figure 3-78. The panel shows the address, status, and type of ports that are assigned to the host definition. Actions such as map, unmap, and port deletion can be performed from this panel.
Figure 3-78 Ports by host panel
125
Host mappings panel

Select Host Mappings in the Hosts menu to open the panel, as shown in Figure 3-79. This panel shows the volumes that each host can access with the corresponding SCSI ID. The Unmap Volume action can be performed from this panel.
Figure 3-79 Host mappings panel
Volumes by Host panel

This panel is an alternative method to access the Volumes by Host panel. For more information, see Volumes by Host panel on page 123.
3.4.6 Copy Services menu

The Copy Services menu provides access to the FlashCopy, Consistency Groups, FlashCopy Mappings, Remote Copy and Partnership functions. Figure 3-80 on page 127 shows the Copy Services menu.
126
Figure 3-80 Copy services menu
FlashCopy panel
Select FlashCopy in the Copy Services menu to open the panel, as shown in Figure 3-81. The FlashCopy panel displays all of the volumes in the system.
Figure 3-81 FlashCopy panel
127
FlashCopy actions
FlashCopy Actions such as snapshot, clone, backup, target assignment, and deletion can be performed from this panel. Figure 3-81 on page 127 shows the actions that are available from the FlashCopy panel.
Consistency Groups panel

Select Consistency Groups in the Copy Services menu to open the panel. A consistency group is a container for FlashCopy mappings. Grouping allows FlashCopy mapping actions such as prepare, start, and stop to occur at the same time for the group instead of coordinating actions individually. This feature can help ensure that the groups target volumes are consistent to the same point and remove several FlashCopy mapping administration tasks. The Consistency Group panel shows the defined groups with the associated FlashCopy mappings. Group Actions such as FlashCopy Map start, stop, and delete can be performed from this panel. New FlashCopy Mapping also can be selected from this panel. For more information, see FlashCopy mappings panel on page 128. Figure 3-82 shows the Consistency Group panel. For more information about creating and managing consistency groups, see Chapter 8, Advanced host and volume administration on page 353.
Figure 3-82 Consistency groups panel
FlashCopy mappings panel

Select FlashCopy Mappings in the Copy Services menu to open the panel. FlashCopy mappings define the relationship between source volumes and target volumes. The FlashCopy Mappings panel shows information that relates to each mapping, such as: status, progress, source and target volumes, and flash time. Select New FlashCopy Mapping to configure a new mapping or use the Actions menu to administer the mapping. Figure 3-83 on page 129 shows the FlashCopy Mappings panel.
128
Figure 3-83 FlashCopy Mappings panel
For more information about how to create and administer FlashCopy mappings, see Chapter 8, Advanced host and volume administration on page 353.
Remote Copy panel

Clicking Remote Copy opens the window that is shown in Figure 3-84. This window shows the existing Remote Copy relationships and allows you to set up and modify consistency groups. From this window, you can also start and stop relationships, add relationships to a consistency group, and switch the direction of the mirror.
Figure 3-84 Remote Copy window
For more information, see Chapter 10, Copy services on page 449.
Partnerships panel
Clicking Partnerships opens the window that is shown in Figure 3-85 on page 130. This window allows you to set up a new partnership or delete an existing partnership with another IBM Storwize or SAN Volume Controller system for the purposes of remote mirroring.
129
Figure 3-85 Partnerships window
From this window, you can also set the background copy rate. This rate specifies the bandwidth, in megabytes per second (MBps), that is used by the background copy process between the clusters. For more information, see Chapter 10, Copy services on page 449.
3.4.7 Access menu

The Access menu provides access to the Users and Audit Log functions, as shown in Figure 3-86.
Figure 3-86 Access menu
130
Users panel
Select Users in the Access menu to open the panel. The Users panel shows the defined user groups and users for the system. The users that are listed can be filtered by user group. Click New User Group to open the Create a New Group panel. Figure 3-87 shows the Users panel and User actions.
Figure 3-87 Users panel
Creating a user group

By using the New User Group panel, you can configure user groups. Enter the group name, select the role, then click Create, as shown in Figure 3-88.
Figure 3-88 New user group panel
131
Creating a user
Click New User to define a user to the system. Figure 3-89 shows the Users panel and the New User option.
Figure 3-89 Users panel and the new user option
By using the New User panel, you can configure the user name, password, and authentication mode. It is essential to enter the user name, password, group, and authentication mode. The public Secure Shell (SSH) key is optional. After the user is defined, click Create. The authentication mode can be set to local or remote. Select local if the IBM Storwize V3700 performs the authentication locally. Select remote if a remote service such as an LDAP server authenticates the connection. If remote is selected, the remote authentication server must be configured in the IBM Storwize V3700 by clicking Settings menu Directory Services panel.
132
The SSH configuration can be used to establish a more secure connection to the command-line interface. See Appendix A, Command-line interface setup and SAN Boot on page 593 for more information about how to set up SSH keys. Figure 3-90 shows the New User panel.
Figure 3-90 New user panel
Audit log panel

Select Audit Log in the Access menu to open the panel. The audit log tracks action commands that are issued through a CLI session or through the management GUI. The Audit Log panel displays information about the command, such as the user, time stamp, and any associated command parameters. The log can be filtered by date or by the Show entries within... feature to reduce the number of items that are listed. It is not possible to delete or alter the Audit log. Figure 3-91 shows the Audit Log panel.
Figure 3-91 Audit log panel
133
3.4.8 Settings menu

The Setting menu provides access to the Event Notifications, Directory Services, Network, Support, and General functions. Figure 3-92 shows the Settings menu.
Figure 3-92 Settings menu
Event notifications panel

Select Event Notifications in the Settings menu to open the panel. The IBM Storwize V3700 can use Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP) traps, syslog messages, emails, and IBM Call Home to notify users when events are detected. Each event notification method can be configured to report all events or alerts. Alerts are the significant events and might require user intervention. The event notification levels are critical, warning, and information. The Event Notifications panel provides access to the Email, SNMP, and Syslog configuration panels. IBM Call Home is an email notification for IBM Support. It is automatically configured as an email recipient and is enabled when Email event notification is enabled by following the Call Home wizard.
Enabling email event notification

Click Enable Email Event Notification to open the Call Home wizard. Figure 3-93 on page 135 shows the Event Notifications Email configuration panel.
134
Figure 3-93 Event notification panel
Call Home wizard

The Call Home wizard, as shown in Figure 3-94, guides the user through account contact and machine location entry, and email configuration activities. For more information about running the Call Home wizard, see 2.9.2, Configure Call Home, email alert, and inventory on page 66.
Figure 3-94 Call home wizard
135
SNMP event notification

As shown in Figure 3-95, the Event Notifications panel provides access to the SNMP configuration panel. Click SNMP to open the panel, then enter the server details. Multiple servers can be configured by clicking to add more servers.
Figure 3-95 SNMP configuration panel
Syslog event notification

The Event Notifications panel provides access to Syslog configuration panel. Click Syslog to open the panel, then enter the server details. Multiple servers can be configured by clicking to add more servers. Figure 3-96 shows the Syslog configuration panel.
Figure 3-96 Syslog configuration panel
136
Directory Services panel

Select Directory Services in the Settings menu to open the panel. The Directory Services panel provides access to the Remote Authentication wizard. Remote authentication must be configured to create remote users on the IBM Storwize V3700. A remote user is authenticated on a remote service, such as IBM Tivoli Integrated Portal or a Lightweight Directory Access Protocol (LDAP) provider.
Enable remote authentication

Click Configure Remote Authentication to open the wizard. Figure 3-97 shows the Directory Services panel.
Figure 3-97 Directory Services panel
137
Network panel
Select Network in the General menu to open the panel. The Network panel, as shown in Figure 3-98, provides access to the Management IP Addresses, Service IP Addresses, iSCSI, and Fibre Channel configuration panels.
Figure 3-98 Network panel
Management IP addresses
The Management IP Address is the IP address of the system and is configured during initial setup. The address can be an IPv4 address, IPv6 address, or both. The Management IP address is logically assigned to Ethernet port 1 of each node canister, which allows for node canister failover. Another Management IP Address can be logically assigned to Ethernet port 2 of each node canister for more fault tolerance. If the Management IP address is changed, use the new IP address to log in to the Management GUI again. Click Management IP Addresses and then click the port you want to configure (the corresponding port on the partner node canister is also highlighted). Figure 3-99 on page 139 shows Management IP Addresses configuration panel.
138
Figure 3-99 Management IP Addresses configuration panel
Service IP Addresses
Service IP addresses are used to access the Service Assistant. The address can be an IPv4 address, IPv6 address, or both. The Service IP addresses are configured on Ethernet port 1 of each node canister. Click Service IP addresses and the select the Control Enclosure and Node Canister to configure. Figure 3-100 on page 140 shows the Service IP addresses configuration panel. For more information, see 2.9.3, Service Assistant tool on page 69.
139
Figure 3-100 Service IP Addresses configuration panel
iSCSI connectivity
The IBM Storwize V3700 supports iSCSI connections for hosts. Click iSCSI and select the node canister to configure the iSCSI IP addresses. Figure 3-101 on page 141 shows the iSCSI configuration panel.
140
Figure 3-101 iSCSI Configuration panel
Fibre Channel connectivity

The Fibre Channel panel displays Fibre Channel connections that are established between the IBM Storwize V3700 node canisters, other storage systems and hosts. Click Fibre Channel and select the required view from the View connectivity for: drop-down menu. Figure 3-102 shows the Fibre Channel panel with All nodes, storage systems, and hosts selected.
Figure 3-102 Fibre Channel panel
141
Support panel
Select Support in the Settings menu to open the panel. As shown in Figure 3-103, the Support panel provides access to the IBM support package, which is used by IBM to assist with problem determination. Click Download Support Package to access the wizard.
Figure 3-103 Support panel
Download support package wizard

The Download Support Package wizard provides various package types. IBM support provides direction on package type selection as required. To download the package, select the type and click Download. The output file can be saved to the users workstation. Figure 3-104 shows the Download Support Package wizard.
Figure 3-104 Download Support Package wizard
142
Show full log listing...

The Support panel also provides access to the files that are on the node canisters, as shown in Figure 3-103. Click Show full log listing... to access the node canister files. To save a file to the users workstation, select a file, right-click the file and select Download. To change to the file listing to show the files on a partner node canister, select the node canister from the menu that is next to the panel filter. Figure 3-105 shows the full log listing.
Figure 3-105 Full log listing
General panel
Select General in the Settings menu to open the panel. The General panel provides access to the Date and Time, Licensing, Upgrade Machine Code, and GUI Preferences configuration panels. Figure 3-106 shows the General panel.
Figure 3-106 General panel
143
Date and time

Click Data and Time to configure date and time manually or via Network Time Protocol (NTP) server. Figure 3-106 on page 143 shows the Date and Time function of the General panel.
Licensing
The licensing panel shows the current system licensing. The IBM Storwize V3700 is based on per system licensing and is not licensed per enclosure as other systems in the Storwize family. The following optional licenses are available: FlashCopy upgrade to 2040 target copies Remote Copy Easy Tier Turbo Performance One-time trial licenses can be enabled for any function except the FlashCopy upgrade from the GUI. The trial licenses automatically disable after 90 days if not fully licensed in the meantime. IBM ships a printed page with an authorization code when the optional license is ordered. The following options are available for enabling the licenses: Automatic: The client enters an authorization code into the GUI of an internet-attached IBM Storwize V3700, the system validates the code with IBM and enables function. Manual: The client enters an authorization code and machine details into the Data Storage Feature Activation (DSFA) website, which validates and creates a license key. The client enters the license key into the IBM Storwize V3700 GUI, which enables the function. For more information, see the DSFA website at: https://www-03.ibm.com/storage/dsfa/storwize/selectMachine.wss The authorization code can be used only once and the license key is specific to one machine. Licenses cannot be transferred between systems and if the system is sold, license ownership transfers with it. Figure 3-107 on page 145 shows the Licensed Functions panel within the General panel. The licenses can be activated by right-clicking the function and selecting the required activation method.
144
Figure 3-107 Licensed functions
Upgrade machine code

IBM recommends that you use the latest version of machine code. The Upgrade Machine Code panel shows the current machine code level. If the system is connected to the internet, it contacts the IBM upgrade server to check whether the current level is the latest level. If an update is available, a direct link to the code is provided to the make code download process easier. To upgrade the code, the IBM Storwize V3700 code and the IBM Storwize V3700 Upgrade Test Utility must be downloaded. After the files are downloaded, it is best to check the MD5 checksum to ensure that the files are sound. Read the release notes, verify compatibility, and follow all IBM recommendations and prerequisites. To upgrade the machine code of the IBM Storwize V3700, click Launch Upgrade Wizard. After the upgrade starts, an Abort button is shown that can be used to stop the upgrade process. Figure 3-108 shows the Upgrade Machine Code panel.
Figure 3-108 Upgrade machine code panel
For more information, see 11.4, Software upgrade on page 564.
145
GUI Preferences
By using the GUI Preferences panel (as shown in Figure 3-109), you can refresh GUI objects, restore default browser preferences, set table selection policy, and configure the Information Center web address.
Figure 3-109 GUI Preferences panel
146
3.5 Management GUI help

This section provides information about the various methods that are available to get help while you use the IBM Storwize V3700 management GUI. The following topics are included in this section: IBM Storwize V3700 Information Center e-Learning modules Embedded panel help Question mark help Hover help IBM endorsed YouTube videos
3.5.1 IBM Storwize V3700 Information Center

The best source of information for the IBM Storwize V3700 is the Information Center. Click Visit the Information Center for direct access to the online version from the Overview panel, as shown in Figure 3-110.
Figure 3-110 Overview panel Information Center link
3.5.2 Watching an e-Learning videos

The IBM Storwize V3700 provides embedded e-Learning videos to watch. The videos provide easy-to-follow directions to complete various tasks. Click Watch e-Learning:... to start the video, as shown in Figure 3-111.
Figure 3-111 Watch e-Learning module
147
3.5.3 Learning more

The IBM Storwize V3700 provides embedded Need Help links to explain important concepts and panels. Click Need Help to open the information panel, as shown in Figure 3-112.
Figure 3-112 Need Help link
Figure 3-113 shows the information panel.
Figure 3-113 Information panel
3.5.4 Embedded panel help

The IBM Storwize V3700 provides embedded help that is available on each panel. Click Help to open the information panel, as shown in Figure 3-114.
Figure 3-114 Embedded panel help
148
Figure 3-115 shows the information panel that is opened from the embedded panel help. The information panel includes hotlinks to various other panels, including the Information Center.
Figure 3-115 Information panel
3.5.5 Hidden question mark help

The IBM Storwize V3700 provides a hidden question mark help feature for some settings or items that are found in various configuration panels. This help feature is accessed by hovering next to an item where the question mark is shown and the help bubble is displayed, as shown in Figure 3-116.
Figure 3-116 Hidden question mark help
3.5.6 Hover help

The IBM Storwize V3700 provides hidden help tags that are shown when you hover over various functions and items, as shown in Figure 3-117.
Figure 3-117 Hover help
149
3.5.7 IBM endorsed YouTube videos

IBM endorses various YouTube videos for the IBM storage portfolio. Client feedback suggests that these videos are a good tool to show management GUI navigation and tasks. Check for new videos from IBM Storage to find useful information at the IBM System Storage Channel at this website: https://www.youtube.com/user/ibmstoragevideos
150
Chapter 4.
Host configuration
This chapter provides an overview on how to set up Open System hosts in the context of IBM Storwize V3700. It also describes how to use the IBM Storwize V3700 GUI to create hosts connections to access Storage Disk Subsystem volumes. For more information about volume administration, see Chapter 5, Basic volume configuration on page 189. This chapter includes the following sections: Host attachment overview Preparing the host operating system Configuring hosts on IBM Storwize V3700
151
4.1 Host attachment overview

A host system is an open-systems computer that is connected to a switch through a Fibre Channel or iSCSI interface. As IBM Storwize V3700 is geared towards small to medium scale data center storage solutions, a direct-attached Serial Attached SCSI (SAS) interface is also supported. IBM Storwize V3700 supports the following host attachment protocols: 8 Gb Fibre Channel Protocol or 10Gb iSCSI /FCoE (optional host interface) 6 Gb SAS (Serial Attached SCSI) Protocol (standard host interface) 1 Gb iSCSI (standard host interface) In this chapter, we assume that your hosts are physically ready and attached to your FC/FCoE and IP network, or directly attached if SAS Host Bus Adapters (HBAs) are used and that you have completed the steps that are described in 2.9, Initial configuration on page 50. Follow basic switch and zoning recommendations and ensure that each host has at least two network adapters, that each adapter is on a separate network (or at minimum in a separate zone), and connection to both canisters exists. This setup assures four paths for failover and failback purposes. For SAS connection, ensure that each host has at least two SAS HBA connections to each IBM Storwize V3700 canister for resiliency purposes. Before new volumes are mapped on the host of your choice, some preparation goes a long way towards ease of use and reliability. There are several steps that are required on a host system to prepare for mapping new IBM Storwize V3700 volumes. Use the System Storage Interoperation Center (SSIC) to check which code levels are supported to attach your host to your storage. SSIC is an IBM web tool that checks the interoperation of host, storage, switches, and multipathing drivers. For the latest IBM Storwize V3700 compatibility information, see SSIC at this website: http://ibm.com/systems/support/storage/ssic/interoperability.wss The complete support matrix is published in the IBM Storwize V3700 Supported Hardware List, Device Driver, Firmware, and Recommended Software Levels V7.1 document, which is available at this website: http://www.ibm.com/support/docview.wss?uid=ssg1S1004388 This chapter focuses on Windows and VMware. If you must attach any other hosts, for example, IBM AIX, Linux, or even an Apple system, you can find the required information in the IBM Storwize V3700 Information Center at this website: http://pic.dhe.ibm.com/infocenter/storwize/v3700_ic/index.jsp
152
4.2 Preparing the host operating system

In this section, we describe how to prepare Microsoft Windows and VMware host side attachment that is required to use an IBM Storwize V3700 with Fibre Channel, iSCSI, or SAS connectivity.
4.2.1 Windows 2008 R2: Preparing for Fibre Channel attachment

Complete the following steps to prepare a Windows 2008 (R2) host to connect to an IBM Storwize V3700 using Fibre Channel: 1. Make sure that the latest OS Service Pack, updates, and hotfixes are applied to your Microsoft server. 2. Use the latest firmware and driver levels on your host system. 3. Install the host bus adapters (HBAs) on the Windows server by using the latest BIOS. 4. Connect the FC Host Adapter ports to the switches by using Fibre Optic Cables. 5. Configure the switches (SAN Zoning). 6. Configure the HBA parameters, if necessary. 7. Set the Windows timeout value. 8. Install the multipath Driver Device Module software.
Downloading and installing the supported drivers and firmware

Install a supported HBA driver for your configuration. Use the Windows Device Manager or vendor tools, such as SANsurfer for QLogic product, HBAnyware for Emulex, or Brocade HBA Software Installer to install the driver. Also, check and update the BIOS (firmware) level of the HBA by using the manufacturers provided tools. Always check the readme file to see whether there are Windows registry parameters that should be set for the HBA driver.
Configuring Brocade FC HBAs for Windows

This section applies to Windows hosts that have Brocade HBAs installed. After the device driver and firmware are installed, you must configure the HBAs. To perform this task, use the Brocade host connectivity manager (HCM) software or reboot into the HBA BIOS, load the adapter defaults, and set the following values: Host Adapter BIOS: Disabled (unless the host is configured for SAN Boot) Queue depth: 4
Configuring QLogic FC HBAs for Windows

This section applies to Windows hosts that have QLogic HBAs installed. After the device driver and firmware are installed, you must configure the HBAs. To complete this task, use the QLogic SANsurfer software or reboot into the HBA BIOS, load the adapter defaults, and set the following values: Host Adapter BIOS: Disabled (unless the host is configured for SAN Boot) Adapter Hard Loop ID: Disabled Connection Options: 1 (point-to-point only) LUNs Per Target: 0 Port Down Retry Count: 15
Chapter 4. Host configuration
153
Configuring Emulex FC HBAs for Windows

This section applies to Windows hosts that have Emulex HBAs installed. After the device driver and firmware are installed, you must configure the HBAs. To complete this task, use the Emulex HBAnyware software or reboot into the HBA BIOS, load the defaults, and set topology to 1 (10F_Port Fabric).
Setting the Windows timeout value

For Windows hosts, the disk I/O timeout value should be set to 60 seconds as an overall rule but you must also check recommended guidance for your application. To verify this setting, complete the following steps: 1. Click Start Run. 2. In the dialog box, enter regedit and press Enter. 3. In the registry editor, search for the HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\System\CurrentControlSet\services\Disk\TimeOutValue key. 4. Confirm that the value for the key is 60 (decimal value), and, if necessary, change the value to 60, as shown in Figure 4-1.
Figure 4-1 Windows timeout value
Installing the Microsoft MPIO multipathing software

Microsoft Multipath Input/Output (MPIO) solutions are designed to work with device-specific modules (DSMs) that are written by vendors. The MPIO driver package does not form a complete solution on its own. By using this joint solution, the storage vendors can design device-specific solutions that are tightly integrated with the Microsoft Windows operating system. MPIO in Microsoft Windows 2008 is a Device Specific Module (DSM) that is designed to work with Storage Arrays that support the Asymmetric Logical Unit Access (ALUA) control model, basically active-active Storage Controllers. The intent of MPIO is to provide better integration of a multipath storage solution with the operating system. It also allows the use of multipath in the SAN infrastructure during the boot process for SAN Boot hosts. To install MPIO on a computer that is running Microsoft Windows Server 2008, complete the following steps: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Open Server Manager by clicking Start Administrative Tools Server Manager. In the Features area, click Add Features. Select MPIO from a list of available features and click Next. Confirm the installation Selections and click Install. Close the wizard after the installation process is completed.
154
Installing IBM SDDDSM multipathing software

IBM Subsystem Device Driver DSM (SDDDSM) is the IBM multipath I/O solution that is based on Microsoft MPIO technology. It is a device-specific module that is designed to support IBM storage devices on Microsoft Windows systems. It is designed to support multipath configuration environment for most of IBM Storage Arrays. To ensure correct multipathing with IBM Storwize V3700, SDDDSM must be installed on Microsoft Windows hosts. To install SDDDSM, complete the following steps: 1. Check the SDDDSM download matrix to determine the correct level of SDDDSM to install on Windows 2008 (R2) and download the package from this website: http://ibm.com/support/docview.wss?uid=ssg1S7001350#WindowsSDDDSM 2. Extract the package to your hard disk drive and run setup.exe to install SDDDSM. A command prompt window opens, as shown in Figure 4-2. Confirm the installation by entering Y.
Figure 4-2 SDDDSM setup
3. After the setup completes, you are prompted to restart the system. Confirm this restart by entering yes and pressing Enter, as shown in Figure 4-3.
Figure 4-3 Installing SDDDSM
155
You successfully installed IBM SDDDSM. You can check the installed driver version by selecting Start All Programs Subsystem Device Driver DSM Subsystem Device Driver DSM. When a command prompt opens, run the datapath query version command to determine the version that is installed (as shown in Example 4-1) for this Microsoft Windows 2008 R2 host.
Example 4-1 Datapath query version
C:\Program Files\IBM\SDDDSM>datapath.exe query version IBM SDDDSM Version 2.4.3.1-2 Microsoft MPIO Version 6.1.7601.17514
To determine the Worldwide Port Numbers (WWPNs) of the host (this is applicable for Fibre Channel adapter only), run the datapath query wwpn command (as shown in Example 4-2) and take note of WWPN for further use.
Example 4-2 Datapath query wwpn
C:\Program Files\IBM\SDDDSM>datapath query wwpn Adapter Name PortWWN Scsi Port3: 10008C7CFF20CFCC Scsi Port4: 10008C7CFF20CFCD The IBM Multipath Subsystem Device Driver Users Guide can be found at ftp://ftp.software.ibm.com/storage/subsystem/UG/1.8--3.0/SDD_1.8--3.0_User_Guide_E nglish_version.pdf and provides useful information about how to install and configure SDD on the main Operating System platforms. If the SAN Zone configuration already is established, the Microsoft Windows host is prepared to connect to the IBM Storwize V3700. The next step is to configure a host object and its WWPNs by using the IBM Storwize V3700 GUI. For more information, see 4.3, Configuring hosts on IBM Storwize V3700 on page 175. Microsoft Windows operating systems can use SAN Boot implementations. SAN Boot details are beyond the intended scope of this book. For more information and supportability about Microsoft systems booting from storage area networks (SANs), check the Microsoft article at this website: http://support.microsoft.com/kb/305547 Windows 2003: The examples focus on Windows 2008 R2, but the procedure for Windows 2003 is similar. If you use Windows 2003, you must install Microsoft Hotfix 908980 or latest Service Pack. If you do not install these, preferred pathing is not available. You can download this hotfix from this website: http://support.microsoft.com/kb/908980
4.2.2 Windows 2008 R2: Preparing for iSCSI attachment

Microsoft iSCSI Initiator enables you to connect a Microsoft Window system host to an external iSCSI Storage Array by using Ethernet infrastructure. The use of iSCSI protocol enables the use of block-based SAN without acquiring other hardware.
156
In Windows 2008 R2, the Microsoft iSCSI software initiator is preinstalled. Enter iscsi in the search field of the Windows start menu (as shown in Figure 4-4) and click iSCSI Initiator.
Figure 4-4 Windows iSCSI initiator software
Confirm the automatic startup of the iSCSI Service, as shown in Figure 4-5.
Figure 4-5 Automatic startup of the iSCSI Service
The iSCSI Configuration window opens. Select the Configuration tab, as shown in Figure 4-6 on page 158. Make a note of the initiator name of your Windows host for further use.
157
Figure 4-6 iSCSI Initiator Properties window
You can change the initiator name or enable advanced authentication, but these tasks are beyond the scope of our basic setup. By default, iSCSI authentication is not enabled. For more information, see the IBM Storwize V3700 V7.1 Information Center at this website: http://pic.dhe.ibm.com/infocenter/storwize/v3700_ic/index.jsp For more information about Microsoft iSCSI authentication and security, see the following website: http://pic.dhe.ibm.com/infocenter/storwize/v3700_ic/index.jsp?topic=%2Fcom.ibm.sto rwize.v3700.710.doc%2Fsvc_iscsisancoverview_08301435.html&resultof%3D%2522%2569%25 73%2563%2573%2569%2522%2520
Windows 2008 R2 iSCSI Target Configuration

These sections cover the basic setup of iSCSI targets from Microsoft Windows 2008 R2 host. Complete the following steps from the host perspective: 1. From Microsoft Windows 2008, start the iSCSI Initiator software by clicking Start and entering iscsi in the field, as shown in Figure 4-7 on page 159. 2. Select the Targets tab to add iSCSI Target IP and click Quick Connect, as shown in Figure 4-7 on page 159.
158
Figure 4-7 iSCSI target IP
3. A Quick Connect window opens in which the name and status of iSCSI Target is confirmed, as shown in Figure 4-8.
Figure 4-8 iSCSI quick connect window
4. Switch to the Volumes and Devices tab. If the IBM Storwize V3700 was configured for iSCSI connectivity and volumes were mapped to the host, a list of iSCSI disks should appear, as shown in Figure 4-9 on page 160.
159
Figure 4-9 iSCSI Initiator Properties: Volumes and Devices
5. Click the Auto Configure button to automatically configure all volumes and devices on the discovered target. 6. To assign the volume to specific drive letter on Microsoft Windows 2008 R2, open the Disk Management tool. The new volume must be brought online and initialized, as shown in Figure 4-10.
Figure 4-10 Configuring a new volume
160
The initial configuration of iSCSI connectivity features a single path until the Microsoft MPIO feature is installed. For more information, see Installing the Microsoft MPIO multipathing software on page 154. To configure iSCSI multipathing, see 5.3.2, Windows 2008 iSCSI volume attachment on page 220. These are the basic steps to configure an iSCSI target on Windows Server 2008 R2. For a more detailed description about Installing and configuring the iSCSI initiator, see the Microsoft Technet web link at this website: http://technet.microsoft.com/en-us/library/ee338480%28v=ws.10%29.aspx
Setting the Windows registry keys

Complete the following steps to change the system registry to make your iSCSI operations more reliable (you must also check recommended guidance for your application): 1. In the search field of the Windows Start menu, enter regedit and click regedit.exe. 2. In the registry editor, locate the following key: HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\SYSTEM\CurrentControlSet\Control\Class\{4D36E97B-E325-11CE-B FC1-08002BE10318}\<bus ID>\Parameters\LinkDownTime Confirm that the value for the LinkDownTime key is 120 (decimal value), and, if necessary, change the value to 120. 3. In the registry editor, locate the following key: HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\SYSTEM\CurrentControlSet\Control\Class\{4D36E97B-E325-11CE-B FC1-08002BE10318}\<bus ID>\Parameters\MaxRequestHoldTime Confirm that the value for the MaxRequestHoldTime key is 120 (decimal value), and, if necessary, change the value to 120. 4. In the registry editor, locate the following key: HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\SYSTEM\CurrentControlSet\Control\Class\{4D36E97B-E325-11CE-B FC1-08002BE10318}\<bus ID>\Parameters\ MaxPendingRequests Confirm that the value for the MaxPendingRequests key is 2048 (decimal value), and, if necessary, change the value to 2048. 5. In the registry editor, locate the following key: HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\SYSTEM\CurrentControlSet\Services\Disk\TimeOutValue Confirm that the value for the TimeOutValue key is 60 (decimal value), and, if necessary, change the value to 60. 6. Reboot your host for these changes to take effect. These steps are the basic steps to prepare a Windows 2008 R2 host for iSCSI attachment. For more information about configuring the IBM Storwize V3700 for iSCSI connections, see 4.3.4, Configuring IBM Storwize V3700 for iSCSI host connectivity. on page 183.
4.2.3 Windows 2008 R2: Preparing for SAS attachment

SAS is a serial interface for SCSI disks. SAS Host Bus Adapters are plug-in PCI devices at low cost that support direct attached to Storage Controllers. Complete the following steps to prepare a Microsoft Windows 2008 R2 host to connect to an IBM Storwize V3700 by using direct attach SAS connection: 1. Make sure the latest OS Service Pack, updates and hotfixes are applied to your Microsoft Windows server.
161
2. Use the latest firmware and drive on your host system. 3. Install SAS Host Bus Adapter. 4. Connect the SAS cables to the host HBA and IBM Storwize V3700 Canister (or canisters) SAS host port (or ports). 5. Configure HBA firmware and drivers on Microsoft Windows host (unless SAN boot). 6. Install multipath Driver Device Module software.
Downloading and installing the supported drivers and firmware

Install a supported HBA driver for your configuration. Use the Windows Device Manager or vendor tools. An LSI Card was used in this example and there is no further configuration required to connect the SAS cables to IBM Storwize V3700. Always check the vendors readme file to see whether there are Windows registry parameters or Operating System configurations that should be set for the HBA driver.
Recording SAS WWPN

Complete the following steps to record SAS WWPN for further use. In this example, we use LSI PCI SAS 6 Gb Host Bus Adapter model: 1. Restart your host system. 2. While system BIOS is starting, press Ctrl+C to start the LSI Configuration Utility when the LSI banner appears in the window. 3. The LSI Configuration Utility is started, as shown in Figure 4-11. Select the required SAS Card from the list of devices and press Enter. In the example, the SAS adapter is attached to PCI I/O module on Bus 02.
Figure 4-11 LSI Configuration Utility
162
4. Record the SAS WWPN information from SAS Address line, as shown in Figure 4-12.
Figure 4-12 Recording SAS address
5. Press ESC to exit.
Configuring SAS HBAs parameters

This section applies to host systems that use SAS host bus adapters. After the adapter is installed, some parameters can be changed depending on what application is using the storage array disk. The following settings are recommended: I/O Timeout for Block Devices: 10 I/O Timeout for Sequential Devices: 10 I/O Timeout for Other Devices: 10 LUNs to Scan for Block Devices: All LUNs to Scan for Sequential Devices: All LUNs to Scan for Other Devices: All
Configuring Windows with SAS SAN Boot

If you intend to use SAN boot with your SAS direct attach PCI card, you must configure your system BIOS to boot from your PCI device. Generally, you must start it from the BIOS settings, as described in Recording SAS WWPN on page 162, under SAS Topology. Boot your computer from a Windows CD or ISO image and press F6 when you see the message Setup is inspecting your computers hardware configuration. Follow the instructions until you are prompted to insert the hardware support disk that contains your SAS drivers.
Installing the multipathing software

When u SAS host bus adapters are used, a multipath I/O software solution is still required to provide a software layer to manage more than one physical path between the host system and the IBM Storwize V3700. IBM SDDDSM provides the fault-tolerance and performance techniques that are required when a SAS path fails, which enables the operating system to route the IO traffic to the most available path that is not apparent to the application.
163
For more information about verifying the installation of SDDDSM, see Installing the Microsoft MPIO multipathing software on page 154.
4.2.4 VMware ESX: Preparing for Fibre Channel attachment

Complete the following steps to prepare a VMware ESXi host to connect to an IBM Storwize V3700 that uses Fibre Channel: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Install HBA or HBAs on the ESXi server. Make sure that the latest firmware levels are applied on your host system. Update and configure the HBA for hosts that are running ESXi. Connect the FC Host Adapter ports to the switches. Configure the switches (SAN Zoning). Install VMware ESXi and load more drivers, if required.
Downloading and installing the supported firmware

Download and install the latest firmware level (or levels) to your host server. Follow the steps provided by VMware to install the HBAs driver (or divers) and firmware (or firmwares). Also, check the IBM Storwize V3700 Supported Hardware List, Device Driver, Firmware, and Recommended Software Levels V7.1 list for VMware, which is available at this website: http://www.ibm.com/support/docview.wss?rs=591&uid=ssg1S1004380 Some HBAs, especially the new CNA Adapters, require another driver to be loaded into ESX. To see whether there are any requirements for your configuration, check the VMware Compatibility Guide that is available at this website: http://www.vmware.com/resources/compatibility/search.php
Configuring Brocade HBAs for VMware ESX

This section applies to ESXi hosts that have Brocade HBAs installed. After the firmware is installed, load the default settings for all your adapters that are installed on the host system and make sure that the Adapter BIOS is disabled, unless SAN Boot is used.
Configuring QLogic HBAs for VMware ESX

This section applies to ESXi hosts that have QLogic HBAs installed. After the firmware is installed, you must configure the HBAs. To perform this task, use the QLogic SANsurfer software or the HBA BIOS, load the adapter defaults, and set the following values: Recommended Host Adapter Settings: 164 Host Adapter BIOS: Disabled (unless the host is configured for SAN Boot) Frame size: 2048 Loop Reset Delay: 5 (minimum) Adapter Hard Loop ID: Disabled Hard Loop ID: 0 Spinup Delay: Disabled Connection Options 1: Point-to-point only Fibre Channel Tape Support: Disabled Data Rate: 2 Execution throttle: 100 LUNs per Target: 0 Enable LIP Reset: No Enable LIP Full Login: Yes Enable Target Reset: Yes
Recommended Advanced Adapter Settings:
Login Retry Count: 8 Link Down Timeout: 10 Command Timeout: 20 Extended event logging: Disabled (enable it for debugging only) RIO Operation Mode: 0 Interrupt Delay Timer: 0
Configuring Emulex HBAs for VMware ESXi

This section applies to ESXi hosts that have Emulex HBAs installed. After the firmware is installed, load the default settings for all your adapters that are installed on the host system and make sure that the Adapter BIOS is disabled, unless SAN Boot is used.
VMware ESXi installation

Install your VMware ESXi server and load any other drivers and patches, if required. For more information about this procedure, see the installation guide that is available at this website: http://pubs.vmware.com/vsphere-50/topic/com.vmware.ICbase/PDF/vsphere-esxi-vcenter -server-50-storage-guide.pdf After you complete your ESXi installation, connect to your ESXi Server by using the vSphere client and browse to the Configuration tab. Click Storage Adapters and scroll down to your FC HBAs, as shown in Figure 4-13. Make a note of the WWPNS of the installed adapters for further use.
Figure 4-13 Show WWPNs in VMware ESX
165
VMware ESXi multipathing

The ESXi server has its own multipathing software. You do not need to install a multipathing driver on the ESXi server or on the guest operating systems. The ESXi multipathing policy supports the following operating modes: Round Robin Fixed Most Recently Used (MRU) The IBM Storwize V3700 is an active/active storage device. Since VMware ESXi 5.0 and later, the suggested multipathing policy is Round Robin. Round Robin performs dynamic load balancing for I/O. If you do not want to have the I/O balanced over all available paths, the Fixed policy is supported. This policy setting can be selected for every volume. Set this policy after IBM Storwize V3700 LUNs are attached to the ESXi host. For more information about attaching IBM Storwize V3700 LUNs to ESX, see Chapter 5., Basic volume configuration on page 189. After all of these steps are completed, the ESXi host is prepared to connect to the IBM Storwize V3700. To create the ESX Fibre Channel host in the IBM Storwize V3700 GUI, see 4.3.2, Creating Fibre Channel hosts on page 177.
4.2.5 VMware ESX: Preparing for iSCSI attachment

This section describes how to enable iSCSI on VMware ESX hosts. In this book, we focus on vSphere ESXi 5.1. This release of ESX also supports useful features, such as jumbo frames and an increased numbers of switches supported per server and doubles the number of port groups that are supported per server. We focus on the basic ESXi iSCSI setup. For more information, see vSphere Storage, which is available at the following website: http://pubs.vmware.com/vsphere-50/topic/com.vmware.ICbase/PDF/vsphere-esxi-vcenter -server-50-storage-guide.pdf To check for more recent editions of this document, see this website:
http://www.vmware.com/support/pubs
Complete the following steps to prepare a VMware ESXi host to connect to an IBM Storwize V3700 using iSCSI: 1. Make sure that the latest firmware levels are applied on your host system. 2. Install VMware ESXi and load more drivers, if required. 3. Connect the ESXi server to your network. You should use separate network interfaces for iSCSI traffic. 4. Configure your network to fulfill your security and performance requirements. The iSCSI initiator is installed by default on ESXi server, and only must be enabled. To enable the initiator, complete the following steps: 1. Connect to your ESXi server by using the vSphere Client. Browse to the Configuration tab and select Networking, as shown in Figure 4-14 on page 167.
166
Figure 4-14 Select VMware networking
2. Click Add Networking to start the Add Network Wizard, as shown in Figure 4-15. Select VMkernel and click Next.
Figure 4-15 Add Network Wizard
167
VMKernel: The VMkernel networking interface is used for VMware vMotion, IP storage and Fault Tolerance. 3. Select one or more network interfaces that you want to use for iSCSI traffic and click Next, as shown in Figure 4-16.
Figure 4-16 Select an iSCSI interface
168
4. Enter a meaningful Network Label and click Next, as shown in Figure 4-17.
Figure 4-17 Enter network label
Important: None of the properties were marked intentionally; see VMware Best Practices and Recommendation for use of these options.
169
5. Enter an IP address for your iSCSI network. You should use a dedicated network for iSCSI traffic, as shown in Figure 4-18.
Figure 4-18 iSCSI IP settings
6. Click Next to see what is included in the network settings and the click Finish to exit from iSCSI configuration.
170
7. From the Configuration tab, select Storage Adapters and scroll down to iSCSI Adapter and click Properties, as shown in Figure 4-19.
Figure 4-19 iSCSI software adapter
171
8. The iSCSI Software Adapter Properties window opens. Click Configure and the General Properties window opens. The initiator is enabled by default (it was changed from VMware ESX 4.0). Parameters can be changed here if required.The VMware ESX iSCSI initiator is now successfully enabled, as shown in Figure 4-20. Make a note of the initiator name for future use.
Figure 4-20 iSCSI initiator properties
VMware iSCSI Target Configuration

This section describes the basic setup of VMware iSCSI Targets. Complete the following steps to configure the VMware iSCSI target: 1. By using VMware vSphere client, connect to your ESX host. From the Configuration tab, click Storage Adapters. Select the iSCSI adapter interface from VMware vSphere client and select Properties. 2. The iSCSI Initiator Properties window opens. Select the Static Discovery tab, as shown in Figure 4-21 on page 173.
172
Figure 4-21 iSCSI Static Target Discovery
3. Click Add to enter the IBM Storwize V3700 iSCSI IP address (or addresses) or iSCSI target name (or names). Typically, the default iSCSI target port is TPC Port 3260. In this example, the default Port remains and the IBM Storwize V3700 iSCSI IP address (or addresses) are added, as shown in Figure 4-22.
Figure 4-22 Add Static Target Server
4. Click Ok to confirm. Repeat step 3 to add other IBM Storwize V3700 node canister iSCSI IP addresses.
173
5. After all entries are completed, click Ok and then click Close. A new window should appear to explain that a rescan of iSCSI adapter is necessary, as shown in Figure 4-23.
Figure 4-23 Rescan of iSCSI adapter
Your VMware ESX host is now prepared to connect to the IBM Storwize V3700. For more information about creating the ESX iSCSI host by using the IBM Storwize V3700 GUI, see 4.3, Configuring hosts on IBM Storwize V3700 on page 175. For more information and best practices procedures that use VMware vSphere 5.1, see the guide that is available at this website: http://pubs.vmware.com/vsphere-51/topic/com.vmware.ICbase/PDF/vsphere-esxi-vcenter -server-51-storage-guide.pdf
4.2.6 VMware ESX: Preparing for SAS attachment

This section describes how to connect a VMware ESX host to an IBM Storwize V3700 using a SAS Host Bus Adapter. In this book, we focus on ESXi 5.1 and LSI SAS HBA model 9207-8e. Complete the following steps to connect your ESX system with a SAS HBA device to an IBM Storwize V3700: 1. Install the HBA(s) on ESX system. 2. Ensure latest firmware level (or levels) is applied on your ESX system. 3. Update and configure the SAS host bus adapter, if required. 4. Connect SAS cables securely at both ends, the host SAS HBA and the IBM Storwize V3700 SAS host ports. For more information about VMware vSphere Storage, including how to configure, use, and manage different types of Storage, see this website: http://pubs.vmware.com/vsphere-51/topic/com.vmware.ICbase/PDF/vsphere-esxi-vcenter -server-51-storage-guide.pdf In our example, no changes were required to any of the HBA parameters. A single two-port SAS card was used to connect to both node canisters in the I/O group.
174
By using VMware vSphere client, the SAS HBA is visible by selecting Configuration Storage Adapters, as shown in Figure 4-24.
Figure 4-24 Storage adapters
Important: Under the WWN column in VMware vSphere client, worldwide port names (WWPNs) are not shown. To obtain the WWN number, see Recording SAS WWPN on page 162.
4.3 Configuring hosts on IBM Storwize V3700

This section describes how to create Fibre Channel, iSCSI, and SAS hosts by using the IBM Storwize V3700 GUI. We assume that the hosts were prepared as described in Chapter 4.2, Preparing the host operating system on page 153, and WWPNs, iSCSI, or SAS addresses were recorded for host creation purposes.
4.3.1 Considerations when creating hosts on IBM Storwize V3700

When a host object is created on an IBM Storwize V3700, remember to verify the configuration limits and restrictions. The maximum number of host objects per I/O Group is 512 whether they are Fibre Channel, SAS, or iSCSI hosts. For more information about IBM Storwize V3700 Limits and Restrictions, see this website: http://www.ibm.com/support/docview.wss?rs=591&uid=ssg1S1004380
175
IBM Storwize V3700 supports a maximum of two nodes per system, which are arranged as single I/O Group per cluster. To create a host, complete the following steps: 1. From the IBM Storwize V3700 GUI, open the host configuration window by clicking Hosts, as shown in Figure 4-25.
Figure 4-25 Open host window
2. In the Hosts window, click New Host to start the Create Host wizard, as shown in Figure 4-26.
Figure 4-26 Create a host
The IBM Storwize V3700 V7.1 supports Fibre Channel, iSCSI, and SAS Hosts. If you want to create a Fibre Channel host object, continue with 4.3.2, Creating Fibre Channel hosts. For more information about creating iSCSI hosts, see 4.3.3, Creating iSCSI hosts on page 181. For more information about creating SAS hosts, see 4.3.5, Creating SAS hosts on page 186.
176
4.3.2 Creating Fibre Channel hosts

To create Fibre Channel hosts, complete the following steps: 1. Click Fibre Channel Host, as shown in Figure 4-26 on page 176. The Fibre Channel configuration wizard opens, as shown in Figure 4-27.
Figure 4-27 Create Fibre Channel Host
2. Enter a host name and click the Fibre Channel Ports drop-down menu to see a list of all known WWPNs, as shown in Figure 4-28.
Figure 4-28 Available WWPNs
The IBM Storwize V3700 shows the host port WWPNs available if you prepared the hosts, as described in 4.2, Preparing the host operating system on page 153. If they do not appear in the list, scan for new disks in your operating system and click Rescan in the configuration wizard. If they still do not appear, check your SAN zoning and repeat the scanning.
l
AIX hosts: AIX host WWPNs appear after few minutes after you log in to the fabric. You can enter the WWPN manually or run the cfgmgr command on the AIX host again. This starts a new discovery process and updates the SAN Fabric. WWPNs should then be available to the IBM Storwize V3700 GUI.
177
3. Select the WWPN for your host and click Add Port to List, as shown in Figure 4-29.
Figure 4-29 Add a port to a list
4. Add all host ports, as shown in Figure 4-30.
Figure 4-30 Add all WWPNs
Creating offline hosts: If you want to create offline hosts object in IBM Storwize V3700 (for example, if it is not connected at the moment), it is also possible to enter the WWPNs manually. Enter them in standardized format into the Fibre Channel Ports field and add them to the list.
178
5. Click Advanced. If you are creating an HP/UX or TPGS host, select the required Host Type from the list, as shown in Figure 4-31.
Figure 4-31 Advanced Settings
6. Click Create Host. The created host task runs, as shown in Figure 4-32.
Figure 4-32 Create Host completes
179
7. Click Close to return to the host window, as shown in Figure 4-33.
Figure 4-33 All Hosts
8. Repeat steps 1 - 7 for all of your Fibre Channel hosts. Figure 4-34 shows the All Hosts window after a second host is created.
Figure 4-34 All Hosts after a second host is created
After you complete the creation of Fibre Channel hosts, see Chapter 5, Basic volume configuration on page 189 to create volumes and map them to the created hosts.
180
4.3.3 Creating iSCSI hosts

To create iSCSI hosts, complete the following steps: 1. Click iSCSI Host (as shown in Figure 4-26 on page 176) and the iSCSI configuration wizard opens, as shown in Figure 4-35.
Figure 4-35 Create an iSCSI host
2. Enter a host name and the iSCSI initiator name into the iSCSI Ports field and click Add Ports to List, as shown in Figure 4-36. Repeat this step if several initiator names are required for one host.
Figure 4-36 Enter name and iSCSI ports
181
3. If you are connecting an HP/UX or TPGS host, select Advanced (as shown in Figure 4-37) and select the correct host type.
Figure 4-37 Advanced Settings options
4. Click Create Host and the wizard completes, as shown in Figure 4-38. Click Close.
Figure 4-38 Create an iSCSI host complete
5. Repeat steps 1 - 4 for every iSCSI host that you want to create.
182
4.3.4 Configuring IBM Storwize V3700 for iSCSI host connectivity.

The iSCSI hosts are now configured on the IBM Storwize V3700. To provide connectivity, the iSCSI Ethernet ports must also be configured. Complete the following steps to enable iSCSI connectivity: 1. Switch to the Settings window and click Network, as shown in Figure 4-39.
Figure 4-39 Settings Network
183
2. Select iSCSI and the iSCSI configuration window opens, as shown in Figure 4-40.
Figure 4-40 iSCSI Configuration
In the iSCSI Configuration, you have all the iSCSI settings for the IBM Storwize V3700. You can configure iSCSI Alias, iSNS Addresses, Chap Authentication Configuration, and iSCSI IP addresses from this window. Important: The name of the system becomes part of iSCSI qualified name (IQN). If you change the cluster name after iSCSI is configured, iSCSI hosts might need to be reconfigured.
184
3. Click in the Node Canister drop-down menu to select the canister you want to enter the iSCSI IP addresses, as shown in Figure 4-41. Repeat this step for each Ethernet port from both node canisters.
Figure 4-41 Enter iSCSI IP addresses
4. After you enter the IP addresses for each port, click Save to enable the configuration, as shown in Figure 4-42.
Figure 4-42 iSCSI IP Configuration
If you need to setup iSNS and CHAP authentication, scroll down to enter the IP address for the iSCSI Storage Name Service (iSNS). After you configure the CHAP secret for the Storwize V3700 clustered system, ensure that the clustered system CHAP secret is added to each iSCSI-attached host. Before your ESXi host can discover the IBM Storwize V3700 storage, the iSCSI initiator must be configured and authentication might need to be done, depending on the customer scenario.
185
You can verify the network configuration by using the vmkping utility. If you must authenticate the target, you might need to configure the dynamic or static discovery address and target name of the Storwize V3700 in vSphere. For more information, see VMware iSCSI Target Configuration on page 172. For more information about creating volumes and mapping them to a host, see Chapter 5, Basic volume configuration on page 189.
4.3.5 Creating SAS hosts

The next steps provide guidance on how to setup hosts with SAS Host Bus Adapter (or adapters). Complete the following steps by using the IBM Storwize V3700 GUI to create an SAS host: 1. Click SAS Host. The Create Host window opens, as shown in Figure 4-43.
Figure 4-43 Create SAS host
2. Enter the Host name and from the drop-down menu, select the SAS WWPN (or WWPNs) that is associated with the host, as shown in Figure 4-44.
Figure 4-44 Available SAS WWPN
3. Click Advanced to expand the Advanced Settings options. 4. As shown Figure 4-45 on page 187, select HP/UX or TPGS if you are creating one of these types of hosts. For more information, see Chapter 5.2.2, Manually mapping a volume to the host on page 210.
186
Figure 4-45 Creating HP/UX SAS host
5. Click Create Host to create SAS Host object on IBM Storwize V3700. 6. Click Close upon task completion. The IBM Storwize V3700 shows the host port WWPNs that are available if you prepared the hosts, as described in 4.2, Preparing the host operating system on page 153. If they do not appear in the list, scan for new disks in your operating system and click Rescan in the configuration wizard. If they still do not appear, check your physical connectivity, paying particular attention to the SAS cable orientation and repeat the scanning. For more information about hosts, see the Information Center at this website: http://pic.dhe.ibm.com/infocenter/storwize/v3700_ic/topic/com.ibm.storwize.v3700.7 10.doc/svc_over_1dcur0.html The IBM Storwize V3700 is now configured and ready for SAS Host use. For more information about advanced host and volume administration, see Chapter 8, Advanced host and volume administration on page 353.
187
188
Chapter 5.
Basic volume configuration

This chapter describes how to use the IBM Storwize V3700 to create a volume and map a volume to a host. A volume is a logical disk on the IBM Storwize V3700 that is provisioned out of a storage pool and is recognized by a host with an identifier UID field and a parameter list. The first part of the chapter describes how to create volumes of different types and map them to the defined host. The second part of this chapter describes how to discover those volumes. After you finish this chapter, your basic configuration is done and you can store data on the IBM Storwize V3700. Advanced host and volume administration, such as adding and deleting host ports and creating thin provisioned volumes, is described in Chapter 8, Advanced host and volume administration on page 353. This chapter includes the following topics: Provisioning storage from IBM Storwize V3700 and making it available to the host Mapping a volume to the host Discovering the volumes from the host and specifying multipath settings
189
5.1 Provisioning storage from IBM Storwize V3700 and making it available to the host
This section describes the setup process and shows how to create volumes and make them accessible from the host. The following steps are required to complete the basic setup of your environment: 1. Create volumes. 2. Map volumes to the host. 3. Discover the volumes from the host and specify multipath settings. Complete the following steps to create the volumes: 1. Open the All Volumes window of the IBM Storwize V3700 GUI to start the process of creating volumes, as shown in Figure 5-1.
Figure 5-1 GUI Volumes option
190
Highlight and click Volumes and the window that lists all current volumes opens, as shown in Figure 5-2 on page 191.
Figure 5-2 Volume listings
If this is a first time setup, no volumes are listed. Click New Volume in the upper left of the window. 2. The New Volume window opens, as shown in Figure 5-3.
Figure 5-3 New Volumes
By default, all volumes that you create are striped across all available MDisks in that storage pool. The GUI for the IBM Storwize V3700 provides the following preset selections for the user:
Chapter 5. Basic volume configuration
191
Generic: A striped volume that is fully provisioned, as described in 5.1.1, Creating a generic volume on page 192. By fully provisioned, we mean that the volume capacity reflects the same size physical disk capacity. Thin-provisioned: A striped volume that is space efficient. This means that the volume capacity is not reflected the physical capacity that is available to the volume. There are choices available in the Advanced menu to help determine how much space is fully allocated initially and how large the volume can grow, as described in 5.1.2, Creating a thin-provisioned volume on page 195. Mirror: A striped volume that consists of two striped copies and is synchronized to protect against loss of data if the underlying storage pool of one copy is lost, as described in 5.1.3, Creating a mirrored volume on page 198. Thin-mirror: Two synchronized copies. Both are thin provisioned, as described in 5.1.4, Creating a thin-mirror volume on page 203. 3. Select which volume you want to create. For more information, see the relevant section in this chapter.
5.1.1 Creating a generic volume

The most commonly used type of volume is the generic volume. This type of volume is fully provisioned, which means that the volume size reflects the physical disk capacity that is allocated to the volume. The host and the IBM Storwize V3700 see the fully allocated space. Complete the following steps to create a generic volume: 1. Choose a generic volume, as shown in Figure 5-4.
Figure 5-4 Provisioning a Generic volume
192
2. Select the pool in which the volume is to be created. Select the pool by clicking it. In our example, we click the mdiskgrp0 pool, as shown in Figure 5-5.
Figure 5-5 Pool Selection
Important: The Create and Map to Host option is disabled if no host is configured on the IBM Storwize V3700. For more information about configuring the host, see Chapter 4, Host configuration on page 151.
193
There are advanced options available, as shown in Figure 5-6.
Figure 5-6 Generic Advanced options
For Generic volumes, capacity management and mirroring do not apply. There is an option to set the preferred node within the I/O Group. The recommendation is to set Preferred Node to automatic and allow the IBM Storwize V3700 balance the volume I/O across the two node canisters in the I/O Group.
194
3. Enter a volume name and size. Click Create and Map to Host to create and map the new volume to a host or click Create to complete the task and leave mapping the volume to a later stage. The Generic Volume is created, as shown in Figure 5-7.
Figure 5-7 Volume creation complete
If you chose to map the host, click Continue and see 5.2.1, Mapping newly created volumes to the host by using the wizard on page 207. If you do not want to map the volumes now, click Close and they can be mapped later, as described in 5.2.2, Manually mapping a volume to the host on page 210.
5.1.2 Creating a thin-provisioned volume

Volumes can be configured to be thin-provisioned. A thin-provisioned volume behaves the same as a fully provisioned volume regarding application reads and writes. However, when a thin-provisioned volume is created, it is possible to specify two capacities: the real physical capacity that is allocated to the volume from the storage pool, and its virtual capacity that is available to the host. The real capacity determines the quantity of extents that are initially allocated to the volume. The virtual capacity is the capacity of the volume that is reported to all other components (for example, FlashCopy and cache) and to the host servers.
195
To create a thin-provisioned volume, complete the following steps: 1. Select Thin-Provision, as shown in Figure 5-8.
Figure 5-8 Create a thin-provisioned volume
2. Select the pool in which the thin-provisioned volume should be created by clicking it and entering the volume name and size. In our example, we click the mdiskgrp0 pool. The result is shown in Figure 5-9.
Figure 5-9 Enter the volume name and size
196
Under the Volume Name field is a summary that shows that you are about to make a thin-provisioned volume, what virtual capacity is to be configured (this is the volume size you specified), the space that is physically allocated (real capacity), and the available physical capacity in the pool. By default, the real capacity is 2% of the virtual capacity but you can change this setting in the Advanced options. Select Advanced and click Capacity Management, as shown in Figure 5-10.
Figure 5-10 Advanced Settings
The following advanced options are available: Real: Specify the size of the physical capacity space that is used during creation. Automatically Extend: This option enables the automatic expansion of real capacity as the physical data size of the volume grows. Warning Threshold: Enter a threshold for receiving capacity alerts; the IBM Storwize V3700 will send an alert when the physically allocated capacity reaches 80% of the virtual capacity in this case. This is the default setting. Thin-Provisioned Grain Size: Specify the grain size for real capacity. 3. Make your choices, if required, and click OK to return to New Volume window, as shown in Figure 5-9 on page 196.
197
4. Click Create and Map to Host to create and map the volume to a host, or click Create to complete the task and leave mapping the volume to a later stage. The volume is created, as shown in Figure 5-11.
Figure 5-11 Thin volume creation complete
If you chose to map the host, click Continue and see 5.2.1, Mapping newly created volumes to the host by using the wizard on page 207 If you do not want to map the volumes now, click Close and they can be mapped later, as described in 5.2.2, Manually mapping a volume to the host on page 210.
5.1.3 Creating a mirrored volume

IBM Storwize V3700 offers the capability to mirror volumes, which means a single volume is presented to the host, but two copies exist in the storage back end, usually in different storage pools (all reads are handled by the primary copy). This feature is similar to host-based software mirroring, but it provides a single point of management for all operating systems and provides storage high availability to operating systems that do not support software mirroring. By using this setup with the mirror copies in different storage pools, you can protect against array failures (for example multiple disk failures) and more advanced features are available to you, as described in Chapter 8, Advanced host and volume administration on page 353. The mirroring feature improves availability, but it is not a disaster recovery solution because both copies are accessed by the same node pair and are addressable only by a single cluster. For more information about a disaster recovery solution with mirrored copies spanning I/O Groups in different locations, see the Chapter 10, Copy services on page 449.
198
To create a mirrored volume, complete the following steps: 1. Select Mirror, as shown in Figure 5-12.
Figure 5-12 Create a mirrored volume
199
2. Select the primary pool by clicking it and the view changes to the secondary pool, as shown in Figure 5-13.
Figure 5-13 Selecting primary storage pool
200
3. Select the secondary pool by clicking it, and enter a volume name and the required size, as shown in Figure 5-14.
Figure 5-14 Select a secondary pool, volume name, and size
Storage pools: It is best practice before a mirrored volume is created to create at least two separate storage pools and use different pools for the primary and secondary pool when entering the information in the GUI to create the volume. In this way, the two mirror copies are created on different MDisks (and therefore different physical drives) and protect against a full MDisk failure in a storage pool. For more information about storage pools, see Chapter 7, Storage pools on page 313. 4. The summary shows you the capacity information about the pool. If you want to select advanced settings, click Advanced and then click the Mirroring tab, as shown in Figure 5-15 on page 202.
201
Figure 5-15 Advanced mirroring features
5. In the advanced mirroring settings, you can specify a synchronization rate. Enter a Mirror Sync Rate 1 - 100%. With this option, you can set the importance of the copy synchronization progress. This sets the preference to synchronize more important volumes faster than other mirrored volumes. By default, the rate is set to 50% for all volumes. If for any reason the mirrors loose synchronization, this parameter governs the rate at which the various mirrored volumes re-synchronize. Click OK to return to the New Volume window, as shown in Figure 5-14 on page 201.
202
6. Click Create and Map to Host and the mirrored volume is created, as shown in Figure 5-16. If you do not want to map hosts, click Create.
Figure 5-16 Mirrored volume task complete
If you chose to map the host, click Continue and see 5.2.1, Mapping newly created volumes to the host by using the wizard on page 207 If you do not want to map the volumes now, click Close and they can be mapped later, as described in 5.2.2, Manually mapping a volume to the host on page 210.
5.1.4 Creating a thin-mirror volume

By using a thin-mirror volume, you can allocate the required physical space on demand (as described in 5.1.2, Creating a thin-provisioned volume on page 195) and have several copies of a volume available (as described in 5.1.3, Creating a mirrored volume on page 198).
203
To create a thin-mirror volume, complete the following steps: 1. Select Thin Mirror, as shown in Figure 5-17.
Figure 5-17 Create a Thin Mirror
204
2. Select the primary pool by clicking it and the view changes to the secondary pool, as shown in Figure 5-18.
Figure 5-18 Selecting storage pools
205
3. Select the pool for the secondary copy and enter a name and a size for the new volume, as shown in Figure 5-19.
Figure 5-19 Enter a volume name and size
4. The summary shows you the capacity information and the allocated space. You can click Advanced and customize the thin-provision settings (as shown in Figure 5-10 on page 197) or the mirror synchronization rate (as shown in Figure 5-15 on page 202). If you opened the advanced settings, click OK to return to the New Volume window, as shown in Figure 5-19.
206
5. Click Create and Map to Host and the mirrored volume is created, as shown in Figure 5-20.If you do not want to map hosts, click Create to complete the task.
Figure 5-20 Thin Mirror Volume task complete
If you chose to map the host, click Continue and see 5.2.1, Mapping newly created volumes to the host by using the wizard on page 207 If you do not want to map the volumes now click Close and they can be mapped later, as described in 5.2.2, Manually mapping a volume to the host on page 210
5.2 Mapping a volume to the host

The first part of this section describes how to map a volume to a host if you click the Create and Map to Host option. The second part of this section describes the manual host mapping process that is used to create customized mappings.
5.2.1 Mapping newly created volumes to the host by using the wizard
We continue to map the volume that we created in 5.1, Provisioning storage from IBM Storwize V3700 and making it available to the host on page 190. We assume that you followed the procedure and clicked Create and Map to Host followed by Continue when the volume create task completed.
207
To map the volumes, complete the following steps: 1. Select the host as shown in Figure 5-21.
Figure 5-21 Choose a host
2. The Modify Host Mappings window opens and your host and the created volume already are selected. Click Map Volumes and the volume is mapped to the host, as shown in Figure 5-22.
Figure 5-22 Modify host mappings
208
The new volume to be mapped is highlighted already. To continue and complete the mapping, you can click Apply or Map Volumes. The only difference is that after the mapping task completes (as shown in Figure 5-23), the Modify Host Mappings window closes automatically. Clicking Apply also completes the task, but leaves the Modifying Host Mappings window open.
Figure 5-23 Host mapping task complete
3. After the task completes, click Close. If you selected the Map Volumes option, the window returns to the Volumes display and the newly created volume is displayed. We see that it is already mapped to a host, as shown in Figure 5-24.
Figure 5-24 New Volume that is mapped to host
The host can access the volume and store data on it. For more information about discovering the volumes on the host and changing host settings if required, see 5.3, Discovering the volumes from the host and specifying multipath settings on page 213.
209
You also can create multiple volumes in preparation for discovering them later. Mappings can be customized as well. For more information about advanced host configuration, see Chapter 8, Advanced host and volume administration on page 353.
5.2.2 Manually mapping a volume to the host

We assume that you followed the procedure that is described in 5.1, Provisioning storage from IBM Storwize V3700 and making it available to the host on page 190 and clicked Create, as shown in Figure 5-25. To manually map a volume to the host, complete the following steps: 1. Open the Hosts window, as shown in Figure 5-25.
Figure 5-25 Hosts menu option
2. Right-click the host to which a volume is to be mapped and select Modify Mappings, as shown in Figure 5-26.
Figure 5-26 Modify mappings selection
210
3. The Modify Host Mappings window opens. Select the volume that you want to map from the Unmapped Volumes pane, as shown in Figure 5-27.
Figure 5-27 Modify host mappings window
The volume is highlighted and the green move to the right arrow becomes active, as shown in Figure 5-28
Figure 5-28 Volume mapping selected
211
Important: The Unmapped pane shows all the volumes that are not mapped to the current selected host. Some of the volumes might display a mappings icon because they might be mapped to other hosts. 4. Click the right-pointing arrow button. The volume is moved to Volumes Mapped to the Host pane, as shown in Figure 5-29. Repeat this step for all the volumes that you want to map. To continue and complete the mapping, you can click Apply or Map Volumes. The only difference is that after the mapping task completes as shown in Figure 5-29, the Modify Host Mappings window closes automatically. Clicking Apply also completes the task but leaves the Modifying Host Mappings window open.
Figure 5-29 Modify host mappings window
5. After the task completes, click Close, as shown in Figure 5-30 on page 213. If you selected the Map Volumes option, the window returns to the Hosts display. If you clicked Apply, the GUI still displays the Modify Host Mappings window.
212
Figure 5-30 Modify mapping complete
The volumes are now mapped and the host can access the volumes and store data on them. For more information about discovering the volumes on the host and changing host settings (if required), see 5.3, Discovering the volumes from the host and specifying multipath settings.
5.3 Discovering the volumes from the host and specifying multipath settings
This section describes how to discover the volumes that were created and mapped as described in 5.1, Provisioning storage from IBM Storwize V3700 and making it available to the host on page 190 and 5.2, Mapping a volume to the host on page 207, and set more multipath settings, if required. We assume that you completed all of the following steps that are described previously in the book so that the hosts and the IBM Storwize V3700 are prepared: Prepare your operating systems for attachment including installing MPIO support (see Chapter 4, Host configuration on page 151). Create hosts by using the GUI (see Chapter 4, Host configuration on page 151). Perform basic volume configuration and host mapping (see 5.1, Provisioning storage from IBM Storwize V3700 and making it available to the host on page 190 and 5.2, Mapping a volume to the host on page 207). This section describes how to discover Fibre Channel, iSCSI and SAS volumes from Windows 2008 and VMware ESX 5.x hosts.
213
In the IBM Storwize V3700 GUI, click Hosts, as shown in Figure 5-31.
Figure 5-31 Open all hosts
The view that opens gives you an overview of the currently configured hosts and shows if they are mapped, as shown in Figure 5-32.
Figure 5-32 All Hosts view
214
5.3.1 Windows 2008 Fibre Channel volume attachment

To attach the Fibre Channel volume in Windows 2008, complete the following steps: 1. Right-click your Windows 2008 Fibre Channel host in the Hosts view, as shown in Figure 5-33 and select Properties.
Figure 5-33 Host properties
2. Browse to the Mapped Volumes tab, as shown in Figure 5-34.
Figure 5-34 Mapped volumes to a host
The host details show you which volumes are mapped to the host. You also see the volume UID and the SCSI ID. In our example, one volume with SCSI ID 0 is mapped to the host. 3. If MPIO is not already installed on your Windows 2008 host and does not yet have IBM Subsystem Device Driver installed, follow the procedure that is described in 4.2.1, Windows 2008 R2: Preparing for Fibre Channel attachment on page 153.
215
4. Log on to your Microsoft host and click Start All Programs Subsystem Device Driver DSM Subsystem Device Driver DSM. A command-line interface (CLI) opens. Enter datapath query device and press Enter to see whether there are IBM Storwize V3700 disks that are connected to this host, as shown in Example 5-1.
Example 5-1 Datapath query device
C:\Program Files\IBM\SDDDSM>datapath query device Total Devices : 3
DEV#: 0 DEVICE NAME: Disk1 Part0 TYPE: 2145 POLICY: OPTIMIZED SERIAL: 600507630080009B000000000000003F ============================================================================ Path# Adapter/Hard Disk State Mode Select Errors 0 Scsi Port5 Bus0/Disk1 Part0 OPEN NORMAL 0 0 1 Scsi Port5 Bus0/Disk1 Part0 OPEN NORMAL 23 0 2 Scsi Port6 Bus0/Disk1 Part0 OPEN NORMAL 0 0 3 Scsi Port6 Bus0/Disk1 Part0 OPEN NORMAL 21 0
5. The output provides information about the connected volumes. In our example, there is one disk that is connected, Disk 1, and four paths to the disk are available (State = Open). Important: Correct SAN switch zoning must be implemented to allow only eight paths to be visible from the host to any one volume. Volumes with more than this amount are not supported. For more information, see Chapter 2, Initial configuration on page 27. 6. Open the Windows Disk Management window (as shown in Figure 5-35) by clicking Start Run. Enter diskmgmt.msc and click OK.
Figure 5-35 Windows Disk Management
216
7. Right-click the disk in the left pane and select Online if the disk is not online already, as shown in Figure 5-36.
Figure 5-36 Setting a disk online
8. Right-click the disk again and then click Initialize Disk, as shown in Figure 5-37.
Figure 5-37 Initializing disk
9. Select an initialization option and click OK. In our example, we selected MBR, as shown in Figure 5-38.
Figure 5-38 Initialize Disk option
217
10.Right-click the pane on the right side and click New Simple Volume, as shown in Figure 5-39.
Figure 5-39 New Simple Volume
11.The New Simple Volume wizard starts, as shown in Figure 5-40.
Figure 5-40 New Volume Wizard
Follow the wizard and the volume is ready to use from your Windows host, as shown in Figure 5-41 on page 219. In our example, we mapped a 300 GB disk on the IBM Storwize V3700 to a Windows 2008 host using Fibre Channel connectivity.
218
Figure 5-41 Volume is ready to use
Windows device discovery: Windows often automatically discovers new devices, such as disks. If you completed all of the steps that are presented here and do not see any disks, click Actions Rescan Disk in Disk Management to discover the new volumes, as shown in Figure 5-42.
Figure 5-42 Windows disk re-scan
The basic setup is now complete and the IBM Storwize V3700 is configured. The host is prepared and can access the volumes over several paths and can store data on the storage subsystem.
219
5.3.2 Windows 2008 iSCSI volume attachment

To perform iSCSI volume attachment in Windows 2008, complete the following steps: 1. Right-click your Windows 2008 iSCSI host in the Hosts view, as shown in Figure 5-43, click Properties.
Figure 5-43 All Hosts view
Browse to the Mapped Volumes tab, as shown in Figure 5-44
Figure 5-44 Mapped volumes on an iSCSI host
220
The host details show you which volumes are mapped to the host. You also can see the volume UID and the SCSI ID. In our example, one volume with SCSI ID 2 is mapped to the host. 2. Log on to your Windows 2008 host and click Start Administrative Tools iSCSI Initiator to open the iSCSI Configuration tab, as shown in Figure 5-45.
Figure 5-45 Windows iSCSI Configuration tab
3. Enter the IP address of one of the IBM Storwize V3700 iSCSI ports in the Target field at the top of the window and click Quick Connect, as shown in Figure 5-46. iSCSI IP addresses: The iSCSI IP addresses are different for the cluster and canister IP addresses. They are configured as described in 4.3.3, Creating iSCSI hosts on page 181.
221
Figure 5-46 iSCSI Quick Connect
The IBM Storwize V3700 initiator is discovered and connected, as shown in Figure 5-47.
Figure 5-47 iSCSI Initiator target is connected
Click Done to return to the iSCSI Initiator Properties window. The storage disk is connected to your iSCSI host, but only a single path is used. To enable multipathing for iSCSI targets, complete the following steps. 4. If MPIO is not already installed on your Windows 2008 host, follow the procedure that is described in 4.2.1, Windows 2008 R2: Preparing for Fibre Channel attachment on page 153. IBM Sub System Device Driver is not required for iSCSI connectivity.
222
5. Click Start Administrative Tools MPIO, click the Discover Multi-Paths tab, and select Add support for iSCSI devices, as shown in Figure 5-48.
Figure 5-48 Enable iSCSI MPIO
Important: In some cases, the Add support for iSCSI devices option is disabled. To enable this option, you must have a connection to at least one iSCSI device. 6. Click Add and confirm the prompt to reboot your host.
223
7. After the reboot process is complete, log on again and click Start Administrative Tools iSCSI Initiator to open the iSCSI Configuration tab. Browse to the Discovery tab, as shown in Figure 5-49.
Figure 5-49 iSCSI Properties Discovery tab
224
8. Click Discover Portal..., enter the IP address of another IBM Storwize V3700 iSCSI port (as shown in Figure 5-50), and click OK.
Figure 5-50 Discover Target Portal window
9. Return to the Targets tab (as shown in Figure 5-51) and you see that the new connection there is listed as Inactive.
Figure 5-51 Inactive target ports
225
10.Highlight the inactive port and click Connect. The Connect to Target window opens, as shown in Figure 5-52.
Figure 5-52 Connect to a target
11.Select Enable Multipath and click OK. The second port is now Connected, as shown in Figure 5-53.
Figure 5-53 Second target port connected
Repeat this step for each IBM Storwize V3700 port you want to use for iSCSI traffic. It is possible to have up to four port paths to the system.
226
12.Open the Windows Disk Management window (as shown in Figure 5-54) by clicking Start Run. Enter diskmgmt.msc and then click OK.
Figure 5-54 Windows Disk Management
13.Set the disk online, initialize it, and then create a file system on it as described in step 6 10 of 5.3.1, Windows 2008 Fibre Channel volume attachment on page 215. The disk is now ready to use as shown in Figure 5-55. In our example, we mapped a 5 GB disk to a Windows 2008 host that uses iSCSI connectivity.
Figure 5-55 Windows Disk Management: Disk is ready to use
227
5.3.3 Windows 2008 Direct SAS volume attachment

To attach an SAS volume in Windows 2008, complete the following steps: 1. Right-click your Windows 2008 SAS host in the Hosts view (as shown in Figure 5-56) and select Properties.
Figure 5-56 Windows SAS host from host view
Figure 5-57 SAS host mapped volumes
228
The Mapped Volumes tab shows you which volumes are mapped to the host. You also see the volume UID and the SCSI ID. In our example, one volume with SCSI ID 0 is mapped to the host. 3. If MPIO is not installed on your Windows 2008 host and does not have IBM Subsystem Device Driver installed, follow the procedure that is described in 4.2.1, Windows 2008 R2: Preparing for Fibre Channel attachment on page 153. 4. Log on to your Microsoft host and click Start All Programs Subsystem Device Driver DSM Subsystem Device Driver DSM. A CLI opens. Enter datapath query device and press Enter to see whether there are IBM Storwize V3700 disks that are connected to this host, as shown in Example 5-2.
Example 5-2 SDDDSM output SAS attached host
Microsoft Windows [Version 6.1.7601] Copyright (c) 2009 Microsoft Corporation.
All rights reserved.
C:\Program Files\IBM\SDDDSM>datapath query device Total Devices : 1
DEV#: 0 DEVICE NAME: Disk1 Part0 TYPE: 2145 POLICY: OPTIMIZED SERIAL: 600507630080009B0000000000000042 ============================================================================ Path# Adapter/Hard Disk State Mode Select Errors 0 Scsi Port5 Bus0/Disk1 Part0 OPEN NORMAL 70 0 1 Scsi Port5 Bus0/Disk1 Part0 OPEN NORMAL 0 0 C:\Program Files\IBM\SDDDSM>
5. The output provides information about the connected volumes. In our example, there is one disk that is connected, Disk 1, and two paths to the disk are available (State = Open). 6. Open the Windows Disk Management window (as shown in Figure 5-58) by clicking Start Run. Enter diskmgmt.msc and then click OK.
Figure 5-58 Windows disk management
229
7. Right-click the disk in the left pane and select Online if the disk is not online, as shown in Figure 5-59.
Figure 5-59 Setting volume online
8. Right-click the disk again and then click Initialize Disk, as shown in Figure 5-60.
Figure 5-60 Initializing disk
9. Select an initialization option and click OK. In our example, we selected MBR, as shown in Figure 5-61.
Figure 5-61 Initialize disk option
230
10.Right-click the pane on the right side and click New Simple Volume, as shown in Figure 5-62.
Figure 5-62 New simple volume - SAS attach
11.The New Simple Volume wizard start, as shown in Figure 5-63.
Figure 5-63 Simple volume wizard
Follow the wizard and the volume is ready to use from your Windows host, as shown in Figure 5-64 on page 232. In our example, we mapped a 100 GB disk on the IBM Storwize V3700 to a Windows 2008 host using SAS direct attach connectivity.
231
Figure 5-64 SAS attached volume ready to use.
5.3.4 VMware ESX Fibre Channel volume attachment

To perform VMware ESX Fibre Channel attachment, complete the following steps: 1. Right-click your VMware ESX Fibre Channel host in the Hosts view (as shown in Figure 5-65) and select Properties.
Figure 5-65 Example ESX FC host
232
Figure 5-66 Mapped volumes to ESX FC host
In the Host Details window, there are two volumes that are connected to the ESX FC host that uses SCSI ID 0 and SCSI ID 1. The UID of the volumes is also displayed. 3. Connect to your VMware ESX Server by using the vSphere client. Browse to the Configuration tab and select Storage Adapters, as shown in Figure 5-67.
Figure 5-67 vSphere Client: Storage adapters
233
4. Click Rescan All... in the upper right hand corner and click OK in the resulting pop-up window, as shown in Figure 5-68. This scans for new storage devices.
Figure 5-68 Rescan
The mapped volumes on the IBM Storwize V3700 should now appear against the Fibre Channel adapters. 5. Select Storage and click Add Storage, as shown in Figure 5-69.
Figure 5-69 vSphere Client: Storage Add Storage
234
6. The Add Storage wizard opens. Click Select Disk/LUN and click Next. The IBM Storwize V3700 disks appear, as shown in Figure 5-70. In our example, they are the Fibre Channel Disks. We continue with the 500GB volume. Highlight and click Next.
Figure 5-70 Select FC Disk
235
7. Select a File System version option. In our example, we selected VMFS-5, as shown in Figure 5-71.
Figure 5-71 Select File System Type
236
8. Click Next to move through the wizard. A summary window of the current disk layout is shown, followed by the option to name the new Datastore. In our example, we chose RedbookTestOne, as shown in Figure 5-72.
Figure 5-72 Enter a Datastore name
237
9. Click Next and the final window is the choice of creating the datastore with the default maximum size of the volume or a proportion of it. After you click Finish, the wizard closes and you return to the storage view. In Figure 5-73, you see that the new volume was added to the configuration.
Figure 5-73 Add Storage task complete
10.Highlight the new Datastore and click Properties (as shown in Figure 5-74) to see the details of the Datastore, as shown in Figure 5-75 on page 239.
Figure 5-74 Datastore properties
238
Figure 5-75 Datastore property details
11.Click Manage Paths to customize the multipath settings. Select Round Robin (as shown in Figure 5-76) and click Change.
Figure 5-76 Select a Datastore multipath setting
239
When the change completes, click Closed and the storage disk is available and ready to use with your VMware ESX server that uses Fibre Channel attachment.
5.3.5 VMware ESX iSCSI volume attachment

To perform a VMware ESX iSCSI attachment, complete the following steps: 1. Right-click your VMware ESX iSCSI host in the Hosts view (as shown in Figure 5-77) and select Properties.
Figure 5-77 Select iSCSI ESX host properties
240
Figure 5-78 iSCSI ESX host properties
In the Host Details window, you see that there is one volume that is connected to the ESX iSCSI host that uses SCSI ID 1. The UID of the volume is also displayed. 3. Connect to your VMware ESX Server by using the vSphere Client. Browse to the Configuration tab and select Storage Adapters, as shown in Figure 5-79.
Figure 5-79 Storage Adapters
241
4. Highlight the iSCSI Software Adapter and click Properties. The iSCSI initiator properties window opens. Select the Dynamic Discovery tab (as shown in Figure 5-80) and click Add.
Figure 5-80 iSCSI Initiator properties
5. To add a target, enter the target IP address, as shown in Figure 5-81 on page 243. The target IP address is the iSCSI IP address of a node in the I/O Group from which you are mapping the iSCSI volume. Leave the IP port number at the default value of 3260 and click OK. The connection between the initiator and target is established.
242
Figure 5-81 Enter a target IP address
Repeat this step for each IBM Storwize V3700 iSCSI port you want to use for iSCSI connections. iSCSI IP addresses: The iSCSI IP addresses are different for the cluster and canister IP addresses. They are configured as described in 4.3.3, Creating iSCSI hosts on page 181. 6. After you add all the ports that are required, close the iSCSI Initiator properties by clicking Close, as shown in Figure 5-80 on page 242. You are prompted to rescan for new storage devices. Confirm the scan by clicking Yes, as shown in Figure 5-82 on page 244.
243
Figure 5-82 Confirm the rescan
7. Go to the storage view and click Add Storage. The Add Storage wizard opens, as shown in Figure 5-83. Select Disk/LUN and then click Next.
Figure 5-83 vSphere Client: Storage Add Storage
244
8. The new iSCSI LUN displays. Highlight it and click Next, as shown in Figure 5-84.
Figure 5-84 Select iSCSI LUN
245
Figure 5-85 Select file system type
246
10.Review the disk layout and click Next, as shown in Figure 5-86.
Figure 5-86 Current Disk Layout
247
11.Enter a name for the Datastore and click Next, as shown in Figure 5-87.
Figure 5-87 Enter a Datastore name
248
12.Select the Maximum available space and click Next, as shown in Figure 5-88.
Figure 5-88 Select capacity
249
13.Review your selections and click Finish, as shown in Figure 5-89.
Figure 5-89 Finish the wizard
The process starts to add an iSCSI LUN, which can take a few minutes. After the tasks complete, the new Datastore appears in the storage view, as shown in Figure 5-90.
Figure 5-90 New Datastore available
250
14.Highlight the new Datastore and click Properties to open and review the Datastore settings, as shown in Figure 5-91.
15.Click Manage Paths, select Round Robin as the multipath policy (as shown in Figure 5-92), and click Change.
Figure 5-92 Change the multipath policy
251
16.Click Close twice to return to the storage view. The storage disk now is available and ready to use for your VMware ESX server that uses an iSCSI attachment.
5.3.6 VMware ESX Direct SAS volume attachment

To perform VMware ESX Direct SAS attachment, complete the following steps: 1. Right-click your VMware ESX SAS host in the Hosts view (as shown in Figure 5-93) and select Properties.
Figure 5-93 Example ESX SAS host
252
Figure 5-94 Mapped volumes to ESX SAS host
In the Host Details window, there is one volume that is connected to the ESX SAS host that use SCSI ID 0. The UID of the volume is also displayed. 3. Connect to your VMware ESX Server by using the vSphere client. Browse to the Configuration tab and select Storage Adapters, as shown in Figure 5-95.
Figure 5-95 vSphere Client: Storage adapters
4. Click Rescan All... in the upper right corner and click OK in the resulting pop-up window, as shown in Figure 5-96. This scans for new storage devices.
253
Figure 5-96 Rescan
The mapped volumes on the IBM Storwize V3700 should now appear against the SAS adapters. 5. Select Storage and click Add Storage, as shown in Figure 5-97.
Figure 5-97 Storage Add Storage
254
6. The Add Storage wizard opens. Click Select Disk/LUN and click Next. The IBM Storwize V3700 disks appear, as shown in Figure 5-98. In our example, it is the SAS Disk. Highlight and click Next.
Figure 5-98 Select SAS Disk
255
Figure 5-99 Select File System Type
256
8. Click Next to move through the wizard. A summary window of the current disk layout is shown, followed by the option to name the new Datastore. In our example, we chose RedbookTestThree, as shown in Figure 5-100.
Figure 5-100 Adding Datastore name
257
9. Click Next and the final window is the choice of creating the datastore with the default maximum size of the volume or a proportion of it. After you click Finish, the wizard closes and you return to the storage view. In Figure 5-101, you see that the new volume was added to the configuration.
Figure 5-101 Add Storage task complete
10.Highlight the new Datastore and click Properties (as shown in Figure 5-102) to see the details of the Datastore, as shown in Figure 5-103 on page 259.
258
Figure 5-103 Datastore property details
11.Click Manage Paths to customize the multipath settings. Select Round Robin (as shown in Figure 5-104 on page 259) and click Change.
Figure 5-104 Select a Datastore multipath setting Chapter 5. Basic volume configuration
259
When the change completes, click Close and the storage disk is available and ready to use with your VMware ESX server that uses Fibre Channel attachment.
260
Chapter 6.
Storage migration wizard

This chapter describes the steps that are required to migrate data from older storage systems to the IBM Storwize V3700 by using the built-in Storage Migration Wizard. Migrating data from older storage systems to the Storwize V3700 storage system enables the benefits of the Storwize V3700 functionality, such as the easy-to-use GUI, internal virtualization, thin provisioning, and FlashCopy to be realized. This chapter includes the following topics: Interoperability and compatibility Storage migration wizard Storage migration wizard example scenario
261
6.1 Interoperability and compatibility

Interoperability is an important consideration when a new storage system is set up in an environment that contains existing storage infrastructure. In this section, we show how to check that the storage environment, the older storage system, and IBM Storwize V3700 are ready for the data migration process. To ensure system interoperability and compatibility between all elements that are connected to the SAN fabric, check the proposed configuration with the IBM System Storage Interoperation Center (SSIC). SSIC can confirm whether the solution is supported and provide recommendations for hardware and software levels. If the required configuration is not listed for support in the SSIC, contact your IBM marketing representative and a Request for Price quotation (RPQ) for your specific configuration. For more information about the IBM SSIC, see this website: http://www-03.ibm.com/systems/support/storage/ssic/interoperability.wss
6.2 Storage migration wizard

The Storwize V3700 storage migration wizard simplifies the migration process. The wizard consists of easy-to-follow panels to guide users. This process involves external virtualization of the older storage system (in our example, an IBM DS3400) and performing an online migration. After data migration is complete, the older storage system is removed from Storwize V3700 control and can be retired.
6.2.1 External virtualization capability

To migrate data from an older storage system to the Storwize V3700, it is necessary to make use of the built-in external virtualization capability of the Storwize V3700. This capability places external Fibre Channel connected Logical Units (LU) under the control of the Storwize V3700. Important: The IBM Storwize V3700 supports only external storage virtualization for the purposes of data migration.
6.2.2 Overview of the storage migration wizard

The overall storage migration wizard process includes the following stages: The older storage systems divide storage into many Small Computer System Interface (SCSI) LUs that are presented on a Fibre Channel SAN to hosts. I/O to the LUs is stopped and changes are made to the mapping of the storage system LUs and to the SAN fabric zoning so that the original LUs are presented directly to the Storwize V3700. The Storwize V3700 discovers the external LUs as unmanaged MDisks. The unmanaged MDisks are then imported to the Storwize V3700 as image mode MDisks and placed into a storage pool. This storage pool is now a logical container for the SAN-attached LUs.
262
Image mode volumes are created from the image mode MDisks. Each volume has a one-to-one mapping with an image mode MDisk. From a data perspective, the image mode volume represents the SAN-attached LU exactly as it was before the import operation. The image mode volume is on the same physical drives of the older storage system and the data remains unchanged. The Storwize V3700 is presenting active images of the SAN-attached LUs. The hosts have the older storage system multipath device driver removed and are then configured for Storwize V3700 attachment. Further zoning changes are made for host-to-V3700 SAN connections. The Storwize V3700 hosts are defined with worldwide port names (WWPNs) and the image mode volumes are mapped. After the volumes are mapped, the hosts discover the Storwize V3700 volumes through a host rescan device or reboot operation. Storwize V3700 volume mirror operations are then initiated. The image mode volumes are mirrored to generic Storwize V3700 volumes. The generic volumes are from user nominated internal storage pools. The mirrors are online migration tasks, which means hosts can access and use the volumes during the mirror synchronization process. After the mirror operations are complete, the migrations are then finalized by the user. The finalization process is seamless and it removes the volume mirror relationships and the image mode volumes. The older storage system LUs are now migrated and the Storwize V3700 control of those old LUs can be removed. The older storage system can then be retired.
6.2.3 Storage migration wizard tasks

The storage migration wizard is designed for the easy and nondisruptive migration of data from an older storage system to the internal capacity of the Storwize V3700. This section describes the following storage migration wizard tasks: Avoiding data loss Accessing the storage migration wizard Step 1: Before you begin Step 2: Prepare environment for migration Step 3: Map storage Step 4: Migrating MDisks Step 5: Configure hosts Step 6: Map volumes to hosts Step 7: Select storage pool Step 8: Finish the storage migration wizard Finalize migrated volumes
Avoiding data loss

The risk of losing data when the storage migration wizard is used correctly is low. However, it is prudent to avoid potential data loss by creating a backup of all the data that is stored on the hosts, the older storage systems, and the Storwize V3700 before the wizard is used.
Accessing the storage migration wizard

Select System Migration in the Pools menu to open the System Migration panel, as shown in Figure 6-1 on page 264. The System Migration panel provides access to the storage migration wizard and displays the migration progress information.
Chapter 6. Storage migration wizard
263
Figure 6-1 Pool menu
Click Start New Migration and the storage migration wizard is started. Figure 6-2 shows the System Migration panel.
Figure 6-2 System Migration Panel
264
Step 1: Before you begin

Follow step 1 of the storage migration wizard in which the restrictions and prerequisites are described. Read and select each restriction and prerequisite that applies to the planned migration, as shown in Figure 6-3.
Figure 6-3 Step 1 of the storage migration wizard, with all options selected
Restrictions
Confirm that the following restrictions apply: I am not using the storage migration wizard to migrate cluster hosts, including clusters of VMware hosts and VIOS. I am not using the storage migration wizard to migrate SAN Boot images. If the restrictions cannot be selected, the migration must be performed outside of this wizard because more steps are required. For more information about this topic, see the IBM Storwize V3700 Information Center at this website: http://pic.dhe.ibm.com/infocenter/storwize/v3700_ic/index.jsp?topic=%2Fcom.ibm.sto rwize.v3700.641.doc%2Fv3700_ichome_641.html The VMware ESX Storage vMotion feature might be an alternative for migrating VMware clusters. For more information about this topic, see this website: http://www.vmware.com/products/vmotion/overview.html
265
Prerequisites
Confirm that the following prerequisites apply: Make sure that the Storwize V3700, older storage system, hosts, and Fibre Channel ports are physically connected to the SAN fabrics. If there are VMware ESX hosts involved in the data migration, make sure that the VMware ESX hosts are set to allow volume copies to be recognized. For more information, see the VMware ESX product documentation at this website: http://www.vmware.com/support/pubs/vsphere-esxi-vcenter-server-pubs.html? If all options can be selected, click Next to continue. If there are circumstances that prevent one or other of the options from being selected, the Next button remains inactive. The wizard does not progress and the data must be migrated without use of this wizard.
Step 2: Prepare environment for migration

Follow step 2 of the wizard carefully. When all of the required tasks are complete, click Next to continue. Figure 6-4 shows the Prepare Environment for Migration panel.
Figure 6-4 Storage Migration Wizard
Step 3: Map storage

In step 3 of the wizard record all of the details relating to host WWPNs, volume mapping, and SCSI IDs. Record the information carefully because it can be used in later panels. Figure 6-5 on page 267 shows the Map Storage panel.
266
Figure 6-5 Map Storage Panel
Table 6-1 shows an example table for capturing the information that relates to older storage system LUs.
Table 6-1 Example table for capturing external LU information LU Name MCRPRDW2K801 MCRPRDW2K802 MCRPRDLNX01 MCRPRDLNX02 Controller DS3400_01 DS3400_01 DS3400_01 DS3400_01 Array Array_01 Array_01 Array_02 Array_02 SCSI ID 0 1 0 1 Host name MCRPRDW2K8 MCRPRDW2K8 MCRPRDLNX MCRPRDLNX Capacity 50 GB 200 GB 100 GB 300 GB
SCSI ID: Record the SCSI ID of the LUs to which the host is originally mapped. Some operating systems do not support changing the SCSI ID during the migration.
267
Table 6-2 shows an example table for capturing host information.

Table 6-2 Example table for capturing host information Host Name/ LU Names MCRPRDW2K8 MCRPRDW2K8 MCRPRDLNX MCRPRDLNX Adapter / Slot / Port WWPN HBA F/W 2.10 2.10 2.72a2 2.72a2 HBA Device Driver 9.1.9.25 9.1.9.25 8.2.0.63.3p 8.2.0.63.3p Operating System W2K8 R2 SP1 W2K8 R2 SP1 RHEL5 RHEL5 V3700 Multipath Software SDDDSM 2.4.3.1-2 SSDDSM 2.4.3.1-2 Device Mapper Device Mapper
QLE2562 / 2 / 1 QLE2562 / 2 / 2 LP10000 / 0 / 1 LP10000 / 1 / 1
21000024FF2D0BE8 21000024FF2D0BE9 10000000C1234A56 10000000C6789A01
When all the data is captured and the volume mappings are changed, click Next to continue. The Storwize V3700 runs the discover devices task. After the task is complete, click Close to continue. Figure 6-6 shows the results of the discover devices task.
Figure 6-6 Discover Devices task
268
Step 4: Migrating MDisks

Follow step 4 of the wizard and select the MDisks that are to be migrated and then click Next to continue. Figure 6-7 shows the Migrating MDisks panel.
Figure 6-7 Migrating MDisks panel
MDisk selection: Select only the MDisks that are applicable to the current migration plan. After step 8 of the current migration is complete, another migration plan can be started to migrate any remaining MDisks.
The IBM Storwize V3700 then runs the import MDisks task. After the task is complete, click Close to continue. Figure 6-8 on page 270 shows the result of the import MDisks task.
269
Figure 6-8 Import MDisks task
Step 5: Configure hosts

Follow step 5 of the wizard to select or configure new hosts, as required. Click Next to continue. Figure 6-9 shows the configure hosts panel.
Figure 6-9 Configure hosts panel
270
Important: It is not mandatory to select the hosts now. The actual selection of the hosts occurs in the next step, Map Volumes to Hosts. However, take this opportunity to cross-check the hosts that have data to be migrated by highlighting them in the list before you click Next.
Step 6: Map volumes to hosts

Follow step 6 of the wizard to select the newly migrated volume. Click Map to Host. Figure 6-10 shows the Map Volumes to Hosts panel.
Figure 6-10 Map Volumes to Hosts panel
The image mode volumes are listed and the names of the image mode volumes are assigned automatically by the Storwize V3700 storage system. The names can be changed to reflect something more meaningful to the user by selecting the volume and clicking Rename in the Actions menu. Names: The names of the image mode volumes must begin with a letter. The name can be a maximum of 63 characters. The following valid characters can be used: Uppercase letters (A-Z) Lowercase letters (a-z) Digits (0 -9) Underscore (_) Period (.) Hyphen (-) Blank space The names must not begin or end with a space. A Host menu is displayed as shown in Figure 6-11 on page 272.
271
Figure 6-11 Modify Host Mappings pop-up
Select the required host and the Modify Host Mappings panel is opened, as shown in Figure 6-12. The MDisks highlighted in step 6 of the wizard are shown in yellow on the Modify Host Mappings panel. The yellow highlighting means that the volumes are not yet mapped to the host. Click the volume and then Edit SCSI ID and modify as required. The SCSI ID should reflect the same SCSI ID as was recorded in step 3. Click Map Volume to complete the mapping.
Figure 6-12 Modify Host Mappings panel
272
The Storwize V3700 runs the modify mappings task. After the task is complete, the volume is mapped to the host. Figure 6-13 shows the Modify Mappings task. Click Close to continue.
Figure 6-13 Modify Mappings task
The Map Volumes to Hosts panel is displayed again as shown in Figure 6-14. Verify that migrated volumes now have Yes in the Host Mappings column. Click Next to continue.
Figure 6-14 Map Volumes to Hosts panel that shows Yes in the Host Mappings column
Scan for new devices on the hosts to verify the mapping. The disks are now displayed as IBM 2145 Multi-Path disk devices. This disk device type is common for the IBM Storwize disk family and the IBM SAN Volume Controller.
273
Step 7: Select storage pool

Follow step 7 of the wizard to select an internal storage pool. The destination storage pool of the data migration is an internal storage pool of the Storwize V3700. Ensure that there is enough space in the selected storage pool to accommodate the migrated volume. The migration task runs in the background and results in a copy of the data being placed on the MDisks in the selected storage pool. The process uses the volume mirroring function that is included with the Storwize V3700. Figure 6-15 shows the Select Storage Pool panel. Click Next to continue.
Figure 6-15 Select Storage Pool panel
The Storwize V3700 runs the start migration task. After the task is complete, click Close to continue. Figure 6-16 shows the result of the Start Migration task.
Figure 6-16 Start Migration task
274
Step 8: Finish the storage migration wizard

Step 8 of the wizard gives final instructions to complete the migration. Click Finish to exit the wizard as shown in Figure 6-17.
Figure 6-17 Step 8 of the storage migration wizard
The end of the storage migration wizard is not the end of the data migration. The data migration is still in progress. A percentage indication of the migration progress is displayed in the System Migration panel, as shown in Figure 6-18.
Figure 6-18 Storage Migration panel with a migration in progress
Finalize migrated volumes

When the migration completes, select the Migration and right-click Finalize. Verify the volume names and the number of migrations and click OK. The image mode volumes are deleted and the associated image mode MDisks from the migration storage pool are removed. The status of those image mode MDisks is then unmanaged. When the finalization completes, the data migration to the IBM Storwize V3700 is done. Remove the zoning to the older storage and retire the system.
275
6.3 Storage migration wizard example scenario

This section describes an example scenario that provides some details that relate to the attachment and verification tasks that are associated with running the storage migration wizard.
6.3.1 Storage migration wizard example scenario description

The example scenario we use shows the introduction of a Storwize V3700 to an environment that contains existing storage infrastructure including a SAN fabric, a Windows 2008 host, and an IBM DS3400 storage system. The Windows 2008 host has existing data on the disks of an IBM DS3400 storage system. That data must be migrated to the internal storage of the Storwize V3700. The Windows 2008 host has a dual port QLogic Host Bus Adapter (HBA) type QLE2562. Each of the Fibre Channel switches is IBM 2498-24B. There are two host disks to be migrated, Disk 1 and Disk 2. Figure 6-19 shows the Windows 2008 Disk management panel. The two disks feature defined volumes. The volume labels are Migration 1 (G: drive) and Migration 2 (H: drive).
Figure 6-19 Windows 2008 disk management panel
The two disks to be migrated are on the IBM DS3400 storage system. Therefore, the disk properties display the disk device type as an IBM1726-4xx FAStT disk device. To show this disk attribute, right-click the disk to show the menu and then select Properties, as shown in Figure 6-20.
Figure 6-20 Display properties of disk before migration
276
After the disk properties panel is opened, the General tab shows the disk device type. Figure 6-21 shows the General tab in the Windows 2008 Disk Properties window.
Figure 6-21 Window 2008 Disk Properties: General tab
Perform this task on all disks before the migration. Performing this same task after the Storwize V3700 mapping and host rescan, the disk device definitions change to IBM 2145 Multi-Path disk device and confirm that the disks are under Storwize V3700 control.
Example scenario Fibre Channel cabling layout

Figure 6-22 on page 278 shows the Fibre Channel cabling layout to provide more information about the example migration. The Host, IBM DS3400, and Storwize V3700 are cabled into a dual SAN fabric configuration. The connection method shown can provide improved availability through fabric and path redundancy and improved performance through workload balancing.
277
Figure 6-22 Example scenario Fibre Channel cabling layout
6.3.2 Using the storage migration wizard for example scenario

This section provides an overview of the storage migration tasks that are performed when the storage migration wizard is used for the example scenario.
Overview of storage migration wizard tasks for example scenario

The following steps provide an overview of the wizard tasks for our example scenario: 1. Search the IBM SSIC for scenario compatibility. 2. Back up all of the data that is associated with the host, DS3400, and Storwize V3700. 3. Start New Migration wizard on the Storwize V3700. 4. Check the restrictions in Step 1 of the wizard. 5. Follow Step 2 in the wizard to prepare the environment for migration, including the following steps: a. Stop host operations or stop all I/O to volumes that you are migrating.
278
b. Remove zones between the hosts and the storage system from which you are migrating in our case remove the Host-to-DS3400 zones on SAN. c. Update your host device drivers, including your multipath driver and configure them for attachment to the IBM Storwize V3700 system. Complete the steps that are described in 4.2.1, Windows 2008 R2: Preparing for Fibre Channel attachment on page 153 to connect to Storwize V3700 using Fibre Channel. Pay careful attention to the following tasks: Make sure that the latest OS service pack and test fixes are applied to your Microsoft server. Use the latest firmware and driver levels on your host system. Install HBA or HBAs on the Windows server that use the latest BIOS and drivers. Configure the HBA for hosts that are running Windows. Set the Windows timeout value Install the Subsystem Device Driver Device Specific Module (SDDDSM) multipath module. Connect the FC Host Adapter ports to the switches. Configure the switches (zoning).
d. Create a storage system zone between the storage system that is to be migrated and the IBM Storwize V3700 system and host zones for the hosts that are to be migrated. Pay careful attention to the following tasks: Locate the WWPNs for Host. Locate WWPNs for IBM DS3400 Locate WWPNs for Storwize V3700 Define port aliases definitions on SAN. Add V3700-to-DS3400 zones on SAN. Add Host-to-V3700 zones on SAN.
e. Create a host or host group in the external storage system with the WWPNs for this system. Important: If you cannot restrict volume access to specific hosts by using the external storage system, all volumes on the system must be migrated. Add Storwize V3700 host group on DS3400 f. Configure the storage system for use with the IBM Storwize V3700 system. Follow the IBM Storwize V3700 Information Center for DS3400 configuration recommendations. http://pic.dhe.ibm.com/infocenter/storwize/v3700_ic/index.jsp?topic=%2Fcom.i bm.storwize.v3700.710.doc%2Fsvc_configdiskcontrollersovr_22n9uf.html 6. Follow Step 3 of the wizard to map storage, including the following steps: a. Create a list of all external storage system volumes that are migrated. Create a DS3400 LU table. b. Record the hosts that use each volume. Create Host table.
279
c. Record the WWPNs that are associated with each host. Add WWPNs to Host table. d. Unmap all volumes that are migrated from the hosts in the storage system and map them to the host or host group that you created when your environment was prepared. Important: If you cannot restrict volume access to specific hosts by using the external storage system, all volumes on the system must be migrated. Move LUs from Host to Storwize V3700 Host Group on DS3400. e. Record the storage system LUN that is used to map each volume to this system. Update the DS3400 LU table. 7. Follow Step 4 of the wizard to migrate MDisks. Select discovered MDisks on the IBM Storwize V3700. 8. In Step 5 of the wizard, configure hosts by completing the following steps: a. Create Hosts on Storwize V3700 b. Select Hosts on Storwize V3700 9. In Step 6 of the wizard, map volumes to hosts by completing the following steps: a. Map volumes to Host on Storwize V3700 b. Verify disk device type is now 2145 on Host c. SDDDSM datapath query commands on Host 10.In Step 7 of the wizard, select the storage pool on the IBM Storwize V3700 to create the mirror copies in as part of the background data migration task. 11.Finish the storage migration wizard. 12.Finalize the migrated volumes.
Detailed view of the storage migration wizard for the example scenario
The following steps provide more information about the wizard tasks for our example scenario: 1. Search the IBM SSIC for scenario compatibility. 2. Back up all of the data that is associated with the host, DS3400, and Storwize V3700. 3. Start New Migration to open the wizard on the Storwize V3700, as shown in Figure 6-23.
Figure 6-23 Start new migration
280
4. Follow step 1 of the wizard and select all of the restrictions and prerequisites, as shown in Figure 6-24. Click Next to continue.
Figure 6-24 Storage migration wizard: Step 1
281
5. Follow step 2 of the wizard, as shown in Figure 6-25. Complete all of the steps to before you continue.
Figure 6-25 Storage Migration Wizard: Step 2
Pay careful attention to the following tasks: a. Stop host operations or stop all I/O to volumes that you are migrating. b. Remove zones between the hosts and the storage system from which you are migrating. c. Update your host device drivers, including your multipath driver and configure them for attachment to this system. Complete the steps that are described in 4.2.1, Windows 2008 R2: Preparing for Fibre Channel attachment on page 153 to prepare a Windows host to connect to Storwize V3700 by using Fibre Channel. Pay careful attention to the following tasks: 282 Make sure that the latest OS service pack and test fixes are applied to your Microsoft server. Use the latest firmware and driver levels on your host system. Install host bus adapters (HBAs) on the Windows server that uses the latest BIOS and drivers. Connect the FC Host Adapter ports to the switches. Configure the switches (zoning). Configure the HBA for hosts that are running Windows. Set the Windows timeout value. Install the multipath module.
d. Create a storage system zone between the storage system that is migrated and this system, and host zones for the hosts that are migrated. To perform this step, locate the WWPNs of the host, IBM DS3400, and Storwize V3700, then create an alias for each port to simplify the zone creation steps. Important: A WWPN is a unique identifier for each Fibre Channel port that is presented to the SAN fabric.
Locating the HBA WWPNs on the Windows 2008 host

Refer to the original IBM DS3400 Host definition to locate the WWPNs of the hosts dual port QLE2562 HBA. To complete this task, open the IBM DS3400 Storage Manager and click the Modify tab, as shown in Figure 6-26. Select Edit Host Topology to show the host definitions.
Figure 6-26 IBM DS3400 modify tab: Edit Host Topology
Figure 6-27 shows the IBM DS3400 storage manager host definition and the associated WWPNs.
Figure 6-27 IBM DS3400 host definition
Record the WWPNs for alias, zoning, and the Storwize V3700 New Host task. Important: Alternatively, the QLogic SAN Surfer application for the QLogic HBAs or the SAN fabric switch reports can be used to locate the hosts WWPNs.
Locating the controller WWPNs on the IBM DS3400

The IBM DS3400 Storage Manager can provide the controller WWPNs through the Storage Subsystem Profile. Open the IBM DS3400 Storage Manager, click Support, and select View Storage Subsystem Profile. Figure 6-28 shows the IBM DS3400 Storage Manager Support tab.
283
Figure 6-28 IBM Storage Manager: view storage subsystem profile
Click the Controllers tab to show the WWPNs for each controller. Figure 6-29 shows the IBM DS3400 storage manager storage subsystem profile.
Figure 6-29 Storage subsystem profile: Controller WWPNs
Locating node canister WWPNs on the Storwize V3700

To locate the WWPNs for the Storwize V3700 node canisters, expand the control enclosure section and select the canister from the System Details panel. Scroll down to Ports to see the 284
associated WWPNs. Figure 6-30 on page 285 shows the Storwize V3700 System Details panel with the WWPNs shown for Enclosure 1 Canister 1.
Figure 6-30 Storwize V3700 node canister WWPNs information
WWPN: The WWPN is made up of eight bytes (two digits per byte). In Figure 6-30, the third last byte in the listed WWPNs are 04, 08, 0C, and 10. They are the differing bytes for each WWPN only. Also, the last two bytes in the listed example of 08CE are unique for each node canister. Noticing these types of patterns can help when you are zoning or troubleshooting SAN issues.
Example scenario Storwize V3700 and IBM DS3400 WWPN diagram

Each port on the Storwize V3700 and IBM DS3400 has a unique and persistent WWPN. This configuration means if an HA in the storage system is replaced, the new HA presents the same WWPNs as the old HA. This configuration means that if you understand the WWPN of a port, you can match it to the storage system and the Fibre Channel port. Figure 6-31 on page 286 shows the relationship between the device WWPNs and the Fibre Channel ports for the Storwize V3700 and the IBM DS3400 that are used in the example scenario as shown in Figure 6-31 on page 286.
285
Figure 6-31 Example scenario Storwize V3700 and IBM DS3400 WWPN location diagram
Zoning: Define aliases on the SAN fabrics

Now that the WWPNs for Storwize V3700, IBM DS3400, and Windows 2008 host are located, you can define the WWPN aliases on the SAN fabrics for the Storwize V3700. DS3400 and Windows 2008 host aliases also can be created if necessary. Aliases can simplify the zone creation process. Create an alias name for each interface, then add the WWPN. Aliases can contain the FC Switch Port to which the device is attached, or the attached devices WWPN. In this example scenario, WWPN-based zoning is used instead of port-based zoning. Either method can be used; however, it is best not to intermix the methods and keep the zoning configuration consistent throughout the fabric. When WWPN-based zoning is used, be mindful that when host HBA cards are replaced, occasions can occur when a new HBA card contains new WWPNs. Consequently, the previously defined aliases must be modified to match the new card. This situation is not the case for IBM Storage Systems because they use persistent WWPNs, which means that the WWPNs remain unchanged after an HBA card is replaced. The following alias definitions are used in our example: Storwize V3700 ports connected to SAN Fabric A: alias= V3700_Canister_Left_Port1 wwpn= 50:05:07:68:03:04:26:CE alias= V3700_Canister_Left_Port3 wwpn= 50:05:07:68:03:0C:26:CE alias= V3700_Canister_Right_Port1 wwpn= 50:05:07:68:03:04:26:CF 286
alias= V3700_Canister_Right_Port3 wwpn= 50:05:07:68:03:0C:26:CF Storwize V3700 ports connected to SAN Fabric B: alias= V3700_Canister_Left_Port2 wwpn= 50:05:07:68:03:08:26:CE alias= V3700_Canister_Left_Port4 wwpn= 50:05:07:68:03:10:26:CE alias= V3700_Canister_Right_Port2 wwpn= 50:05:07:68:03:08:26:CF alias= V3700_Canister_Right_Port4 wwpn= 50:05:07:68:03:10:26:CF IBM DS3400 ports connected to SAN Fabric A: alias= DS3400_CTRLA_FC1 wwpn= 20:26:00:A0:B8:75:DD:0E alias= DS3400_CTRLB_FC1 wwpn= 20:27:00:A0:B8:75:DD:0E IBM DS3400 ports connected to SAN Fabric B: alias= DS3400_CTRLA_FC2 wwpn= 20:36:00:A0:B8:75:DD:0E alias= DS3400_CTRLB_FC2 wwpn= 20:37:00:A0:B8:75:DD:0E Window 2008 HBA port connected to SAN Fabric A: alias= W2K8_HOST_P2 wwpn= 21:00:00:24:FF:2D:0B:E9 Window 2008 HBA port connected to SAN Fabric B: alias= W2K8_HOST_P1 wwpn= 21:00:00:24:FF:2D:0B:E8
Zoning: Define the V3700-to-DS3400 zones on the SAN fabrics

Define the V3700-to-DS3400 zones on the SAN fabrics. The best way to zone DS3400-to-V3700 connections is to ensure that the IBM DS3400 controllers are not in the same zone. The zoning configuration in the following example shows the two zones per fabric that are necessary to ensure that the IBM DS3400 controllers are not in the same zone. Also, all Storwize V3700 node canisters must detect the same ports on IBM DS3400 storage system. FABRIC A Zone name= ALL_V3700_to_DS3400_CTRLA_FC1: DS3400_CTRLA_FC1 V3700_Canister_Left_Port1 V3700_Canister_Left_Port3 V3700_Canister_Right_Port1 V3700_Canister_Right_Port3 Zone name= ALL_V3700_to_DS3400_CTRLB_FC1: DS3400_CTRLB_FC1 V3700_Canister_Left_Port1 V3700_Canister_Left_Port3 V3700_Canister_Right_Port1 V3700_Canister_Right_Port3 FABRIC B Zone name= ALL_V3700_to_DS3400_CTRLA_FC2: DS3400_CTRLA_FC2 V3700_Canister_Left_Port2 V3700_Canister_Left_Port4 V3700_Canister_Right_Port2 V3700_Canister_Right_Port4 Zone name= ALL_V3700_to_DS3400_CTRLB_FC2: DS3400_CTRLB_FC2 V3700_Canister_Left_Port2 V3700_Canister_Left_Port4 V3700_Canister_Right_Port2 V3700_Canister_Right_Port4
287
Zoning: Define the Host-to-V3700 zones on the SAN fabrics

Define the Host-to-V3700 zones on each of the SAN fabrics. Zone each Host HBA port with one port from each node canister. This configuration provides four paths to the Windows 2008 host. The SDDDSM multipath software optimizes the host to use all four paths, as shown in the following example: FABRIC A Zone name= W2K8_HOST_P2_to_V3700_Port1s: W2K8_HOST_P2 V3700_Canister_Left_Port1 V3700_Canister_Right_Port1 FABRIC B Zone name= W2K8_HOST_P1_to_V3700_Port2s: W2K8_HOST_P1 V3700_Canister_Left_Port2 V3700_Canister_Right_Port2 Important: The configuration of an intra-cluster zone (V3700-to-V3700) on each fabric is recommended. Place all Storwize V3700 port aliases from each node canister into the one zone on each of the fabrics. This configuration provides further resilience by providing another communication path between each of the node canisters. Create a host or host group in the external storage system with the WWPNs for this system. Important: If you cannot restrict volume access to specific hosts by using the external storage system, all volumes on the system must be migrated. To complete this step, an IBM DS3400 Host Group is defined for the IBM Storwize V3700, which contains two hosts. Each host is one of the node canisters of the Storwize V3700.
Creating an IBM DS3400 Host Group

To define a new Host Group for the Storwize V3700 by using the DS3400 Storage Manager, click the Configure tab and then select Create Host Group to open the Create Host Group panel. Figure 6-32 shows the IBM DS3400 Configure tab and the Create Host Group option.
Figure 6-32 IBM DS3400 configure tab: Create host group
288
Click Create Host Group and create a host group that is named V3700. Figure 6-33 shows the IBM DS3400 Create Host Group panel.
Figure 6-33 IBM DS3400 Create Host Group panel
Creating IBM DS3400 hosts

By using the IBM DS3400 Storage Manager, create a Host for each node canister of the Storwize V3700. To define a new Host by using the DS3400 Storage Manager, click the Configure tab and then select Configure Host-Access (Manual) to open the configure host access panel. Figure 6-34 shows the IBM DS3400 configure tab and the Configure Host-Access (Manual) option.
Figure 6-34 IBM DS3400 storage manager configure tab: Create host
289
Enter a name for the host and ensure that the selected host type is IBM TS SAN VCE. The name of the host should be easily recognizable and meaningful, such as Storwize_V3700_Canister_Left and Storwize_V3700_Canister_Right. Click Next to continue. Figure 6-35 shows the IBM DS3400 storage manager configure host access (manual) panel.
Figure 6-35 IBM DS3400 storage manager configure tab: Configure host
290
The node canisters WWPNs are automatically discovered and must be matched to the canisters host definition. Select each of the four WWPNs for the node canister and then click Add >. The selected WWPN moves to the right side of the panel. Figure 6-36 shows the IBM DS3400 Specify HBA Host Ports panel.
Figure 6-36 IBM DS3400 specify HBA host ports
291
Click Edit to open the Edit HBA Host Port panel, as shown in Figure 6-37.
Figure 6-37 IBM DS3400 storage manager specifying HBA host ports: Edit alias
Figure 6-38 shows the Edit HBA Host Port panel. Enter a meaningful alias for each of the WWPNs, such as V3700_Canister_Left_P1. See the previously defined SAN fabric aliases in Zoning: Define aliases on the SAN fabrics on page 286 to ensure that everything was added correctly.
Figure 6-38 IBM DS3400 edit HBA host port panel
After the four ports for the node canister with the meaningful aliases are added to the node canister host definition, click Next to continue. Figure 6-39 on page 293 shows the node canister WWPNs that are added to the host definition on the IBM DS3400 Specify HBA Host Ports panel.
292
Figure 6-39 IBM DS3400 specify HBA host ports
Select Yes to allow the host to share access with other hosts for the same logical drives. Ensure that the existing Host Group is selected and shows the previously defined V3700 host group. Click Next to continue. Figure 6-40 shows the IBM DS3400 Specify Host Group panel.
Figure 6-40 IBM DS3400 specify host group panel
293
A summary panel of the defined host and its associated host group is displayed. Cross-check and confirm the host definition summary, and then click Finish. Figure 6-41 shows the IBM DS3400 Confirm Host Definition panel.
Figure 6-41 IBM DS3400 Confirm Host Definition
A host definition must be created for the other node canister. This host definition must also be associated to the Host Group V3700. To configure the other node canister, complete the steps that are described in Creating IBM DS3400 hosts on page 289. The node canister Host definitions are logically contained in the V3700 Host Group. After both node canister hosts are created, confirm the host group configuration by reviewing the IBM DS3400 host topology tree. To access the host topology tree, use the IBM DS3400 storage manage and click the Modify tab and select Edit Host Topology. Figure 6-42 shows the IBM DS3400 Modify tab and the Edit Host Topology option.
Figure 6-42 IBM DS3400 modify tab: Edit host topology
294
Figure 6-43 shows the host topology of the defined V3700 Host Group with both of the IBM Storwize V3700 node canister hosts, as seen through the DS3400 Storage Manager software.
Figure 6-43 IBM DS3400 host group definition for the IBM Storwize V3700
For more information regarding the configuration of IBM DS3400, see the IBM Storwize V3700 Information Center for DS3400 configuration recommendations that are found at this website: http://pic.dhe.ibm.com/infocenter/storwize/v3700_ic/index.jsp?topic=%2Fcom.ibm.sto rwize.v3700.710.doc%2Fsvc_configdiskcontrollersovr_22n9uf.html Now that the environment is prepared, return to the IBM Storwize V3700 GUI step 2 of the storage migration wizard and click Next to continue to the next stage of the migration wizard, as shown in Figure 6-44 on page 296.
295
Figure 6-44 Step 3 of the storage migration wizard
Create a list of all external storage system volumes that are being migrated. Record the hosts that use each volume. Table 6-3 shows a list of the IBM DS3400 logical units that are to be migrated and the host that uses them.
Table 6-3 List of the IBM DS3400 logical units that are migrated and hosted LU Name Migration_1 Migration_2 Controller DS3400 DS3400 Array Array 1 Array 3 SCSI ID 0 1 Host name W2K8_FC W2K8_FC Capacity 50 GB 100 GB
Record the WWPNs that are associated with each host. The WWPNs that are associated to the host can be seen in Table 6-4 on page 297. It is also recommended to record the HBA firmware, HBA device driver version, adapter information, operating system, and V3700 multi-path software version, if possible.
296
Table 6-4 WWPNs associated to the host Host Name Adapter / Slot / Port WWPNs HBA F/W HBA Device Driver 9.1.9.25 Operating System V3700 Multipath Software SDDDSM 2.4.3.1-2
W2K8_FC
QLE2562 / 2 / 1 QLE2562 / 2 / 2
21000024FF2D0BE8 21000024FF2D0BE9
2.10
W2K8 R2 SP1
Unmap all volumes being migrated from the hosts in the storage system and map them to the host or host group that you created when your environment was prepared. Important: If you cannot restrict volume access to specific hosts by using the external storage system, all volumes on the system must be migrated.
Change IBM DS3400 LU mappings

The LUs that are being migrated are presented from the IBM DS3400 to the Windows 2008 host because of a mapping definition that was configured on the IBM DS3400. To modify the mapping definition so that the LUs are accessible only by the V3700 Host Group, a modify mapping operation must be completed on the IBM DS3400. To modify the mapping on the IBM DS3400, click the Modify tab and select Edit Host-to-Logical Drive Mappings, as shown in Figure 6-45.
Figure 6-45 IBM DS3400 storage manager Modify tab
Figure 6-46 shows the IBM DS3400 logical drives mapping information before the change.
Figure 6-46 IBM DS3400 Logical drives mapping information before changes
To modify the mapping definition so that the LUs are accessible only by the V3700 Host Group, select Change... to open the Change Mapping panel and modify the mapping. This step ensures that the LU cannot be accessed from the Windows 2008 Host. Figure 6-47 shows the Change... selection in Modify Mapping panel of the DS3400.
Figure 6-47 IBM DS3400 modify mapping panel: change mapping
297
Select Host Group V3700 in the menu and ensure that the Logical Unit Number (LUN) remains the same. Record the LUN number for later reference. Figure 6-48 shows the IBM DS3400 Change Mapping panel.
Figure 6-48 IBM DS3400 change mapping panel
Confirm the mapping change by selecting Yes, as shown in Figure 6-49.
Figure 6-49 Change mapping confirmation panel
Repeat the steps that are described in Change IBM DS3400 LU mappings on page 297 for each of the LUs that are to be migrated. Confirm that the Accessible By column now reflects the mapping changes. Figure 6-50 on page 299 shows both logical drives are now accessible by Host Group V3700 only.
298
Figure 6-50 iBM DS3400 storage manager Modify panel: edit host-to-logical drive mappings
Record the storage system LUN that is used to map each volume to this system. The LUNs that are used to map the logical drives remained unchanged and can be found in Table 6-3 on page 296. Now that step 3 of the storage migration wizard is complete, click Next to begin the Detect MDisks task. After the task is complete, click Close to move to the next step of the wizard. Figure 6-51 shows the Discover Devices task.
Figure 6-51 Discover devices task
The next step of the storage migration wizard is entitled Migrating MDisks, as shown in Figure 6-52 on page 300. The MDisk name is allocated depending on the order of device discovery; mdisk2 in this case is LUN 0 and mdisk3 is LUN 1. There is an opportunity to change the MDisk names to something more meaningful to the user in later steps.
299
Figure 6-52 Selecting MDisks for migration
Select the MDisks and click Next to begin the Import MDisks task. After the Import MDisks running task is complete (as shown in Figure 6-53), select Close to move to the next stage.
Figure 6-53 Import MDisks panel
300
The next stage of the storage migration wizard is entitled Configure Hosts, as shown in Figure 6-54.
Figure 6-54 Storage migration wizard: Create host
301
If the Windows 2008 host is not yet defined in the Storwize V3700, select New Host to open the Create Host panel, as shown in Figure 6-55. Enter a host name and select the WWPNs that were recorded earlier from the Fibre Channel ports menu. Select Add Port to List for each WWPN. If the host is already defined, select it and click Next to move on to the next stage of the migration a shown in Figure 6-58 on page 304.
Figure 6-55 Storwize V3700 create host panel: select WWPNs
Important: It is not mandatory to select the hosts now. The actual selection of the hosts occurs in the next step.
302
After all of the port definitions are added, click Create Host to start the Create Host running task. Figure 6-56 shows the Create Host panel with both of the required port definitions listed.
Figure 6-56 Create host panel: both port definitions listed
303
After the Create Host running task is complete, select Close (as shown in Figure 6-57) to return to data migration wizard.
Figure 6-57 Create Host running task panel
From the Configure Hosts stage of the data migration wizard, select the host that was configured and click Next, as shown in Figure 6-54 on page 301. The next step of the wizard is entitled Map Volumes to Hosts, as shown in Figure 6-58.
Figure 6-58 Storage migration wizard: Map Volumes
304
The name that is automatically given to the image mode volume includes the controller and the LUN information. At this stage, it is possible to rename the volumes to a more appropriate name. Highlight the volume and right-click or click Actions and select the rename option. After the new name is entered, click Rename from the Rename Volume panel to start the rename running task. Rename all volumes to be migrated. Figure 6-59 shows the Rename Volume panel.
Figure 6-59 Rename volume panel
After the final rename running task is complete, click Close (as shown in Figure 6-60) to return to the migration wizard.
Figure 6-60 Rename Volume running task
305
Highlight the two MDisks and select Map to Host to open the Modify Host Mappings panel. Figure 6-61 shows the storage migration wizard with the renamed MDisks highlighted for mapping.
Figure 6-61 Storage migration wizard: Renamed MDisks highlighted for mapping
Select the host from the menu on the Modify Host Mappings panel (as shown in Figure 6-62) and click Map Volumes. The rest of the Modify Host Mappings panel opens.
Figure 6-62 Modify host mappings panel
The MDisks that were highlighted are shown in yellow in the Modify Host Mappings panel. The yellow highlighting means that the volumes are not yet mapped to the host. Now is the time to edit the SCSI ID, if required. (In this case, it is not necessary.) Click Map Volumes to start the Modify Mappings task and map the volumes to the host. Figure 6-63 on page 307 shows the Modify Host Mappings panel.
306
Figure 6-63 Modify host mappings panel
After the Modify Mappings running task is complete, select Close (as shown in Figure 6-64) to return to the data migration wizard.
Figure 6-64 Modify Mappings running task
Confirm that the MDisks are now mapped by ensuring the Host Mappings column has a Yes listed for each MDisk, as shown in Figure 6-65 on page 308.
307
Figure 6-65 Storage migration wizard: MDisks mapped
Verify migrated disk device type is now 2145 on the host

Now the migrated volumes are mapped to the Storwize V3700 host definition. The host disk properties should show the disk device type as an IBM 2145 Multi-Path disk device. To confirm this information is accurate, right-click the disk to open the menu and select Properties, as shown in Figure 6-66.
Figure 6-66 Display the disk properties from the Windows 2008 disk migration panel
After the disk properties panel is opened, the General tab shows the disk device type. Figure 6-67 shows the Windows 2008 disk properties General tab.
308
Figure 6-67 Windows 2008 properties general tab
The Storwize V3700 SDDDSM can also be used to verify that the migrated disk device is connected correctly. For more information about running SDDDSM commands, see Chapter 4, Host configuration on page 151 and Chapter 5, Basic volume configuration on page 189. Use the SSDDSM output to verify that the expected number of devices, paths, and adapters are shown. From the storage migration wizard, click Next to open the next stage of the wizard entitled Select Storage Pool, as shown in Figure 6-68. In this section, you can optionally choose an internal storage pool in which to create the mirror volumes for the data migration task. If you do not choose a pool, the data migration can be carried out at a later date.
Figure 6-68 Storage migration wizard; select storage pool
309
Highlight an internal storage pool and click Next to begin the Start Migration task. After the Start Migration running task is complete, select Close (as shown in Figure 6-69 on page 310) to return to the storage migration wizard.
Figure 6-69 Start Migration completed task panel
Click Next (as shown in Figure 6-68 on page 309) to move to the final stage of the data migration wizard entitled Finish the Storage Migration Wizard and click Finish, as shown in Figure 6-70.
Figure 6-70 Storage migration wizard
310
The end of the storage migration wizard is not the end of the data migration. The System Migration panel opens, which shows the data migration in progress. A percentage indicator shows how far it has progressed, as shown in Figure 6-71.
Figure 6-71 System migration panel: Migration progress indicators
When the volume migrations are complete, select the volume migration instance and right-click Finalize to open the Finalize Volume Migrations panel. Figure 6-72 shows the System Migration panel with the completed migrations and the Finalize option.
Figure 6-72 System migration panel: Finalization
From the Finalize Volume Migrations panel, verify the volume names and the number of migrations and click OK, as shown in Figure 6-73.
Figure 6-73 Finalize volume migrations panel
311
The image mode volumes are deleted and the associated image mode MDisks are removed from the migration storage pool. The status of those image mode MDisks is unmanaged. When the finalization is done, the data migration to the IBM Storwize V3700 is complete. Remove the DS3400-to-V3700 zoning and retire the older storage system.
312
Chapter 7.
Storage pools
This chapter describes how IBM Storwize V3700 manages physical storage resources. All storage resources that are under IBM Storwize V3700 control are managed by using storage pools. Storage pools make it easy to dynamically allocate resources, maximize productivity, and reduce costs. This chapter includes the following topics: Configuration Working with internal drives Configuring internal storage Working with MDisks Working with Storage Pools
313
7.1 Configuration
Storage pools are configured through the Easy Setup wizard when the system is first installed, as described in Chapter 2, Initial configuration on page 27. All available drives are configured based on recommended configuration preset values for the RAID level and drive class. The recommended configuration uses all of the drives to build arrays that are protected with the appropriate number of spare drives. The management GUI also provides a set of presets to help you configure for different RAID types. You can tune storage configurations slightly, based on best practices. The presets vary according to how the drives are configured. Selections include the drive class, the preset from the list that is shown, whether to configure spares, whether to optimize for performance or capacity, and the number of drives to provision.
Default extent size: The IBM Storwize V3700 GUI has a default extent size value of 1GB when you define a new Storage Pool. This is a change in the IBM Storwize code v7.1 (prior versions of code used a default extent size of 256MB). The GUI does not have the option to change the extent size. Therefore, if you want to create Storage Pools with a different extent size, this must be done via the command-line interface (CLI) by using the mkmdiskgrp and mkarray commands.
314
7.2 Working with internal drives

This section describes how to configure the internal storage disk drives by using different RAID levels and optimization strategies. The IBM Storwize V3700 storage system provides an Internal Storage window for managing all internal drives. The Internal Storage window can be accessed by opening the Overview window, clicking the Internal Drives function icon, and then clicking Pools, as shown in Figure 7-1.
Figure 7-1 Internal Storage via Home Overview
Chapter 7. Storage pools
315
An alternative way to access the Internal Storage window is by clicking the Pools icon on the left side of the window, as shown in Figure 7-2.
Figure 7-2 Internal Storage Details via Pools icon
7.2.1 Internal storage window

The Internal Storage window (as shown in Figure 7-3) shows an overview of the internal drives that are installed in the IBM Storwize V3700 storage system. Selecting All Internal in the Drive Class Filter shows all of the drives that are installed in the managed system, including attached expansion enclosures. Alternatively, you can filter the drives by their type or class; for example, you can choose to show only SAS, SATA, or SSD drives.
Figure 7-3 Internal storage window
316
On the right side of the Internal Storage window, the internal disk drives of the selected type are listed. By default, the following information also is listed: Logical drive ID Drives capacity Current type of use (unused, candidate, member, spare, or failed) Status (online, offline, and degraded) MDisks name that the drive is a member of Enclosure ID that it is installed in Physical Drive Slot ID of the enclosure that it is installed in Default sort order is by enclosure ID, but this default can be changed to any other column by left-clicking the column header. To toggle between ascending and descending sort order, left-click the column header again. More details can be shown (for example, the drives RPM speed or its MDisk member ID) by right-clicking the blue header bar of the table, which opens the selection panel, as shown in Figure 7-4.
Figure 7-4 Internal storage window details selection
In addition, you can find the internal storage capacity allocation indicator in the upper right. The Total Capacity shows the overall capacity of the internal storage that is installed in this IBM Storwize V3700 storage system. The MDisk Capacity shows the internal storage capacity that is assigned to the MDisks. The Spare Capacity shows the internal storage capacity that is used for hot spare disks.
317
The percentage bar that is shown in Figure 7-5 indicates how much capacity is allocated.
Figure 7-5 Internal storage allocation indicator
7.2.2 Actions on internal drives

There are a few actions that can be performed on internal drives when you select the drive and right-click it or click the Actions drop-down menu, as shown in Figure 7-6.
Figure 7-6 Internal drive actions menu
Fix Error
The Fix Error action starts the Directed Maintenance Procedure (DMP) for a defective drive. For more information, see Chapter 11, RAS, monitoring, and troubleshooting on page 543.
Take Drive Offline

The internal drives can be taken offline when there are problems on the drives. A confirmation window opens, as shown in Figure 7-7 on page 319.
318
Figure 7-7 Take internal drive offline warning
A drive must be taken offline only if a spare drive is available. If the drive fails (as shown in Figure 7-8), the MDisk of which the failed drive is a member remains online and a hot spare is automatically reassigned.
Figure 7-8 Internal drive taken offline
If no sufficient spare drives are available and one drive must be taken offline, the second option for no redundancy must be selected. This option results in a degraded MDisk, as shown in Figure 7-9.
Figure 7-9 Internal drive that is failed with MDisk degraded
319
The IBM Storwize V3700 storage system prevents the drive from being taken offline if there might be data loss as a result. A drive cannot be taken offline (as shown in Figure 7-10) if no suitable spare drives are available and, based on the RAID level of the MDisk, drives are already offline.
Figure 7-10 Internal drive offline not allowed because of insufficient redundancy
Example 7-1 shows how to use the chdrive command to set the drive to failed.
Example 7-1 The use of the chdrive command to set drive to failed
chdrive -use failed driveID chdrive -use failed -allowdegraded driveID
Mark as...
The internal drives in the IBM Storwize V3700 storage system can be assigned to several usage roles, which can be unused, candidate, or spare, as shown in Figure 7-11 on page 321. The roles have the following meanings: Unused: The drive is not in use and cannot be used as a spare. Candidate: The drive is available for use in an array. Spare: The drive can be used as a hot spare, if required.
320
Figure 7-11 Internal drive mark as option
The new role that can be assigned depends on the current drive usage role. Figure 7-12 shows these dependencies.
Figure 7-12 Internal drive usage role table
Identify
Use the Identify action to turn on the LED light so that you can easily identify a drive that must be replaced or that you want to troubleshoot. The panel that is shown in Figure 7-13 on page 322 appears when the LED is on.
321
Figure 7-13 Internal drive identification
Click Turn LED Off when you are finished. Example 7-2 shows how to use the chenclosureslot command to turn on and off the drive LED.
Example 7-2 The use of the chenclosureslot command to turn on and off drive LED
chenclosureslot -identify yes/no -slot slot enclosureID
Show Dependent Volumes

Clicking Show Dependent Volumes shows you volumes that are dependent on the selected drive. Volumes are dependent on a drive only when the underlying disks or MDisks are in a degraded or inaccessible state and removing further hardware causes the volume to go offline. This condition is true for any RAID 0 MDisk or if the associated MDisk is degraded already. Important: A lack of listed dependent volumes does not imply that there are no volumes that were created by using this drive. Figure 7-14 shows an example if no dependent volumes are detected for this specific drive.
Figure 7-14 Internal drive no dependent volume
322
Figure 7-15 shows the list of dependent volumes for a drive when its underlying MDisk is in a degraded state.
Figure 7-15 Internal drive with dependent volume
Example 7-3 shows how to view dependent volumes for a specific drive by using the CLI.
Example 7-3 Command to view dependent vdisks for a specific drive
lsdependentvdisks -drive driveID
Properties
Clicking Properties (as shown in Figure 7-16 on page 324) in the Actions menu or double-clicking the drive provides the VPD and the configuration information. The Show Details option was selected to show more details.
323
Figure 7-16 Internal drives properties part1
If the Show Details option is not selected, the technical information section is reduced, as shown in Figure 7-17.
Figure 7-17 Internal drives properties no details
A tab for the Drive Slot is available in the Properties panel (as shown in Figure 7-18) to show specific information about the slot of the selected drive.
324
Figure 7-18 Internal drive properties slot
Example 7-4 shows how to use the lsdrive command to display configuration information and drive VPD.
Example 7-4 The use of the lsdrive command to display configuration information and drive VPD
lsdrive driveID
325
7.3 Configuring internal storage

The complete internal storage of an IBM Storwize V3700 can be configured into MDisks and pools by using the system setup wizard during the initial configuration. For more information, see Chapter 2, Initial configuration on page 27. The decision that is shown in Figure 7-19 must be made when configuring a IBM Storwize V3700.
Figure 7-19 Decision to customize storage configuration
The decision choices include the following considerations: Use initial configuration During system setup, all available drives can be configured based on the RAID configuration presets. The initial setup creates MDisks and pools but does not create volumes. If this automated configuration fits your business requirement, it is recommended that this configuration is used. Customize storage configuration A storage configuration might be customized for the following reasons: The automated initial configuration does not meet customer requirements. More storage was attached to the IBM Storwize V3700 and must be integrated into the existing configuration.
7.3.1 RAID configuration presets

RAID configuration presets are used to configure internal drives that are based on recommended values for the RAID level and drive class. Each preset has a specific goal for the number of drives per array and the number of spare drives to maintain redundancy. Table 7-1 on page 327 describes the presets that are used for solid-state drives (SSDs) for the IBM Storwize V3700 storage system.
326
Table 7-1 SSD RAID presets Preset SSD RAID 5 Purpose Protects against a single drive failure. Data and one stripe of parity are striped across all array members. Protects against two drive failures. Data and two stripes of parity are striped across all array members. Protects against at least one drive failure. All data is mirrored on two array members. Protects against at least one drive failure. All data is mirrored on two array members. Provides no protection against drive failures. Mirrors data to protect against drive failure. The mirrored pairs are spread between storage pools to be used for the Easy Tier function. RAID level 5 Drives per array goal 8 Drive count (Min - Max) 3 - 16 Spare drive goal 1
SSD RAID 6
12
5 - 16
SSD RAID 10
10
2 - 16 (even)
SSD RAID 1
SSD RAID 0 SSD Easy Tier
0 10
8 2
1-8 2 - 16 (even)
0 1
Table 7-2 describes the RAID presets that are used for hard disk drives (HDDs) for the IBM Storwize V3700 storage system.
Table 7-2 HDD RAID presets Preset Purpose RAID level 5 Drives per array goal 8 Drive count (Min - Max) 3 - 16 Spare goal 1
Basic RAID 5
Protects against a single drive failure. Data and one stripe of parity are striped across all array members. Protects against two drive failures. Data and two stripes of parity are striped across all array members. Protects against at least one drive failure. All data is mirrored on two array members. Protects against at least one drive or enclosure failure. All data is mirrored on two array members. The mirrors are balanced across the two enclosure chains. Provides no protection against drive failures.
Basic RAID 6
12
5 - 16
Basic RAID 10 Balanced RAID 10
10
2 - 16 (evens) 2 - 16 (evens)
10
RAID 0
1-8
327
7.3.2 Customize initial storage configuration

If the initial storage configuration does not meet the requirements, pools must be deleted. Select the Pool navigator in the GUI and click Pools MDisks by Pools. Select the pool, right-click the pool, and select Delete Pool, as shown in Figure 7-20.
Figure 7-20 Delete selected pool
The option for deleting the Volumes, Mappings and MDisks must be selected so that all associated drives are marked as a candidate for deletion, as shown in Figure 7-21.
Figure 7-21 Delete pool confirmation
These drives now can be used for a different configuration. Important: When a pool is deleted, data that is contained within any volume that is provisioned from this pool is deleted.
328
7.3.3 Create new MDisk and pool

To configure internal storage, click Pools Internal Storage and click Configure Storage, as shown in Figure 7-22.
Figure 7-22 Click Configure Storage
A configuration wizard opens and guides you through the process of configuring internal storage. The wizard shows all internal drives, their status, and their use. The status shows whether it is Online, Offline or Degraded. The Use will show if a drive is Unused, a Candidate for configuration, a Spare, a Member of a current configuration, or Failed. Figure 7-23 shows an example in which 67 drives are available for configuration.
Figure 7-23 Available drives for new MDisk
329
If there are internal drives with a status of unused, a window opens, which gives the option to include them in the RAID configuration, as shown in Figure 7-24.
Figure 7-24 Unused drives warning
When the decision is made to include the drives into the RAID configuration, their status is set to Candidate, which also makes them available for a new MDisk. The use of the storage configuration wizard simplifies the initial disk drive setup and offers the following options: Use the recommended configuration Select a different configuration Selecting Use the recommended configuration guides you through the wizard that is described in Using the recommended configuration on page 330. Selecting Select a different configuration uses the wizard that is described in Selecting a different configuration on page 333.
7.3.4 Using the recommended configuration

As shown in Figure 7-25, when you click Use the recommended configuration, the wizard offers a recommended storage configuration at the bottom of the window.
Figure 7-25 The recommended configuration
330
The following recommended RAID presets for different drive classes are available: SSD EasyTier or RAID 1 for SSDs Basic RAID 5 for SAS drives and SSD drives Basic RAID 6 for Nearline SAS drives Figure 7-25 on page 330 shows a sample configuration with 1x SSD and 14x SAS drives. The Configuration Summary shows a warning that there are insufficient SSDs installed to satisfy the RAID 1 SSD preset, as two drives are required to do this, plus a third drive for a hot spare. By using the recommended configuration, spare drives also are automatically created to meet the spare goals according to the preset that is chosen. One spare drive is created out of every 24 disk drives of the same drive class. Spares are not created if sufficient spares are already configured. Spare drives in the IBM Storwize V3700 are global spares, which means that any spare drive that has at least the same capacity as the drive to be replaced can be used in any array. Thus, an SSD array with no SSD spare available uses an HDD spare instead. If the proposed configuration meets your requirements, click Finish, and the system automatically creates the array MDisks with a size according to the chosen RAID level. Storage pools also are automatically created to contain the MDisks with similar performance characteristics, including the consideration of RAID level, number of member drives, and drive class. Important: This option adds new MDisks to an existing storage pool when the characteristics match. If this is not what is required, the Select different configuration option should be used. After an array is created, the Array MDisk members are synchronized with each other through a background initialization process. The progress of the initialization process can be monitored by clicking the icon at the left of the Running Tasks status bar and selecting the initialization task to view the status, as shown in Figure 7-26 on page 332.
331
Figure 7-26 Running task panel
Click the taskbar to open the progress window, as shown in Figure 7-27. The array is available for I/O during this process. The initialization does not affect the availability because of possible member drive failures.
Figure 7-27 Initialization progress view
332
7.3.5 Selecting a different configuration

The option Select a different configuration offers a more flexible way to configure the internal storage as compared to the Use the recommended configuration preset in terms of drive selection, RAID level, and storage pool to be used. Only one drive class (RAID configuration) can be allocated at a time. Complete the following steps to select a different configuration: 1. Choose drive class and RAID preset. The drive class selection list contains each drive class that is available for configuration, as shown in Figure 7-28.
Figure 7-28 Select drive class for new configuration
2. Click Next and Select the appropriated RAID preset, as shown in Figure 7-29 on page 334.
333
Figure 7-29 Select the RAID preset
3. Define the RAID attributes. You can slightly tune RAID configurations based on best practices. Selections include the configuration of spares, optimization for performance, optimization for capacity, and the number of drives to provision. Each IBM Storwize V3700 preset has a specific goal for the number of drives per array. For more information, see the Information Center at this website: http://pic.dhe.ibm.com/infocenter/storwize/v3700_ic/index.jsp Table 7-3 shows the RAID goal widths.
Table 7-3 RAID goal width RAID level 0 5 6 10 HDD goal width 8 8 12 8 SSD goal width 8 9 10 8
Optimizing for Performance creates arrays with same capacity and performance characteristics. The RAID goal width (as shown in Table 7-3) must be met for this target. In a performance optimized setup, the IBM Storwize V3700 provisions eight physical disk drives in a single array MDisk, except for the following situations: RAID 6 uses 12 disk drives. SSD Easy Tier uses two disk drives. Therefore, creating an Optimized for Performance configuration is only possible if there is a sufficient number of drives available to match your needs.
334
As a consequence, all arrays with similar physical disks feature the same performance characteristics. Because of the defined presets, this setup might leave drives unused. The remaining unconfigured drives can be used in another array. Figure 7-30 shows an example in which not all of the provisioned drives can be used in a performance optimized configuration. Six drives remain.
Figure 7-30 Optimization for performance failed
Figure 7-31 shows that the number of drives is not enough to satisfy the needs of the configuration.
Figure 7-31 Less drive for performance optimization
Figure 7-32 shows that there are a suitable number of drives to configure performance optimized arrays.
335
Figure 7-32 Arrays match performance goals
Four RAID 5 were built and all provisioned drives are used. Optimizing for capacity creates arrays that allocate all the drives specified in the Number of drives to provision field. This option results in arrays of different capacities and performance. The number of drives in each MDisk does not vary by more than one drive, as shown in Figure 7-33.
Figure 7-33 Capacity optimized configuration
336
4. Storage pool assignment. Choose whether an existing pool must be expanded or whether a new pool is created for the configuration, as shown in Figure 7-34.
Figure 7-34 Storage pool selection
Complete the following steps to expand or create a pool: a. Expand an existing pool. When an existing pool is to be expanded, you can select an existing storage pool that does not contain MDisks or a pool that contains MDisks with the same performance characteristics, which are listed automatically as shown in Figure 7-35.
Figure 7-35 List of matching storage pool
337
b. Create a pool. Alternatively, a storage pool is created by enter the required name, as shown in Figure 7-36.
Figure 7-36 Create new pool
All drives are initialized when the configuration wizard is finished.
7.4 Working with MDisks

After the configuration is complete for the internal storage, you can find the MDisks that were created on the internal arrays in the MDisks by Pools window. You can access the MDisks window by clicking Home Overview and then clicking the MDisks function icon. In the extended help information window, click Pools, as shown in Figure 7-37 on page 339.
338
Figure 7-37 MDisk from Overview window
An alternative way to access the MDisks window is by using the Pools function icon and selecting MDisks by Pools, as shown in Figure 7-38.
Figure 7-38 MDisk from Physical Storage icon
339
7.4.1 MDisk by Pools panel

The MDisks by Pools panel (as shown in Figure 7-39) displays information about each of the Pools and their associated MDisks.
Figure 7-39 MDisk by Pool window
The following default information is provided: Name The MDisk or the Storage Pool name that is provided during the configuration process. ID The MDisk or Storage Pool ID that is automatically assigned during the configuration process. Status The status of the MDisk and Storage Pool. The following statuses are possible: Online All MDisks are online and performing optimally. Degraded One MDisk is in degraded state (for example, missing SAS connection to enclosure of member drives or a failed drive with no spare available). As shown in Figure 7-40, the pool also is degraded.
Figure 7-40 One degraded MDisk in pool
340
Offline One or more MDisks in a pool are offline. The pool (Pool3) also changes to offline, as shown in Figure 7-41.
Figure 7-41 Offline MDisk in a pool
Capacity The capacity of the MDisk. For the Storage Pool, the capacity is shown, which is the total of all the MDisks in this pool. The usage of the Storage Pool is represented by a bar and the number. Mode The mode of the MDisk. The following modes are available in the IBM Storwize V3700: Array The MDisk represents a set of drives from internal storage that is managed together by using RAID. Image/unmanaged This status is an intermediate status of the migration process and is described in Chapter 6, Storage migration wizard on page 261. Storage Pool The name of the Storage Pool to which the MDisk belongs. The CLI command lsmdiskgrp (as shown in Example 7-5) returns a concise list or a detailed view of the storage pools that are visible to the system.
Example 7-5 CLI command lsmdiskgrp
lsmdiskgrp lsmdiskgrp mdiskgrpID
7.4.2 RAID action for MDisks

Internal drives in the IBM Storwize V3700 are managed as Array mode MDisks, on which several RAID actions can be performed. Select the appropriate Array MDisk by clicking Pools MDisks by Pools, and then click Actions RAID Actions, as shown in Figure 7-42 on page 342.
341
Figure 7-42 MDisk RAID actions
You can choose the following RAID actions: Set Spare Goal Figure 7-43 shows how to set the number of spare drives that are required to protect the array from drive failures.
Figure 7-43 MDisk set spare goal
The alternative CLI command is shown in Example 7-6.

Example 7-6 CLI command to set spares
charray -sparegoal mdiskID goal If the number of drives that are assigned as Spare does not meet the configured spare goal, an error is logged in the event log that reads: Array MDisk is not protected by sufficient spares. This error can be fixed by adding drives as spare. During the internal drive configuration, spare drives are automatically assigned according to the chosen RAID presets spare goals, as described in 7.3, Configuring internal storage on page 326. Swap Drive The Swap Drive action can be used to replace a drive in the array with another drive with the status of Candidate or Spare. This action is used to replace a drive that failed, or is expected to fail soon; for example, as indicated by an error message in the event log.
342
Select an MDisk that contains the drive to be replaced and click RAID Actions Swap Drive. In the Swap Drive window, select the member drive that is replaced (as shown in Figure 7-44) and click Next.
Figure 7-44 MDisk swap drive: Step 1
In step 2 (as shown as Figure 7-45), a list of suitable drives is presented. One drive must be selected to swap into the MDisk. Click Finish.
Figure 7-45 MDisk swap drive pool step 2
343
The exchange process starts and runs in the background, and the volumes on the affected MDisk remain accessible. If for any reason the GUI process is not used, the CLI command in Example 7-7 can be run.
Example 7-7 CLI command to swap drives
charraymember -balanced -member oldDriveID -newdrive newDriveID mdiskID Delete An Array MDisk can be deleted by clicking RAID Actions Delete. To select more than one MDisk, use Ctrl+left-mouse click. A confirmation is required (as shown in Figure 7-46) by entering the correct number of MDisks to be deleted. You must confirm the number of MDisks that you want to delete. If there is data on the MDisk, it can be deleted only by tagging the option Delete the RAID array MDisk even if it has data on it. The system migrates the data to other MDisks in the pool.
Figure 7-46 MDisk delete confirmation
Data that is on MDisks is migrated to other MDisks in the pool, assuming enough space is available on the remaining MDisks in the pool. Available capacity: Make sure that you have enough available capacity that is left in the storage pool for the data on the MDisks to be removed. After an MDisk is deleted from a pool, its former member drives return to candidate mode. The alternative CLI command to delete MDisks is shown in Example 7-8.
Example 7-8 CLI command to delete MDisk
rmmdisk -mdisk list -force mdiskgrpID If all the MDisks of a storage pool were deleted, the pool remains as an empty pool with 0 bytes of capacity, as shown in Figure 7-47.
344
Figure 7-47 Empty storage pool after MDisk deletion
7.4.3 Other actions on MDisks

Some of the other actions are available by clicking MDisk by Pool Actions, as shown in Figure 7-48.
Figure 7-48 MDisk actions
Rename
MDisks can be renamed by selecting the MDisk and clicking Rename from the Actions menu. Enter the new name of your MDisk (as shown in Figure 7-49) and click Rename.
Figure 7-49 Rename MDisk
Show Dependent Volumes

Figure 7-50 on page 346 shows the volumes dependent on an MDisk and can be displayed by selecting the MDisk and clicking Show Dependent Volumes from the Actions menu. The volumes are listed with general information.
345
Figure 7-50 Show dependent Volumes
Properties
The Properties action for an MDisk shows the information that you need to identify it. In the MDisks by Pools window, select the MDisk and click Properties from the Actions menu. The following tabs are available in this window: The Overview tab (as shown in Figure ) contains information about the MDisk. To show more details, click Show Details.
Figure 7-51 MDisk properties overview
346
The Dependent Volumes tab (as shown in Figure 7-52) lists all of volumes that use extents on this MDisk.
Figure 7-52 MDisk dependent volumes
In the Member Drives tab (as shown in Figure 7-53), you find all of the member drives of this MDisk. Also, all actions that are described in 7.2.2, Actions on internal drives on page 318 can be performed on the drives that are listed here.
Figure 7-53 MDisk properties member
347
7.5 Working with Storage Pools

Storage pools act as a container for MDisks and provision the capacity to volumes. IBM Storwize V3700 organizes storage in Storage Pools to ease storage management and make it more efficient. Storage pools and MDisks are managed via the MDisks by Pools window. You can access the MDisks by Pools window by clicking Home Overview and then clicking the Pools icon. Extended help information for storage pools is displayed. If you click Visit Pools, the MDisks by Pools window opens, as shown in Figure 7-54.
Figure 7-54 Pools from the overview window
348
An alternative path to the Pools window is to click Pools MDisks by Pools, as shown in Figure 7-55.
Figure 7-55 Pools from MDisk by pool window
The MDisk by Pools window (as shown in Figure 7-56) allows you to manage storage pools. All existing storage pools are displayed by row. The first row contains the item Not in a Pool, if any exist. Each defined storage pool is displayed with its assigned icon and name, numerical ID, status, and a graphical indicator that shows that the ratio the pools capacity is allocated to volumes.
Figure 7-56 Pool window
When you expand a pools entry by clicking the plus sign (+) to the left of the pools icon, you can access the MDisks that are associated with this pool. You can perform all actions on them, as described in 7.4, Working with MDisks on page 338.
349
7.5.1 Create Pool

New storage pools are built when an MDisk is created, if this MDisk is not attached to an existing pool. To create an empty pool, click the New Pool option in the pool window. The only required parameter for the pool is the pool name, as shown in Figure 7-57.
Figure 7-57 Create Pool name
The new pool is listed in the pool list with 0 bytes, as shown in Figure 7-58.
Figure 7-58 Empty pool that is created
7.5.2 Actions on storage pools

A few actions can be performed on storage pools by using the Actions menu, as shown in Figure 7-59. A pool can be renamed, its icon can be changed, and it can be deleted.
Figure 7-59 Pool action overview
350
Change storage pool icon

There are different storage pool icons that are available, as shown in Figure 7-60. These icons can be used to differentiate between different storage tiers or types of drives.
Figure 7-60 Change storage pool icon
Rename storage pool

The storage pool can be renamed at any time, as shown in Figure 7-61.
Figure 7-61 Rename Storage Pool
351
Deleting a storage pool

Pools can be deleted only if there are no MDisks or volumes assigned to it. A confirmation panel (as shown in Figure 7-62) is shown to confirm that all associated MDisk and volumes can be deleted with the pool.
Figure 7-62 Confirmation to delete the storage pool
If it is safe to delete the pool, the option must be selected. Important: After you delete the pool, all data that is stored in the pool is lost except for the image mode MDisks; their volume definition is deleted, but the data on the imported MDisk remains untouched. After you delete the pool, all the associated volumes and their host mappings are removed. All the array mode MDisks in the pool are removed and all the member drives return to candidate status.
352
Chapter 8.
Advanced host and volume administration

The IBM Storwize V3700 offers many functions for volume and host configuration. In Chapter 4, Host configuration on page 151 and Chapter 5, Basic volume configuration on page 189, the basic host and volume features of IBM Storwize V3700 are described. Those chapters also describe how to create hosts and volumes and how to map them to a host. This chapter contains the following topics: Advanced host administration Adding and deleting host ports Host mappings overview Advanced volume administration Volume properties Advanced volume copy functions Volumes by Storage Pool Volumes by Host feature
353
8.1 Advanced host administration

This section describes host administration, including such topics as host modification, host mappings, and deleting hosts. Basic host creation and mapping are described in Chapter 4, Host configuration on page 151. It is assumed that you created some hosts and that some volumes are mapped to them. Figure 8-1 shows the IBM Storwize V3700 GUI for hosts menu.
Figure 8-1 Host menu
354
If you click Hosts, the Hosts window opens, as shown in Figure 8-2.
Figure 8-2 Hosts window
As you can see in Figure 8-2, a few hosts are created and there are volumes mapped to all of them. These hosts are used to show all the possible modifications. If you highlight a host, you can click Action (as shown in Figure 8-3 on page 356) or right-click the host to see all of the available tasks. Important: Fibre Channel over Ethernet hosts are listed as FC Hosts.
Chapter 8. Advanced host and volume administration
355
Figure 8-3 Host menu options
As figure Figure 8-3 shows, there are a number of tasks that are related to host mapping. For more information, see sections 8.1.1, Modifying Mappings menu and 8.1.2, Unmapping volumes from a host on page 360.
8.1.1 Modifying Mappings menu

From the host window, highlight a host and select Modify Mappings (as shown in Figure 8-3). The Modify Host Mappings window opens, as shown in Figure 8-4 on page 357.
356
Figure 8-4 Host mappings window
At the upper left, there is a drop-down menu that shows the host you selected. By selecting the host from this menu, IBM Storwize V3700 lists the volumes that are ready to be mapped to the chosen host. The left panel shows the volumes that are already mapped to this host. In our example, a single volume with SCSI ID 0 is mapped to the host Host_02, and nine more volumes are available. Important: The unmapped volumes panel refers to volumes that are not mapped to the chosen host.
357
Figure 8-5 Modify Host Mappings
To map a volume, highlight the volume in the left pane (as shown in Figure 8-5), and select the upper arrow (pointing to the right) to move the volume from pane to pane. The changes are marked in yellow and now the Map Volumes and Apply buttons are enabled, as shown in Figure 8-6.
358
If you click Map Volumes, the changes are applied (as shown in Figure 8-7) and the Modify Mappings window shows the task completed successfully.
Figure 8-7 Modify Mappings: The task completed
After you click Close, the Modify Host Window closes. If you clicked Apply, the changes are submitted to the system, but the Modify Host window remains open for further changes. You can now choose to modify another host by selecting it from the Hosts drop-down menu or continue working with the host that is already selected. As shown in Figure 8-8, we switched to a different host.
Figure 8-8 Selecting another host to modify
359
Highlight the volume that you want to modify again and click the right arrow button to move it to the right pane. If you right-click in the yellow unmapped volume, you can change the SCSI ID, which is used for the host mapping, as shown in Figure 8-9.
Figure 8-9 Editing iSCSI ID
Click Edit SCSI ID and then click OK to change the SCSI ID. Click Apply to submit the changes and complete the host volume mapping. Important: IBM Storwize V3700 automatically assigns the lowest available SCSI ID if none is specified. However, you can set a SCSI ID for the volume. The SCSI ID cannot be changed while volume is assigned to host. If you want to remove a host mapping, the required steps are the same. For more information about Unmapping Volumes, see 8.1.2, Unmapping volumes from a host.
8.1.2 Unmapping volumes from a host

If you want to remove host access to certain volumes on your IBM Storwize V3700, you select the volumes by pressing and holding the Ctrl key and highlighting the volumes, as shown in Figure 8-10 on page 361.
360
Figure 8-10 Unmapping certain volumes
If you want to remove access to all volumes in your IBM Storwize V3700 from a host, you can do it by highlighting the host from Hosts window and clicking Unmap all Volumes from the Actions menu, as shown in Figure 8-11.
Figure 8-11 Unmap all volumes
361
You are prompted to confirm the number of mappings you want to remove. Enter the number of mappings and click Unmap. In our example, we remove two mappings. Figure 8-12 shows the unmap from host Host_01.
Figure 8-12 Enter the number of mappings to be removed
Unmapping: By clicking Unmap, all access for this host to volumes that are controlled by IBM Storwize V3700 system is removed. Ensure that you run the required procedures in your host operating system before the unmapping procedure. The changes are applied to the system, as shown in Figure 8-13. Click Close after you review the output.
Figure 8-13 Unmapping all volumes from host
362
Figure 8-14 shows that the host Host_01 no longer has any volume mappings.
Figure 8-14 Host mapping
8.1.3 Duplicate Mappings option

To duplicate host mappings in the IBM Storwize V3700, highlight the host you want to use as a source and click Duplicate Mappings, as shown in Figure 8-15.
Figure 8-15 Duplicate Mappings
363
You are prompted to select the target host that you want to duplicate the volume mappings on to as shown in Figure 8-16.
Figure 8-16 Target host to duplicate the mappings
Click Duplicate and then Close to return to Hosts window. Important: Always check the Operating System capabilities and requirements before duplicating volume mappings.
8.1.4 Renaming a host

To rename a host object in the IBM Storwize V3700, highlight the host from the Hosts window and click Rename, as shown in Figure 8-17.
Figure 8-17 Renaming a host
364
Enter a new name and click Rename, as shown in Figure 8-18. If you click Reset, your changes are not saved and the host retains its original name.
Figure 8-18 Renaming a host window
After the changes are applied to the system, click Close from the task window, as shown in Figure 8-19.
Figure 8-19 Rename a host task completed
365
8.1.5 Deleting a host

To delete a host, browse to the Hosts window, highlight the host and click Delete, as shown in Figure 8-20.
Figure 8-20 Deleting a host
You are prompted to confirm the number of hosts you want to delete then click Delete, as shown in Figure 8-21.
Figure 8-21 Deleting a host
If you want to delete a host with volumes assigned, you must force the deletion by selecting the option in the lower part of the window, as shown in Figure 8-21. If you select this option, the host is completely removed from the IBM Storwize V3700. After the task is complete, click Close (as shown in Figure 8-22 on page 367) to return to the mappings window.
366
Figure 8-22 Delete host task completed
8.1.6 Host properties

This section covers the host properties. Relevant host information can be found through the next steps. The Host Properties window gives you an overview of your host from the following tabs: Overview Mapped Volumes Port Definitions To open the Host Properties window, highlight the host and from the Action drop-down menu, click Properties. You also can highlight the host and right-click it, as shown in Figure 8-23.
Figure 8-23 Opening host properties
367
In the following example, we selected the host Host_01 to show the host properties information. When the Overview tab opens, select Show Details in left bottom of the window to see more information about the host, as shown in Figure 8-24.
Figure 8-24 Host detail information
This tab provides the following information: Host Name: Host object name. Host ID: Host object identification number. Status: The current host object status; it can be Online, Offline or Degraded. # of FC: Shows the number of host Fibre Channel or FCoE ports that IBM Storwize V3700 can see. # of iSCSI Ports: Shows the number of host iSCSI name or host IQN ID. # of SAS Ports: Shows the number of host SAS ports that are connected to IBM Storwize V3700. iSCSI CHAP Secret: Shows the Challenge Handshake Authentication Protocol (CHAP) information if it exists or is configured.
368
To change the host properties, click Edit and several fields can be edited, as shown in Figure 8-25.
Figure 8-25 Host properties: Editing host information
The following changes can be made: Host Name: Change the host name. Host Type: Change this setting if you are intending to change host type to HP/UX, OpenVMS, or TPGS hosts. iSCSI CHAP Secret: Enter or change the iSCSI CHAP secret for this host. Make any changes necessary and click Save to apply them. Click Close to return to the Host Properties window. The Mapped Volume tab (as shown in Figure 8-26 on page 370) gives you an overview of which volumes are mapped to this host. The details shown are SCSI ID, volume name, UID (volume ID) and the Caching I/O Group ID per volume. Important: Only a single I/O Group is allowed in IBM Storwize V3700 cluster. Selecting the Show Details option does not show any detailed information.
369
Figure 8-26 Host Details: mapped volumes information
The Port Definitions tab (as shown in Figure 8-27) shows the configured host ports and provides status information about them. It also shows the WWPN numbers (for SAS and FC hosts) and the IQN (iSCSI Qualified Name) for iSCSI hosts. The Type column shows the port type information and the # Nodes Logged In column lists the number of IBM Storwize V3700 node canisters that each port (initiator port) has logged on to.
Figure 8-27 Host port details
370
By using this window, you can also Add and Delete Host Port (or ports), as described in 8.2, Adding and deleting host ports. The Show Details option does not show any other information. Click Close to close the Host Properties section.
8.2 Adding and deleting host ports

To configure host ports, use the IBM Storwize V3700 GUI by clicking Host Ports by Host window, as shown in Figure 8-28.
Figure 8-28 Ports by Host
Hosts are listed in the left pane of the window, as shown in Figure 8-29 on page 372. The function icons show an orange cable for Fibre Channel and FCoE hosts, black for SAS hosts, and a blue cable for iSCSI hosts. The properties of the highlighted host are shown in the right pane. If you click New Host, the wizard that is described in Chapter 4, Host configuration on page 151 starts. If you click the Action drop-down menu (as shown in Figure 8-29 on page 372), the tasks that are described in the previous sections can be started from this location.
371
Figure 8-29 Host action menu
8.2.1 Adding a host port

To add a host port, highlight the host from left side panel, click Add, and choose a Fibre Channel, SAS, or an iSCSI port, as shown in Figure 8-30.
Figure 8-30 Adding a host port
Important: A host system can have a mix of Fibre Channel, iSCSI, and SAS connections. If you must mix protocols, check your Operating System capabilities and plan carefully to avoid miscommunication or data loss.
372
8.2.2 Adding a Fibre Channel port

As shown in Figure 8-30 on page 372, click Fibre Channel Port and the Add Fibre Channel Ports window opens. If you click the Fibre Channel Ports drop-down menu, you see a list of all known Fibre Channel host ports that are available. If the worldwide port name (WWPN) of your host is not available in the menu, check your SAN zoning and rescan the SAN from the host. You can also try to rescan by clicking Rescan. Select the WWPN to add and click Add Port to List. Figure 8-31 shows the new port added to the list. It is possible to repeat this step to add more ports to a host. If you want to add an offline port, manually enter the WWPN of the port into the Fibre Channel Ports field and click Add Port to List, as shown in Figure 8-31.
Figure 8-31 Adding offline port
The port appears as unverified because it is not logged on to the IBM Storwize V3700. The first time the port logs on, the state changes to online automatically and the mapping is applied to this port. To remove one of the ports from the list, click the red X next to it. In Figure 8-31, we manually added an FC port. Important: If you are removing either online/offline ports, IBM Storwize V3700 prompts you to add the number of ports you want to delete but does not warn you about mappings. Disk mapping is associated to the host object and LUN access is obviously lost if all ports are deleted. Click Add Ports to Host and the changes are applied. Figure 8-32 on page 374 shows the output after ports are added to the host. Even if it is an offline port, the IBM Storwize V3700 still add it.
373
Figure 8-32 Adding a host port
8.2.3 Adding a SAS host port

As shown in Figure 8-30 on page 372, from the IBM Storwize V3700 GUI, click Host Port by Host and then Add SAS Port to add a SAS host port to an existing host. The Add SAS Host Port window opens. If you click the SAS Ports drop-down menu, you see a list of all known SAS Ports that are connected to IBM Storwize V3700. If SAS WWPNs are unavailable, click Rescan or check the physical connection (or connections).
Important: IBM Storwize V3700 allows the addition of an offline SAS port. Enter the SAS WWPN in the SAS Port field and then click Add Port to List.
Select the SAS WWPN you want to add to the existing host and click Add Port to List, as shown in Figure 8-33.
Figure 8-33 Adding an online SAS port
The Add Port to Host task completes successfully, as shown in Figure 8-32 on page 374.
374
8.2.4 Adding an iSCSI host port

To add an iSCSI host port, click iSCSI Port (as shown in Figure 8-30 on page 372) and the Add iSCSI Ports window opens, as shown in Figure 8-34.
Figure 8-34 Adding iSCSI Host Port
Enter the initiator name of your host and click Add Port to List. After you add the iSCSI Port, click Add Ports to Host to complete the tasks and apply the changes to the system. The iSCSI port status remains as unknown until it is added to the host and a host rescan process is completed. Figure 8-35 shows the output after an iSCSI port is added.
Figure 8-35 Successful iSCSI port addition
Click Close to return to the Ports by Host window. Important: An error message with code CMMVC6581E is shown if one of the following conditions occurs: The IQNs exceed the maximum number allowed. There is a duplicated IQN. The IQN contains a comma or leading or trailing spaces or is not valid in some other way.
375
8.2.5 Deleting a host port

To delete host ports, click Host Ports by Host to open the Ports by Host window, as shown in Figure 8-30 on page 372. Select the host in left pane, highlight the host port you want to delete and the Delete Port button is enabled, as shown in Figure 8-36.
Figure 8-36 Delete host port
If you press and hold the Ctrl key, you can also select several host ports to delete. Click Delete and you are prompted to enter the number of host ports that you want to delete, as shown in Figure 8-37.
Figure 8-37 Deleting host port.
Click Delete to apply the changes to the system. A task window appears that shows the results. Click Close to return to the Ports by Host window.
376
8.3 Host mappings overview

From IBM Storwize V3700 GUI, select Host Host Mappings to open the Host Mappings overview window, as shown in Figure 8-38.
Figure 8-38 Host volume mappings
This window shows a list of all the hosts and volumes and the respective SCSI ID and Volume Unique Identifier (UID). In our example in Figure 8-38, the host vmware-fc has two mapped volumes (volumes vmware-fc and vmware-fc1), and the associated SCSI ID (0 and 1), Volume Name, Volume Unique Identifier (UID), and Caching I/O Group ID. If you highlight one line and click Actions (as shown in Figure 8-39), the following options are available: Unmap Volumes Properties (Host) option Properties (Volume) option
Figure 8-39 Host mapping options
377
If multiple lines are highlighted (which are selected by pressing and holding the Ctrl key), only the Unmap Volumes option becomes available.
8.3.1 Unmap Volumes

Highlight one or more lines and click Unmap Volumes, enter the number of volumes to remove (as shown in Figure 8-40), and click Unmap. The mappings for all selected entries are removed.
Figure 8-40 Unmapping a volume from host
A task window should appear showing the status and completion of volume unmapping. Figure 8-41 shows volume windows2k8-sas being unmapped from host windows2k8-sas.
Figure 8-41 Unmapping a volume from host
Warning: Always ensure that you run the required procedures in your host operating system before you unmap volumes in the IBM Storwize V3700 GUI.
378
8.3.2 Properties (Host) option

Selecting an entry and clicking Properties (Host) (as shown in Figure 8-39 on page 377) opens the Host Properties window. For more information about this window, see 8.1.6, Host properties on page 367.
8.3.3 Properties (Volume) option

Selecting an entry and clicking Properties (Volume) (as shown in Figure 8-39 on page 377) opens the Volume Properties view. For more information about volume properties, see 8.5, Volume properties on page 391.
8.4 Advanced volume administration

This section describes volume administration tasks, such as volume modification, volume migration, and creation of volume copies. We assume that you created volumes on your IBM Storwize V3700 and you are familiar with generic, thin-provision, mirror, and thin-mirror volumes. For more information about basic volume configuration, see Chapter 5, Basic volume configuration on page 189. Figure 8-42 shows the following options that are available within the Volumes menu for advanced features administration: Volumes Volumes by Pool Volumes by Host
Figure 8-42 Volume options menu
379
8.4.1 Advanced volume functions

Click Volumes (as shown in Figure 8-42) and the Volumes window opens, as shown in Figure 8-43.
Figure 8-43 Volume window
By default, this window lists all configured volumes on the system and provides the following information: Name: Shows the name of the volume. If there is a + sign next to the name, this sign means that there are two copies of this volume. Click the + sign to expand the view and list the copies, as shown in Figure 8-44 on page 381. Status: Gives you status information about the volume, which can be online, offline, or degraded. Capacity: The disk capacity that is presented to the host is listed here. If there is a blue volume listed next to the capacity, this means that this volume is a thin-provisioned volume. Therefore, the listed capacity is the virtual capacity, which might be more than the real capacity on the system. Storage Pool: Shows in which Storage Pool the volume is stored. The primary copy is shown unless you expand the volume copies. UID: The volume unique identifier. Host Mappings: Shows if a volume has host mapping. Yes when host mapping exists (along with small server icon) and No when there are no hosting mappings. Important: If you right-click anywhere in the blue title bar, you can customize the volume attributes that are displayed. You might want to add some useful information here.
380
Figure 8-44 Expand volume copies
To create a volume, click New Volume and complete the steps that are described in 5.1, Provisioning storage from IBM Storwize V3700 and making it available to the host on page 190.
381
You can right-click or highlight a volume and select Actions to see the available actions for a volume, as shown in Figure 8-45.
Figure 8-45 Listing the action options for volume
Depending on which volume you highlighted, the following Volume options are available: Map to Host Unmap All Hosts View Mapped Host Duplicate Volume Rename Shrink Expand Migration to Another Pool Export to Image Mode Delete Properties The following Volume Copy options are available: Add Mirror Copy Thin Provisioned: Only available for thin-provisioned volumes: Shrink Expand Properties All of these options are described next.
382
8.4.2 Mapping a volume to a host

If you want to map a volume to a host, select Map to Host from the menu that is shown in Figure 8-45 on page 382. Select the I/O Group and Host to which you want to map the volume and click Next. Figure 8-46 shows the Modify Host Mappings menu.
Figure 8-46 Modify Host Mappings menu
After you select a host, the Modify Mappings window opens. In the upper left, you see the selected host. The yellow volume is the selected volume that is ready to be mapped, as shown in Figure 8-47. Click Map Volumes to apply the changes to the system.
After the changes are made, click Close to return to the All Volumes window. Modify Mappings window: For more information about the Modify Mappings window, see 8.1.1, Modifying Mappings menu on page 356.
383
8.4.3 Unmapping volumes from all hosts

If you want to remove all host mappings from a volume, click Unmap All Hosts (as shown in Figure 8-45 on page 382). This action removes all host mappings, which means that no hosts can access this volume. Enter the number of mappings that are affected and click Unmap, as show in Figure 8-48.
Figure 8-48 Unmapping from host(s)
After the task completes, click Close to return to the All Volumes window.
Warning: Always ensure that you run the required procedures in your host operating system before a procedure is unmapped.
8.4.4 Viewing a host that is mapped to a volume

If you want to know which host mappings are configured, highlight a volume and click View Mapped Host (as shown in Figure 8-45 on page 382). The Host Maps tab of the Volume Details window opens, as shown in Figure 8-49 on page 385. In this example, you see that there is one existing host mapping to the vmware-sas volume.
384
Figure 8-49 Volume to host mapping
If you want to remove a mapping, highlight the host and click Unmap from Host, which removes the access for the selected host (after you confirm it). If several hosts are mapped to this volume (for example, in a cluster), only the highlighted host is removed.
8.4.5 Duplicate Volume option

Use this option to duplicate a volume. If you want to duplicate an existing volume, highlight the volume and click Duplicate Volume, as shown in Figure 8-50 on page 386.
385
Figure 8-50 Duplicating volume
A Duplicate Volume window opens and you are prompt to enter the new volume name. IBM Storwize V3700 automatically suggests a name by adding an incremental number in the end of the new volume name, as shown in Figure 8-51.
Figure 8-51 Duplicate Volume
Click Duplicate and the IBM Storwize V3700 creates an independent volume that uses the same characteristics as the source volume. Important: When the Duplicate Volume function is used, you cannot specify a preferred node.
386
8.4.6 Renaming a volume

To rename a volume, select Rename (as shown in Figure 8-45 on page 382). The Rename Volume window opens. Enter the new name, as shown in Figure 8-52.
Figure 8-52 Renaming a volume
If you click Reset, the name field is reset to the active name of the volume. Click Rename to apply the changes and click Close after task window completes.
8.4.7 Shrinking a volume

The IBM Storwize V3700 has the option to shrink volumes. This feature should be used only if your host operating system supports it. This capability reduces the capacity that is allocated to the particular volume by the amount that you specify. To shrink a volume, click Shrink, as shown in Figure 8-45 on page 382. You can enter the new size or by how much the volume should shrink. If you enter a value, the other line updates automatically, as shown in Figure 8-53. Important: Before a volume is shrunk, ensure that the volume is not mapped to any host object and does not contain data. If both conditions are ignored, it is likely that your Operating System logs disk errors or data corruption.
Figure 8-53 Shrink Volume
Click Shrink to start the process and then click Close when task window completes to return to the All Volumes window. Run the required procedures on your host after the shrinking process. Important: For volumes that contain more than one copy, you might receive a CMMVC6354E error; use the lsvdisksyncprogress command to view the synchronization status. Wait for the copy to synchronize. If you want the synchronization process to complete more quickly, increase the rate by running the chvdisk command. When the copy is synchronized, resubmit the shrink process.
387
8.4.8 Expanding a volume

If you want to expand a volume, click Expand (as shown in Figure 8-45 on page 382) and the Expand Volume window opens. Before you continue, check if your operating system supports online volume expansion. Enter the new volume size and click Expand, as shown in Figure 8-54.
Figure 8-54 Expand volume
After the tasks complete, click Close to return to the All Volumes window. Run the required procedures in your operating system to use the available space.
8.4.9 Migrating a volume to another storage pool

The IBM Storwize V3700 supports online volume migration while applications are running. By using volume migration, you can move volumes between storage pools, whether the pools are internal pools or on an external storage system. The migration process is a low priority and one extent is moved at a time. Important: For the migration to be acceptable, the source and target Storage Pool must have the same extent size. For more information about extent size, see Chapter 1.1, IBM Storwize V3700 overview on page 2. To migrate a volume to another storage pool, click Migrate to Another Pool (as shown in Figure 8-45 on page 382). The Migrate Volume Copy window opens. If your volume consists of more than one copy, you are asked which copy you want to migrate to another storage pool, as shown in Figure 8-55 on page 389. If the selected volume consists of one copy, this option does not appear. Notice that the vmware-sas volume has 2 copies stored into two different storage pools (Figure 8-55 on page 389). The storage pools to which they belong are shown in parentheses.
388
Figure 8-55 Migrate Volume
Select the new target storage pool and click Migrate, as shown in Figure 8-55. The volume copy migration starts, as shown in Figure 8-56. Click Close to return to the All Volumes window.
Figure 8-56 Volume Copy Migration starts
Depending on the size of the volume, the migration process can take some time. You can monitor the status of the migration in the running tasks bar at the bottom of the window. Volume migration tasks cannot be interrupted. After the migration completes, the copy 0 from the vmware-sas volume is shown in the new storage pool, as shown in Figure 8-57 on page 390.
389
Figure 8-57 Volume showing at new Storage Pool
The volume copy was migrated without any downtime to the new storage pool. It is also possible to migrate both volume copies to other storage pools. Another way to migrate volumes to a different pool is by using the volume copy feature, as described in 8.6.5, Migrating volumes by using the volume copy features on page 406.
8.4.10 Deleting a volume

To delete a volume, select Delete, as shown in Figure 8-45 on page 382. You must enter the number of volumes that you want to delete. Select the option to force deletion if the volume has host mappings or is used in FlashCopy or RemoteCopy mappings. Figure 8-58 shows the Delete Volume window.
Figure 8-58 Delete volume
Click Delete and the volume is removed from the system. Click Close to return to Volumes window.
390
Important: You must force the deletion if the volume has host mappings or is used in FlashCopy or RemoteCopy mappings. To be safe, always ensure the volume has no association before you delete it.
8.5 Volume properties

This section provides an overview of all available information that is related to IBM Storwize V3700 volumes. To open the advanced view of a volume, select Properties and the Volume Details window opens, as shown in Figure 8-59. The following tabs are available in this window: Overview Host Maps Member MDisk
Figure 8-59 Volume Details Overview
8.5.1 Overview tab

The Overview tab that is shown in Figure 8-60 gives you a complete overview of the volume properties. In the left part of the window, you find common volume properties. In the right part of the window, you see information about the volume copies. The detailed view was chosen by selecting the Show Details option in the lower left.
391
Figure 8-60 Volume properties window
The following details are available: Volume Properties: Volume Name: Shows the name of the volume. Volume ID: Shows the ID of the volume. Every volume has a system-wide unique ID. Status: Gives status information about the volume, which can be online, offline, or degraded. Capacity: Shows the capacity of the volume. If the volume is thin-provisioned, this number is the virtual capacity; the real capacity is displayed for each copy. # of Flash Copy Mappings: The number of existing Flash Copy relationships. For more information, see Chapter 10.1, FlashCopy on page 450. Volume UID: The volume unique identifier. Accessible I/O Group: Shows the I/O Group. Preferred Node: Specifies the ID of the preferred node for the volume. I/O Throttling: It is possible to set a maximum rate at which the volume processes I/O requests. The limit can be set in I/Os or MBps. This feature is an advanced feature and can be enabled only through the CLI, as described in Appendix A, Command-line interface setup and SAN Boot on page 593. Mirror Sync Rate: After creation, or if a volume copy is offline, the mirror sync rate weights the synchronization process. Volumes with a high sync rate (100%) complete the synchronization faster than volumes with a lower priority. By default, the rate is set to 50% for all volumes. Cache Mode: Shows whether the cache is enabled or disabled for this volume.
392
Cache State: Provides feedback if open I/O requests are inside the cache that are not destaged to the disks. UDID (OpenVMS): The unit device identifiers are used by OpenVMS hosts to access the volume. Copy Properties: Storage Pool: Provides information about which pool the copy is in, what type of copy it is (generic or thin-provisioned), the status of the copy and Easy Tier status. Capacity: Shows the allocated (used) and the virtual (Real) capacity from both Tiers (SSD and HDD) and the warning threshold, and the grain size for Thin-Provisioned volumes. If you want to modify any of these changeable settings, click Edit and the window changes to modify mode. Figure 8-61 shows the Volume Details Overview tab in modify mode.
Figure 8-61 Modify Volume Details
Inside the Volume Details window, the following properties can be changed: Volume Name Mirror Sync Rate Cache Mode UDID Make any required changes and click Save.
393
8.5.2 Host Maps tab

The second tab of the Volume Details window is Host Maps, as shown in Figure 8-62. All hosts that are mapped to the selected volume are listed in this view.
Figure 8-62 Host Maps
To unmap a host from the volume, highlight it and click Unmap from Host. Confirm the number of mappings to remove and click Unmap. Figure 8-63 shows the Unmap Host window.
Figure 8-63 Unmap Host
394
The changes are applied to the system. The selected host no longer has access to this volume. Click Close to return to the Host Maps window. For more information about host mappings, see 8.3, Host mappings overview on page 377.
8.5.3 Member MDisk tab

The third and last tab is Member MDisk, which lists all MDisks on which the volume is located. Select a copy and the associated MDisks is shown in the window, as shown in Figure 8-64.
Figure 8-64 Member MDisk tab
395
Highlight an MDisk and click Actions to see the available tasks, as shown in Figure 8-65 on page 396). The Show Details option on the lower left side does not provide more information. For more information about the available tasks, see Chapter 7, Storage pools on page 313.
Figure 8-65 MDisk action menu
Click Close to return to the All Volumes window.
8.5.4 Adding a mirrored volume copy

If you have a volume that consists of only one copy, you can add a second mirrored copy to the volume. This action creates a second online copy of your volume. This second copy can be generic or thin-provisioned. In addition, you can use this alternative method to migrate data across storage pools with different extent size. To add a second copy, highlight the volume and click Actions Volume Copy Actions Add Mirrored Copy, as shown in Figure 8-66 on page 397.
396
Figure 8-66 Add Mirrored Copy
Select the storage pool to which the new copy should be created, as shown in Figure 8-67. If the new copy should be thin-provisioned, select the Thin-Provisioned option and click Add Copy.
Figure 8-67 Select Storage Pool
The copy is created after you click Add Copy and data starts to synchronize as a background task. Figure 8-68 on page 398 shows you that the volume named volume_001 holds two volume copies.
397
Figure 8-68 Volume containing two copies
8.5.5 Editing Thin-Provisioned volume properties

The processes that are used to modify the volume size presented to a host are described in 8.4.7, Shrinking a volume on page 387 and 8.4.8, Expanding a volume on page 388. However, if you have a thin-provisioned volume, you can also edit the allocated size and the warning thresholds. To edit these settings, select the volume copy, then select Actions Thin-Provisioned or highlight and right-click the volume copy and click Thin-Provisioned Shrink, as shown in Figure 8-69. The following options are available, as shown in Figure 8-69: Shrink Expand Edit Properties
Figure 8-69 Working with Thin-Provisioned volumes
These changes are made only to the internal storage; no changes to your host are necessary.
Shrinking Thin-Provisioned space

Select Shrink (as shown in Figure 8-69) to reduce the allocated space of a thin-provisioned volume. Enter the amount by which the volume should shrink or the new final size, and click Shrink.
398
Deallocating extents: You can only deallocate extents that do not include stored data on them. If the space is allocated because there is data on them, you cannot shrink the allocated space and an out-of-range warning message appears. Figure 8-70 shows the Shrink Volume window.
Figure 8-70 Shrink Volume
After the task completes, click Close. The allocated space of the thin-provisioned volume is reduced.
Expanding Thin-Provisioned space

To expand the allocated space of a thin-provisioned volume, select Expand, as shown in Figure 8-69 on page 398. Enter the amount by which space should be allocated or the new final size and click Expand. In our example (as shown in Figure 8-71), we are expanding the Thin-Provisioned space by 10 Mb.
Figure 8-71 Expand Volume
The new space is now allocated. Click Close after task is completed.
Editing Thin-Provisioned properties

To edit thin-provisioned properties, select Edit Properties, as shown in Figure 8-69 on page 398. Edit the settings (if required) and click OK to apply the changes.
399
Figure 8-72 on page 400 shows the Edit Properties window.
Figure 8-72 Thin-Provisioned volume properties.
After the task completes, click Close to return to the All Volumes window.
8.6 Advanced volume copy functions

In 8.4.1, Advanced volume functions on page 380, we described all of the available actions at a volume level and how to create a second volume copy. In this section, we focus on volumes that consist of two volume copies and how to apply the concept of two copies for business continuity and data migration. If you expand the volume and highlight a copy, the following volume copy actions become available, as shown in Figure 8-73: Thin-provisioned (for Thin volumes) Make Primary (for non-primary copy) Split into New Volume Validate Volume Copies Delete Copy option
Figure 8-73 Volume copy actions
400
If you review the volume copies that are shown in Figure 8-73 on page 400, you see that one of the copies has a star displayed next to its name, as also shown in Figure 8-74.
Figure 8-74 Volume copy names
Each volume has a primary and a secondary copy, and the star indicates the primary copy. The two copies are always synchronized, which means that all writes are destaged to both copies, but all reads are always done from the primary copy. Two copies per volume are the maximum number configurable and you can change the roles of your copies. To accomplish this task, highlight the secondary copy and then click Actions Make Primary. Usually, it is a best practice to place the volume copies on storage pools with similar performance because the write performance is constrained if one copy is on a lower performance pool than the other. Figure 8-75 shows the secondary copy Actions menu.
Figure 8-75 Make primary
If you demand high read performance only, another possibility is to place the primary copy in an SSD pool and the secondary copy in a normal disk storage pool. This action maximizes the read performance of the volume and makes sure that you have a synchronized second copy in your less expensive disk pool. It is possible to migrate online copies between storage pools. For more information about how to select which copy you want to migrate, see 8.4.9, Migrating a volume to another storage pool on page 388. Click Make Primary and the role of the copy is changed to online. Click Close when the task completes. The volume copy feature also is a powerful option for migrating volumes, as described in 8.6.5, Migrating volumes by using the volume copy features on page 406.
401
8.6.1 Thin-provisioned
This menu item includes the same functions that are described in Shrinking Thin-Provisioned space on page 398, Expanding Thin-Provisioned space on page 399, and Editing Thin-Provisioned properties on page 399. You can specify the same settings for each volume copy. Figure 8-76 shows the Thin-provisioned menu item.
Figure 8-76 Thin-provisioned menu item
8.6.2 Splitting into a new volume

If your two volume copies are synchronized, you can split one of the copies to a new volume and map this new volume to another host. From a storage point of view, this procedure can be performed online, which means you can split one copy from the volume and create a copy from the remaining one without any host impact. However, if you want to use the split copy for testing or backup purposes, you must make sure that the data inside the volume is consistent. Therefore, you must flush the cached data to storage to make the copies consistent. For more information about flushing the data, see your operating system documentation. The easiest way to flush the data is to shut down the hosts or application before a copy is split. In our example, volume win_vol_01 has two copies, Copy 0 as primary and Copy 1 as secondary. To split a copy, click Split into New Volume (as shown in Figure 8-73 on page 400) on either copy and it becomes a new volume in its own right. The remaining copy automatically becomes the primary for the original volume. Optionally, enter a name for the new volume and click Split Volume Copy.
402
Figure 8-77 shows the Split Volume Copy window.
Figure 8-77 Split Volume Copy
After the task completes, click Close to return to the All Volumes window, where the copy appears as a new volume named vdisk0 that can be mapped to a host, as shown in Figure 8-78.
Figure 8-78 All Volumes - New volume from split copy
Important: If you receive an error message while you are splitting volume copy (error message code CMMVC6357E), use the lsvdisksyncprogress command to view the synchronization status or wait for the copy to synchronize. Example 8-1 shows an output of lsvdisksyncprogress command.
Example 8-1 Output of lsvdisksyncprogress command
IBM_Storwize:mcr-atl-cluster-01:superuser>lsvdisksyncprogress vdisk_id vdisk_name copy_id progress estimated_completion_time 3 vmware-sas 1 3 130605014819 14 thin-volume 1 38 130606032210 25 win_vol_01 1 55 130604121159 IBM_Storwize:mcr-atl-cluster-01:superuser>
403
8.6.3 Validate Volume Copies option

The IBM Storwize V3700 GUI provides capabilities to check volume copies that are identical or to process the differences between them. To validate the copies of a mirrored volume, complete the following steps: 1. Select Validate Volume Copies, as shown in Figure 8-73 on page 400. The Validate Volume Copies window opens, as shown in Figure 8-79.
Figure 8-79 Validate Volume Copies
The following options are available: Generate Event of Differences Use this option if you want to verify only that the mirrored volume copies are identical. If any difference is found, the command stops and logs an error that includes the logical block address (LBA) and the length of the first difference. Starting at a different LBA each time, you can use this option to count the number of differences on a volume. Overwrite Differences Use this option to overwrite contents from the primary volume copy to the other volume copy. The command corrects any differing sectors by copying the sectors from the primary copy to the copies that are compared. Upon completion, the command process logs an event which indicates the number of differences that were corrected. Use this option if you are sure that the primary volume copy data is correct or that your host applications can handle incorrect data. Return Media Error to Host Use this option to convert sectors on all volume copies that contain different contents into virtual medium errors. Upon completion, the command logs an event, which indicates the number of differences that were found, the number that were converted into medium errors, and the number that were not converted. Use this option if you are unsure what the correct data is and you do not want an incorrect version of the data to be used. 2. Select which action to perform and click Validate to start the task. The volume is now checked. Click Close. Figure 8-80 on page 405 shows the output when the volume copy Generate Event of Differences option is chosen.
404
Figure 8-80 Volume copy validation output
The validation process runs as a background process and can take some time, depending on the volume size. You can check the status in the Running Tasks window, as shown in Figure 8-81.
Figure 8-81 Validate Volume Copies: Running Tasks
8.6.4 Delete Volume Copy option

Click Delete (as shown in Figure 8-73 on page 400) to delete a volume copy. The copy is deleted, but the volume remains online by using the remaining copy. Confirm the deletion process by clicking YES. Figure 8-82 on page 406 shows the copy deletion window.
405
Figure 8-82 Delete a copy
After the copy is deleted, click Close to return to the All Volumes window.
8.6.5 Migrating volumes by using the volume copy features

In the previous sections, we showed that it is possible to create, synchronize, split, and delete volume copies. A combination of these tasks can be used to migrate volumes to other storage pools. The easiest way to migrate volume copies is to use the migration feature that is described in 8.4.9, Migrating a volume to another storage pool on page 388. If you use this feature, one extent after another is migrated to the new storage pool. However, the use of volume copies provides another way to migrate volumes if you have different storage pool characteristic in terms of extent size. To migrate a volume, complete the following steps: 1. Create a second copy of your volume in the target storage pool. For more information, see 8.5.4, Adding a mirrored volume copy on page 396. 2. Wait until the copies are synchronized. 3. Change the role of the copies and make the new copy the primary copy. For more information, see 8.6, Advanced volume copy functions on page 400. 4. Split or delete the old copy from the volume. For more information, see 8.6.2, Splitting into a new volume on page 402 or 8.6.4, Delete Volume Copy option on page 405. This migration process requires more user interaction with the IBM Storwize V3700 GUI, but it offers some benefits. As an example, we look at migrating a volume from a tier 1 storage pool to a lower performance tier 2 storage pool. In step 1, you create the copy on the tier 2 pool, while all reads are still performed in the tier 1 pool to the primary copy. After synchronization, all writes are destaged to both pools, but the reads are still done only from the primary copy. Considering the copies are fully synchronized, now you can online switch the role of them (step 3), and complete performance analysis on the new pool. When you are done testing your lower performance pool, you can split or delete the old copy in tier 1 or switch back to tier 1 in seconds if the tier 2 storage pool did not meet your requirements.
406
8.7 Volumes by Pool feature

To see an overview of which volumes are on which storage pool, click Volumes by Pool, as shown in Figure 8-83.
Figure 8-83 Volumes by Pool
407
The Volumes by Pool window opens, as shown in Figure 8-84 on page 408.
Figure 8-84 Volumes by Pool window
The left pane is named Pool Filter, and all of your existing storage pools are shown there. For more information about storage pools, see Chapter 7, Storage pools on page 313. In the upper right, you see information about the pool that you selected in the pool filter, the following information is also shown: Pool icon: Because storage pools might have different characteristics, you can change the storage pool icon. For more information about making the changes, see 7.5, Working with Storage Pools on page 348. Pool Name: This is the name given during the creation of the storage pool. For more information about changing the storage pool name, see, Chapter 7, Storage pools on page 313. Pool Details: This shows you the information about the storage pools such as status, the number of managed disks, and easy tier status. Volume allocation: This shows you the amount of capacity that is allocated to volumes from this storage pool. The lower right section (as shown in Figure 8-85 on page 409) lists all volumes that have at least one copy in the selected storage pool and the following information is provided: Name: The name of the volume. Status: The status of the volume. Capacity: The capacity that is presented to host. UID: The volume unique identifier. Host Mappings: Indicates if host mapping exists.
408
Figure 8-85 Volumes by Storage Pool
It is also possible to create volumes from this window. Click Create Volume to start the volume creation window. The steps are the same as those that are described in Chapter 5, Basic volume configuration on page 189. If you highlight a volume and select Actions or right-click the volume, the same options as described in 8.4, Advanced volume administration on page 379 appears.
409
8.8 Volumes by Host feature

To see an overview about which volume a host can access, click Volumes by Host, as shown in Figure 8-83 on page 407 and the Volumes by Host window opens, as shown in Figure 8-86.
Figure 8-86 Volumes by Host
In the left pane of the view is the Host Filter. If you select a host, its properties appear in the right pane; for example host name, the number of ports and host type. The hosts with an orange cable represent Fibre Channel or FCoE hosts, the black cable represents the SAS hosts, and blue cable represents the iSCSI hosts. The volumes that are mapped to this host are listed, as shown in Figure 8-87.
Figure 8-87 Volumes by host.
It is also possible to create a volume from this window. If you click New Volume, the same wizard that is described in 5.1, Provisioning storage from IBM Storwize V3700 and making it available to the host on page 190 opens. If you highlight the volume, the Actions button becomes available and the options are the same as described in 8.4, Advanced volume administration on page 379. 410
Chapter 9.
Easy Tier
In todays storage market, solid-state drives (SSDs) are emerging as an attractive alternative to hard disk drives (HDDs). Because of their low response times, high throughput, and IOPS-energy-efficient characteristics, SSDs have the potential to allow your storage infrastructure to achieve significant savings in operational costs. However, the current acquisition cost per GB for SSDs is currently much higher than for HDDs. SSD performance depends a lot on workload characteristics, so SSDs must be used with HDDs. It is critical to choose the right mix of drives and the right data placement to achieve optimal performance at low cost. Maximum value can be derived by placing hot data with high IO density and low response time requirements on SSDs, while targeting HDDs for cooler data that is accessed more sequentially and at lower rates. Easy Tier automates the placement of data among different storage tiers and boosts your storage infrastructure performance to achieve optimal performance through a software, server, and storage solution. This chapter describes the Easy Tier disk performance optimization feature and how to activate the Easy Tier process for evaluation purposes and for automatic extent migration. Information is also included about the monitoring tool, Storage Tier Advisor Tool (STAT) and Tivoli Storage Productivity Center for performance monitoring. This chapter includes the following topics: Easy Tier overview Easy Tier for IBM Storwize V3700 Easy Tier process Easy Tier configuration using the GUI Easy Tier configuration using the CLI IBM Storage Tier Advisor Tool Tivoli Storage Productivity Center Administering and reporting an IBM Storwize V3700 system through Tivoli Storage Productivity Center
411
9.1 Easy Tier overview

Easy Tier is an optional licensed feature of IBM Storwize V3700 that brings enterprise storage functions to the entry segment. It enables automated subvolume data placement throughout different storage tiers to intelligently align the system with current workload requirements and to optimize the usage of SSDs. This functionality includes the ability to automatically and non-disruptively relocate data (at the extent level) from one tier to another tier in either direction to achieve the best available storage performance for the workload in your environment. Easy Tier reduces the I/O latency for hot spots, but it does not replace storage cache. Both Easy Tier and storage cache solve a similar access latency workload problem, but these two methods weigh differently in the algorithmic construction based on locality of reference, recency, and frequency. Because Easy Tier monitors I/O performance from the device end (after cache), it can pick up the performance issues that cache cannot solve and complement the overall storage system performance. In general, without Easy Tier, storage environments are monitored at the volume level and the entire volume is placed on an appropriate storage tier. Determining the I/O at the extent level is too complex and manually moving extents to an appropriate storage tier and reacting to workload changes is not feasible. Easy Tier is a performance optimization function that overcomes this issue because it automatically migrates (or moves) extents that belong to a volume between different storage tiers, as shown in Figure 9-1. Because this migration works at the extent level, it is often referred to as sub-LUN migration.
Figure 9-1 Easy Tier
You can enable Easy Tier for storage on a volume basis. It monitors the I/O activity and latency of the extents on all Easy Tier enabled volumes over a 24-hour period. Based on the performance log, it creates an extent migration plan and dynamically moves high activity or hot extents to a higher disk tier within the same storage pool, and moves extents whose activity has dropped off, or cooled, from higher disk tier MDisks back to a lower tier MDisk.
412
To enable this migration between MDisks with different tier levels, the target storage pool must consist of different characteristic MDisks. These pools are called multitiered storage pools. IBM Storwize V3700 Easy Tier is optimized to boost the performance of storage pools that contain HDDs and SSDs. To identify the potential benefits of Easy Tier in your environment before actually installing higher MDisk tiers, such as SSDs, it is possible to enable the Easy Tier monitoring on volumes in single-tiered storage pools. Although the Easy Tier extent migration is not possible within a single-tiered pool, the Easy Tier statistical measurement function is possible. Enabling Easy Tier on a single-tiered storage pool starts the monitoring process and logs the activity of the volume extents. In this case, Easy Tier creates a migration plan file that can then be used to show a report on the number of extents that are appropriate for migration to higher level MDisk tiers, such as SSDs. The IBM Storage Tier Advisor Tool (STAT) is a no-cost tool that helps you to analyze this data. If you do not have an IBM Storwize V3700, use Disk Magic to get a better idea about the required number of SSDs that are appropriate for your workload. If you do not have any workload performance data, a good starting point can be to add about 5% of net capacity of SSDs to your configuration. But this ratio is heuristics-based and changes according to different applications or different disk tier performance in each configuration. For database transactions, a ratio of fast SAS or FC drives to SSD is about 6:1 to achieve the optimal performance, but this ratio depends on the environment on which it is implemented.
9.2 Easy Tier for IBM Storwize V3700

This section describes the terms and gives an example of an implementation of Easy Tier. After reading this section, you should understand the Easy Tier concept as it relates to the IBM Storwize V3700.
9.2.1 Tiered storage pools

With IBM Storwize V3700, we must differentiate between the following types of storage pools: Single-tiered storage pools Multitiered storage pools As shown in Figure 9-2 on page 414, single-tiered storage pools include one type for disk tier attribute. Each disk should have the same size and performance characteristics. Multitiered storage pools are populated with two different disk tier attributes, which means high performance tier SSD disks, and generic HDD disks. A volume migration, as described in Chapter 8, Advanced host and volume administration on page 353, is when the complete volume is migrated from one storage pool to another storage pool. An Easy Tier data migration only moves extents inside the storage pool to different tiered disks.
Chapter 9. Easy Tier
413
Figure 9-2 Tiered storage pools
9.3 Easy Tier process

The Easy Tier feature consists of four main processes. Figure 9-3 shows the flow between these processes. These processes ensure that the extent allocation in multitiered storage pools is optimized for the best performance that is monitored on your workload in the last 24 hours. At five-minute intervals, statistics about extent usage are collected. Every 24 hours of elapsed time, a heat map is created that is used by the internal algorithms to generate a migration plan and a summary report. This migration plan contains information about which extents to promote to the upper tier or to demote to the lower tier, and the summary report is used by STAT (see 9.6, IBM Storage Tier Advisor Tool on page 433).
Figure 9-3 Easy Tier process flow
Also, Easy Tier is based on an algorithm with a threshold to evaluate if an extent is cold or hot. If an extent activity is below this threshold, it is not considered by the algorithm to be moved to the SSD tier. The four main processes and the flow between them are described in the following sections.
414
9.3.1 I/O Monitoring

The I/O Monitoring (IOM) process operates continuously and monitors host volumes for I/O activity. It collects performance statistics for each extent and derives averages for a rolling 24-hour period of I/O activity. Easy Tier makes allowances for large block I/Os and thus only considers I/Os of up to 64 KB as migration candidates. This process is an efficient process and adds negligible processing impact to the IBM Storwize V3700 node canisters.
9.3.2 Data Placement Advisor

The Data Placement Advisor (DPA) uses workload statistics to make a cost benefit decision about which extents should be candidates for migration to a higher performance (SSD) tier. This process also identifies extents that must be migrated back to a lower (HDD) tier.
9.3.3 Data Migration Planner

By using the extents that were previously identified, the Data Migration Planner (DMP) process builds the extent migration plan for the storage pool.
9.3.4 Data Migrator

The Data Migrator (DM) process involves scheduling and the actual movement or migration of the volumes extents up to, or down from, the high disk tier. The extent migration rate is capped to a maximum of up to 15 MBps. This rate equates to around 2 TB a day that is migrated between disk tiers, as shown in Figure 9-4 on page 416.
415
Figure 9-4 Easy Tier Data Migrator
9.3.5 Easy Tier operating modes

IBM Storwize V3700 offers the following operating modes for Easy Tier: Easy Tier - OFF (for more information, see Easy Tier - OFF on page 416.) Evaluation Mode (for more information, see Evaluation Mode on page 416.) Auto Data Placement Mode (for more information, see Automatic Data Placement Mode on page 416.)
Easy Tier - OFF

Easy Tier can be turned off. No statistics are recorded and no extents are moved.
Evaluation Mode
If you turn on Easy Tier in a single-tiered storage pool, it runs in Evaluation Mode, which means it measures the I/O activity for all extents. A statistic summary file is created and can be offloaded from the IBM Storwize V3700. This file can be analyzed with the IBM Storage Tier Advisory Tool, as described in 9.6, IBM Storage Tier Advisor Tool on page 433. This analysis shows the benefits for your workload if you were to add SSDs to your pool before any hardware acquisition.
Automatic Data Placement Mode

This operating mode is enabled by default if you create a multitiered storage pool. Easy Tier is also enabled on all volumes inside the multitiered storage pool. The extents are migrated dynamically by the Easy Tier processes to achieve the best performance. The movement is not apparent to the host server and applications, and it only provides increased performance.
416
If you do want to disable Auto Data Placement Mode for single volumes inside a multitiered storage pool, it is possible to turn off at the volume level. This action excludes the volume from Auto Data Placement Mode and measures the I/O statistics only. The statistic summary file can be offloaded for input to the advisor tool. The tool produces a report on the extents that are moved to SSD and a prediction of performance improvement that can be gained if SSD drives were added.
9.3.6 Easy Tier rules

The following operating rules exist when IBM Easy Tier is used on the IBM Storwize V3700: Automatic data placement and extent I/O activity monitors are supported on each copy of a mirrored volume. Easy Tier works with each copy independently of the other copy. Volume mirroring: Volume mirroring can have different workload characteristics on each copy of the data because reads are normally directed to the primary copy and writes occur to both. Thus, the number of extents that Easy Tier migrates to SSD tier probably is different for each copy. Easy Tier works with all striped volumes, including the following types: Generic volumes Thin-provisioned volumes Mirrored volumes Thin-mirrored volumes Global and Metro Mirror sources and targets
Easy Tier automatic data placement is not supported for image mode or sequential volumes. I/O monitoring for such volumes is supported, but you cannot migrate extents on such volumes unless you convert image or sequential volume copies to striped volumes. If possible, IBM Storwize V3700 creates new volumes or volume expansions by using extents from HDD tier MDisks, but uses extents from SSD tier MDisks if no HDD space is available. When a volume is migrated out of a storage pool that is managed with Easy Tier, Automatic Data Placement Mode is no longer active on that volume. Automatic Data Placement is also turned off while a volume is being migrated, even if it is between pools that both have Easy Tier Automatic Data Placement enabled. Automatic Data Placement for the volume is re-enabled when the migration is complete. SSD performance is dependent on block sizes, and small blocks perform much better than larger ones. Because Easy Tier is optimized to work with SSD, it decides if an extent is hot by measuring I/O smaller than 64 KB, but it migrates the entire extent to the appropriate disk tier. As extents are migrated, the use of smaller extents makes Easy Tier more efficient. The first migration of hot data to SSD starts about one hour after Automatic Data Placement Mode is enabled, but it takes up to 24 hours to achieve optimal performance. In the current IBM Storwize V3700 Easy Tier implementation, it takes about two days before hot spots are considered being moved from SSDs, which prevents hot spots from being moved from SSDs if the workload changes over a weekend. If you run an unusual workload over a longer period, Automatic Data Placement can be turned off and on online, to avoid data movement.
417
Depending on which storage pool and which Easy Tier configuration is set, a volume copy can have the Easy Tier states that are shown in Table 9-1.
Table 9-1 Easy Tier states Storage pool Single-tiered or multitiered storage pool Single-tiered Single-tiered Multitiered Multitiered Single-tiered Single-tiered Multitiered Multitiered Single-tiered Single-tiered Multitiered Multitiered Volume copy Easy Tier setting Off On Off On Off On Off On Off On Off On Easy Tier status
Off Off Off Off Autob Autob Autob Autob On On On On
Inactivea Inactivea Inactivea Inactivea Inactivea Inactivea Measuredc Actived e Measuredc Measuredc Measuredc Actived
a. When the volume copy status is inactive, no Easy Tier functions are enabled for that volume copy. b. The default Easy Tier setting for a storage pool is auto, and the default Easy Tier setting for a volume copy is on. This scenario means that Easy Tier functions are disabled for storage pools with a single tier, and that automatic data placement mode is enabled for all striped volume copies in a storage pool with two tiers. c. When the volume copy status is measured, the Easy Tier function collects usage statistics for the volume, but automatic data placement is not active. d. If the volume copy is in image or sequential mode or is being migrated, then the volume copy Easy Tier status is measured instead of active. e. When the volume copy status is active, the Easy Tier function operates in automatic data placement mode for that volume.
418
9.4 Easy Tier configuration using the GUI

This section describes how to activate Easy Tier by using the IBM Storwize V3700 GUI.
9.4.1 Creating multitiered pools: Enable Easy Tier

In this section, we describe how to create multitiered storage pools by using the GUI. When a storage pool changes from single-tiered to multitiered, Easy Tier is enabled by default for the pool and on all volume copies inside this pool. To create multitiered pools, completed the following steps: 1. Click Volumes Volumes by Pool. Figure 9-5 shows that, in our example, the V3700_Pool_1 storage pool exists as a single tiered Storage pool and Easy Tier is inactive. We now add SSD drives to the single tiered Storage pool, V3700_Pool_2 storage pool to enable Easy Tier.
Figure 9-5 Single-tiered pool
2. Click Pools Internal Storage. Figure 9-6 shows that one internal SSD drive is available and is in a candidate status.
Figure 9-6 Internal SSDs
419
3. Click Configure Storage and the Storage Configuration wizard opens. Figure 9-7 shows the first step of the configuration wizard.
Figure 9-7 Configure Internal Storage window
The wizard recommends the use of the SSDs to enable Easy Tier. If you select Use recommended configuration, it selects the recommended RAID level and hot spare coverage for your system automatically, as shown in Figure 9-8.
Figure 9-8 Recommended configuration
420
If you select Select a different configuration (as shown in Figure 9-9 on page 421), you can select the preset.
Figure 9-9 Select a preset menu
4. Choose a custom RAID level, or you can also select the SSD Easy Tier preset to review and modify the recommended configuration. Because we do not have enough drives in our configuration in this example, the SSD Easy Tier preset is unavailable from the preset selection. When this preset is available, it configures a RAID 10 array with a spare goal of one drive. In this example, we create a RAID 0 array (this is not best practice and is not used in a production environment). Because there are not enough drives, an error message is displayed, as shown in Figure 9-10 on page 422.
421
Figure 9-10 Select RAID 0 preset
This error message can be avoided if the Automatically configure spares option is cleared, as shown in Figure 9-11. A RAID 0 array with one drive and no spares is created.
Figure 9-11 Array creation configuration summary
5. To create a multitiered storage pool, the SSDs must be added to an existing generic HDD pool. Select Expand an existing pool (see Figure 9-12 on page 423) and select the pool you want to change to a multitiered storage pool. In our example, V3700_Pool_2 is selected. Click Finish.
422
Figure 9-12 Expand an existing pool
6. Now the array is configured on the SSDs and added to the selected storage pool. Click Close after the task completes, as shown in Figure 9-13.
Figure 9-13 Array creation completed task
Figure 9-14 on page 424 shows that the internal SSD drives usage has now changed to Member and that the wizard created an MDisk that is named mdisk2.
423
Figure 9-14 SSD usage has changed
In Figure 9-15, you see that the new MDisk is now part of the V3700_Pool_2 storage pool and that the Pool icon changed to show . This means that the status of the Easy Tier changed to Active. In this pool, Automatic Data Placement Mode is started and the Easy Tier processes starts to work.
Figure 9-15 Easy Tier active
By default, Easy Tier is now active in this storage pool and all its volumes. Figure 9-16 shows an example of three volumes in the multitiered storage pool.
Figure 9-16 Volumes by pool
424
If you open the properties of a volume by clicking Actions Properties, you can also see that Easy Tier is enabled on the volume by default, as shown in Figure 9-17.
Figure 9-17 Easy Tier enabled volume
If a volume has more than one copy, Easy Tier can be enabled and disabled on each copy separately. This action depends on the storage pool where the volume copy is defined. A volume with two copies is stored in two different storage pools, as shown in Figure 9-18.
Figure 9-18 Easy Tier by Copy
425
If you want to enable Easy Tier on the second copy, change the storage pool of the second copy to a multitiered storage pool by repeating these steps.
9.4.2 Downloading Easy Tier I/O measurements

Easy Tier is now enabled and Automatic Data Placement Mode is active. Extents are automatically migrated to or from high performance disk tiers, and the statistic summary collection is now active. The statistics log file can be downloaded to analyze how many extents were migrated and to monitor if it makes sense to add more SSDs to the multitiered storage pool. To download the statistics file, complete the following steps: 1. Click Settings Support, as shown in Figure 9-19.
Figure 9-19 Settings menu
2. Click Show full log listing, as shown in Figure 9-20.
Figure 9-20 Download files menu
426
This action lists all the log files that are available to download (see Figure 9-21). The Easy Tier log files are always named dpa_heat.canister_name_date.time.data.
Figure 9-21 Download dpa_heat file
Log file creation: Depending on your workload and configuration, it can take up to 24 hours until a new Easy Tier log file is created. If you run Easy Tier for a longer period, it generates a heat file at least every 24 hours. The time and date of the file creation is included in the file name. The heat log file always includes the measured I/O activity of the last 24 hours. 3. Right-click the dpa_heat.canister_name_date.time.data file and click Download. Select the file for Easy Tier measurement for the most representative time. You can also use the search field on the right to filter your search, as shown in Figure 9-22.
Figure 9-22 Filter your search
Depending on your browser settings, the file is downloaded to your default location, or you are prompted to save it to your computer. This file can be analyzed as described in 9.6, IBM Storage Tier Advisor Tool on page 433.
9.5 Easy Tier configuration using the CLI

In 9.4, Easy Tier configuration using the GUI on page 419 the process that is used to enable IBM Storwize V3700 Easy Tier by using the GUI is described. Easy Tier can also be configured by using the CLI. For the advanced user, this method offers several more options for Easy Tier configuration.
427
Before the CLI is used, you must configure CLI access, as described in Appendix A, Command-line interface setup and SAN Boot on page 593. Readability: In most examples shown in this section, many lines were deleted in the command output or responses so that we can concentrate on the Easy Tier related information only.
9.5.1 Enabling Easy Tier evaluation mode

If you want to enable Easy Tier in evaluation mode, you must enable Easy Tier on a single-tiered storage pool. Connect to your IBM Storwize V3700 by using the CLI and run the lsmdiskgrp command, as shown in Example 9-1. This command shows an overview about all configured storage pools and the Easy Tier status of the pool. In our example, there are two storage pools listed: mdiskgrp0 with Easy Tier inactive, and Multi_Tier_Pool with Easy Tier enabled.
Example 9-1 List storage pools
IBM_2072:admin>lsmdiskgrp id name status mdisk_count ... easy_tier easy_tier_status 0 mdiskgrp0 online 3 ... auto inactive 1 Multi_Tier_Pool online 3 ... auto active For a more detailed view of the single-tiered storage pool, run lsmdiskgrp storage pool name, as shown in Example 9-2.
Example 9-2 Storage Pools details - Easy Tier inactive
IBM_2072:admin>lsmdiskgrp mdiskgrp0 id 0 name mdiskgrp0 status online mdisk_count 3 ... easy_tier auto easy_tier_status inactive tier generic_ssd tier_mdisk_count 0 ... tier generic_hdd tier_mdisk_count 3 ... To enable Easy Tier on a single-tiered storage pool, run chmdiskgrp -easytier on storage pool name, as shown in Example 9-3. Because this storage pool does not have any SSD MDisks, it is not a multitiered storage pool; only measuring is available.
Example 9-3 Enable Easy Tier on a single-tiered storage pool
IBM_2072:admin>chmdiskgrp -easytier on mdiskgrp0 IBM_2072:admin>
428
Check the status of the storage pool again by running lsmdiskgrp storage pool name again, as shown in Example 9-4.
Example 9-4 Storage pool details: Easy Tier ON
IBM_2072:admin>lsmdiskgrp mdiskgrp0 id 0 name mdiskgrp0 status online mdisk_count 3 vdisk_count 7 ... easy_tier on easy_tier_status active tier generic_ssd tier_mdisk_count 0 ... tier generic_hdd tier_mdisk_count 3 ... Run the svcinfo lsmdiskgrp command again (as shown in Example 9-5) and you see that Easy Tier is turned on the storage pool now, but that Automatic Data Placement Mode is not active on the multitiered storage pool.
Example 9-5 Storage pool list
IBM_2072:admin>lsmdiskgrp id name status mdisk_count vdisk_count ... easy_tier easy_tier_status 0 mdiskgrp0 online 3 7 ... on active 1 Multi_Tier_Pool online 3 0 ... auto active To get the list of all the volumes that are defined, run the lsvdisk command, as shown in Example 9-6. For this example, we are only interested in the redhat1 volume.
Example 9-6 All volumes list
IBM_2072:admin>lsvdisk id name IO_group_id IO_group_name status 5 redhat1 0 io_grp0 online many ...
mdisk_grp_id many
To get a more detailed view of a volume, run the lsvdisk volume name command, as shown in Example 9-7. This output shows two copies of a volume. Copy 0 is in a multitiered storage pool and Automatic Data Placement is active, Copy 1 is in the single-tiered storage pool, and Easy Tier evaluation mode is active, as indicated by the easy_tier_status measured line.
Example 9-7 Volume details
IBM_2072:admin>lsvdisk redhat1 id 5 name redhat1 IO_group_id 0 IO_group_name io_grp0 status online mdisk_grp_id many mdisk_grp_name many
429
capacity 10.00GB ... copy_id 0 status online sync yes primary yes mdisk_grp_id 1 mdisk_grp_name Multi_Tier_Pool ... easy_tier on easy_tier_status active tier generic_ssd tier_capacity 0.00MB tier generic_hdd tier_capacity 10.00GB ... copy_id 1 status online sync yes primary no mdisk_grp_id 0 mdisk_grp_name mdiskgrp0 .... easy_tier on easy_tier_status measured tier generic_ssd tier_capacity 0.00MB tier generic_hdd tier_capacity 10.00GB ... These changes are also reflected in the GUI, as shown in Figure 9-23 on page 431. Select the Show Details option to view the details of the Easy Tier for each of the volume copies.
430
Figure 9-23 Easy Tier status by volume
Easy Tier evaluation mode is now active on the single-tiered storage pool (mdiskgrp0), but only for measurement. For more information about downloading the I/O statistics and analyzing them, see 9.4.2, Downloading Easy Tier I/O measurements on page 426.
9.5.2 Enabling or disabling Easy Tier on single volumes

If you enable Easy Tier on a storage pool, by default, all volume copies inside the Easy Tier pools also have it enabled. This setting applies both to multitiered and single-tiered storage pools. It is also possible to turn Easy Tier on and off for single volume copies. To disable Easy Tier on single volumes, run chvdisk -easytier off volume name, as shown in Example 9-8.
Example 9-8 Disable Easy Tier on a single volume
IBM_2072:admin>chvdisk -easytier off redhat1 IBM_2072:admin> This command disables Easy Tier on all copies of this volume. Example 9-9 shows that the Easy Tier status of the copies has changed, even if Easy Tier is still enabled on the storage pool.
Example 9-9 Easy Tier disabled
IBM_2072:admin>lsvdisk redhat1 id 5 name redhat1 IO_group_id 0 IO_group_name io_grp0
431
status online mdisk_grp_id many mdisk_grp_name many capacity 10.00GB ... copy_id 0 status online sync yes primary yes mdisk_grp_id 1 mdisk_grp_name Multi_Tier_Pool ... easy_tier off easy_tier_status meassured tier generic_ssd tier_capacity 0.00MB tier generic_hdd tier_capacity 10.00GB ... copy_id 1 status online sync yes primary no mdisk_grp_id 0 mdisk_grp_name mdiskgrp0 .... easy_tier off easy_tier_status measured tier generic_ssd tier_capacity 0.00MB tier generic_hdd tier_capacity 10.00GB ...
To enable Easy Tier on a volume, run the chvdisk -easytier on volume name command (as shown in Example 9-10), and the Easy Tier Status changes back to Enabled, as shown in Example 9-7 on page 429.
Example 9-10 Easy Tier enabled
IBM_2072:admin>chvdisk -easytier on redhat1 IBM_2072:admin>
432
9.6 IBM Storage Tier Advisor Tool

The IBM Storage Tier Advisor Tool (STAT) is a Windows console tool. If you run Easy Tier in evaluation mode, it analyzes the extents and estimates how much benefit you derive if you implement Easy Tier Automatic Data Placement with SSD MDisks. If Automatic Data Placement Mode is already active, the analysis also includes an overview of migrated hot data and recommendations about whether you can derive any benefit by adding more SSD drives. The output provides a graphical representation of the performance data collected by Easy Tier over a 24-hour operational cycle.
9.6.1 Creating graphical reports

STAT takes input from the dpa_heat log file and produces an HTML file that contains the report. Download the heat_log file, as described in 9.4.2, Downloading Easy Tier I/O measurements on page 426, and save it to the HDD of a Windows system. For more information about the tool and to download it, see this website: http://www-01.ibm.com/support/docview.wss?uid=ssg1S4000935 Click Start Run, enter cmd, and click OK to open a command prompt. Typically, the tool is installed in the C:\Program Files\IBM\STAT directory. Enter the following command to generate the report, as shown in Example 9-11: C:\Program Files\IBM\STAT>STAT.exe -o c:\directory_where_you_want_the output_to_go c:\location_of_dpa_heat_data_file If you do not specify -o c:\directory_where_you_want_the output_to_go, the output goes to the directory where the STAT.exe file is in.
Example 9-11 Generate HTML file
C:\EasyTier>STAT.exe -o C:\EasyTier C:\StorwizeV3700_Logs\dpa_heat.31G00KV-1.101 209.131801.data CMUA00019I The STAT.exe command has completed. C:\EasyTier> Browse the directory where you directed the output file, and there is a file named index.html. Open it with your browser to view the report.
433
9.6.2 STAT reports

If you open the index.html file of an IBM Storwize V3700 system that is in Easy Tier evaluation mode, a window opens that gives you an estimate of the benefit if you were to add SSD drives, as shown in Figure 9-24.
Figure 9-24 STAT report: System Summary
Important: Because this tool was first available for SAN Volume Controller and IBM Storwize V7000, you can ignore that it is showing IBM Storwize V7000 in the report. The STAT tool works on all SAN Volume Controller and Storwize systems. The System Summary window provides the most important numbers. In Figure 9-24, we see that 12 volumes were monitored with a total capacity of 6000 GB. The result of the analysis of the hot extents is that about 160 GB (which means 2%) that should be migrated to the high performance disk tier. It also recommends that one SSD RAID 5 array should be added as a high performance tier that consists of four SSD drives (3+P). This predicted performance improvement is the possible response time reduction at the backend in a balanced system is between 64% and 84%.
434
Click Volume Heat Distribution to change to a more detailed view, as shown in Figure 9-25.
Figure 9-25 Volume Heat Distribution window
The table in Figure 9-25 shows how the hot extents are distributed across your system. It contains the following information: Volume ID: The unique ID of each volume on the IBM Storwize V3700. Copy ID: If a volume owns more than one copy, the data is measured for each copy. Pool ID: The unique ID of each pool configured on the IBM Storwize V3700. Configured Size: The configured size of each volume that is represented to the host. Capacity on SSD: Capacity of the volumes on high performance disk tier (even in evaluation mode, volumes can be on high performance disk tiers if they were moved there before). Heat Distribution: Shows the heat distribution of the data in this volume. The blue portion of the bar represents the capacity of the cold extents, and the red portion represents the capacity of the hot extents. The red hot data is candidates to be moved to high performance disk tier.
435
9.7 Tivoli Storage Productivity Center

IBM Tivoli Storage Productivity Center provides a set of policy-driven automated tools for managing storage capacity, availability, events, performance, and assets in your enterprise environment. Tivoli Storage Productivity Center provides storage management from the host and application to the target storage device. It provides disk and tape subsystem configuration and management, performance management, SAN fabric management and configuration, and usage reporting and monitoring. In this section, we describe how to use Tivoli Storage Productivity Center to get usage reporting and to monitor performance data. Tivoli Storage Productivity Center can help you to identify, evaluate, control, and predict your enterprise storage management assets. Because it is policy-based, it can detect potential problems and automatically make adjustments that are based on the policies and actions that you define. For example, it can notify you when your system is running out of disk space or warn you of impending storage hardware failure. By alerting you to these and other issues that are related to your stored data, it enables you to prevent unnecessary system and application downtime.
9.7.1 Features of Tivoli Storage Productivity Center

Tivoli Storage Productivity Center includes the following features: Simplifies the management of storage infrastructures. Manages, configures and provisions SAN-attached storage. Monitors and tracks performance of SAN-attached devices. Monitors and tracks performance of SAN-attached devices. Monitors, manages, and controls (through zones) SAN fabric components. Manages the capacity usages and availability of the file systems and databases. Makes available Performance Monitoring and Reporting. View reports from web-based GUI. For more information about new features in Tivoli Storage Productivity Center 5.1, see this website: http://pic.dhe.ibm.com/infocenter/tivihelp/v59r1/index.jsp?topic=%2Fcom.ibm.tpc_V5 1.doc%2Ffqz0_r_whats_new_release_5.1.html
9.7.2 Adding IBM Storwize V3700 in Tivoli Storage Productivity Center

After the Tivoli Storage Productivity Center installation is complete, Tivoli Storage Productivity Center is ready to connect to the IBM Storwize V3700 system. Complete the following steps to set up this connection: 1. Browse to this website: http://<TPCsystemHostname>:9550/ITSRM/app/en_US/index.html Start Tivoli Storage Productivity Center, as shown in Figure 9-26 on page 437. You also find a link on the website to download IBM Java, if required. To start Tivoli Storage Productivity Center console, click TPC GUI (Java Web Start).
436
Figure 9-26 Tivoli Storage Productivity Center window
2. After you start Tivoli Storage Productivity Center, it starts an application download, as shown in Figure 9-27. During your first login, the required Java packages are installed to your local system.
Figure 9-27 Downloading Tivoli Storage Productivity Center application
3. Use your login credentials to access Tivoli Storage Productivity Center, as shown in Figure 9-28.
Figure 9-28 Tivoli Storage Productivity Center Login Access
437
4. After successful login, you are ready to add storage devices into Tivoli Storage Productivity Center, as shown in Figure 9-29.
Figure 9-29 Add Devices Console
5. Enter the information about your IBM Storwize V3700 in Tivoli Storage Productivity Center, as shown in Figure 9-30.
Figure 9-30 Configure device in Tivoli Storage Productivity Center
438
After you complete all of the required steps, follow the wizard. After it is completed, Tivoli Storage Productivity Center collects information from IBM Storwize V3700. A summary of details is shown at the end of discovery process.
9.8 Administering and reporting an IBM Storwize V3700 system through Tivoli Storage Productivity Center
This section shows examples of how to use Tivoli Storage Productivity Center to administer, configure and generate reports for IBM Storwize V3700 system. A detailed description about Tivoli Storage Productivity Center reporting is beyond the intended scope of this book.
9.8.1 Basic configuration and administration

Tivoli Storage Productivity Center allows you to administer, monitor, and configure your IBM Storwize V3700 system, but not all of the options that are normally associated with the IBM Storwize V3700 GUI or CLI are available. After successfully adding your IBM Storwize V3700 system, click Disk Manager Storage Subsystems to view your configured devices, as shown in Figure 9-31.
Figure 9-31 Storage Subsystem view
When you highlight the IBM Storwize V3700 system, action buttons become available that allows you to view the device configuration or create virtual disks (see Figure 9-32). MDisk Groups provides a detailed list of the configured MDisk groups including, pool space, available space, configured space and Easy Tier Configuration. Virtual Disks lists all the configured Volumes with the option to filter them by MDisk Group. The list includes several attributes, such as capacity, volume type, and type. Terms used: Tivoli Storage Productivity Center and SAN Volume Controller use the following terms: Virtual Disk: The equivalent of a Volume on a Storwize device MDisk Group: The equivalent of a Storage Pool on a Storwize device.
439
Figure 9-32 Action Buttons
If you click Create Virtual Disk, it opens the Create Virtual Disk wizard window, as shown in Figure 9-33. Use this window to create volumes that specify several options (such as size, name, thin provisioning) and add MDisks to an MDisk Group.
Figure 9-33 Virtual Disk wizard Creation
440
9.8.2 Report Generation by using the GUI

In this section, we show some report generation that uses the GUI. Create a probe to collect information from IBM Storwize V3700, as shown in Figure 9-34.
Figure 9-34 Create Probe
Add an IBM Storwize V3700 in the probe for collecting information, as shown in Figure 9-35.
Figure 9-35 Adding IBM Storwize V3700 in Probe
441
After you create the probe, you can create Subsystem Performance Monitor, as shown in Figure 9-36.
Figure 9-36 Create subsystem performance monitor
To check the Managed Disk performance, click Disk Manager Reporting Storage Subsystem Performance By Managed Disk. You see many options to include in the wizard to check MDisk performance, as shown in Figure 9-37.
Figure 9-37 Managed disk performance report filter specification
442
If you click the Generate Report option, you see a report, as shown in Figure 9-38.
Figure 9-38 MDisk performance report
Clicking the Pie chart icon creates a graphical chart view of the selected MDisk, as shown in Figure 9-39.
Figure 9-39 MDisk history chart
9.8.3 Report Generation using Tivoli Storage Productivity Center web page
In this section, we describe how to generate reports by using Tivoli Storage Productivity Center Web Console. To connect to the console, enter the following URL in your browser: https://tpchostname.com:9569/srm/ You see a login window, as shown in Figure 9-40 on page 444. Log in by using your Tivoli Storage Productivity Center credentials.
443
Figure 9-40 Tivoli Storage Productivity Center login window
After login, you see the Tivoli Storage Productivity Center web dashboard, as shown in Figure 9-41. The Tivoli Storage Productivity Center web-based GUI is used to show information about the storage resources in your environment. It contains predefined and custom reports about performance and storage tiering.
Figure 9-41 Tivoli Storage Productivity Center window
You can use IBM Tivoli Common Reporting to view predefined reports and create custom reports from the web-based GUI. We show some predefined reports, starting with the report that is shown in Figure 9-42.
Figure 9-42 Tivoli Storage Productivity Center web-based reporting
444
Figure 9-43 shows how to select predefined Storage Tiering reports.
Figure 9-43 Tivoli Storage Productivity Center Storage Tiering Reports
Figure 9-44 shows the different report options for Storage Tiering.
Figure 9-44 Details Reports
Figure 9-45 shows the output from VDisk Details Report.
Figure 9-45 VDisk Details Report
445
Figure 9-46 on page 446 shows the Report Overview in a pie chart.
Figure 9-46 Reporting Overview
Figure 9-47 shows the Easy Tier usage for volumes. To open this report in Tivoli Storage Productivity Center, click Storage Resources Volumes.
Figure 9-47 Volume Easy Tier usage
446
Figure 9-48 shows a detailed list of Storage Pools.
Figure 9-48 Pool Easy Tier information
Figure 9-49 shows Storage Virtualized Pool details in graph format.
Figure 9-49 Pool details
447
448
10
Chapter 10.
Copy services
In this chapter, we describe the copy services functions that are provided by the IBM Storwize V3700 storage system, including FlashCopy and Remote Copy. Copy services functions are useful for making data copies for backup, application test, recovery, and so on. The IBM Storwize V3700 system makes it easy to apply these functions to your environment through its intuitive GUI. This chapter includes the following topics: FlashCopy Remote Copy Troubleshooting Remote Copy Managing Remote Copy using the GUI
449
10.1 FlashCopy
By using the FlashCopy function of the IBM Storwize V3700 storage system, you can create a point-in-time copy of one or more volumes. In this section, we describe the structure of FlashCopy and provide details about its configuration and use. You can use FlashCopy to solve critical and challenging business needs that require the duplication of data on your source volume. Volumes can remain online and active while you create consistent copies of the data sets. Because the copy is performed at the block level, it operates below the host operating system and cache and therefore is not apparent to the host. Flushing: Because FlashCopy operates at the block level, which is below the host operating system and cache, those levels do need to be flushed for consistent FlashCopy copies. While the FlashCopy operation is performed, I/O to the source volume is frozen briefly to initialize the FlashCopy bitmap and then allowed to resume. Although several FlashCopy options require the data to be copied from the source to the target in the background (which can take time to complete), the resulting data on the target volume copy appears to have completed immediately. This task is accomplished through the use of a bitmap (or bit array) that tracks changes to the data after the FlashCopy is initiated and an indirection layer, which allows data to be read from the source volume transparently. License information: The IBM Storwize V3700 offers up to 64 FlashCopy mappings at no charge. However, other licenses can be purchased to expand to 2,040 FlashCopy mappings per system.
10.1.1 Business requirements for FlashCopy

When you are deciding if FlashCopy addresses your needs, you must adopt a combined business and technical view of the problems you want to solve. Determine what your needs are from a business perspective, and then determine if FlashCopy fulfills the technical needs of those business requirements. With an immediately available copy of the data, FlashCopy can be used in the following business scenarios: Rapidly creating consistent backups of dynamically changing data FlashCopy can be used to create backups through periodic execution; the FlashCopy target volumes can be used to complete a rapid restore of individual files or the entire volume through Reverse FlashCopy (by using the -restore option). The target volumes that are created by FlashCopy can also be used for backup to tape. Attaching them to another server and performing backups from there allows the production server to continue largely un-affected. After the copy to tape completes, the target volumes can be discarded or kept as a rapid restore copy of the data.
450
Rapidly creating consistent copies of production data to facilitate data movement or migration between hosts FlashCopy can be used to facilitate the movement or migration of data between hosts while minimizing downtime for applications. FlashCopy allows application data to be copied from source volumes to new target volumes while applications remain online. After the volumes are fully copied and synchronized, the application can be stopped and then immediately started on the new server accessing the new FlashCopy target volumes. This mode of migration is faster than other migration methods that are available through the IBM Storwize V3700 because the size and the speed of the migration is not as limited. Rapidly creating copies of production data sets for application development and testing Under normal circumstances, to perform application development and testing, data must be restored from traditional backup media, such as tape. Depending on the amount of data and the technology in use, this process easily can take a day or more. With FlashCopy, a copy can be created and online for use in a few minutes. The time varies based on the application and the data set size. Rapidly creating copies of production data sets for auditing purposes and data mining Auditing or data mining normally require the usage of the production applications. This situation can cause high loads for databases track inventories or similar data. With FlashCopy, you can create copies for your reporting and data mining activities. This feature reduces the load on your production systems, which increases their performance. Rapidly creating copies of production data sets for quality assurance Quality assurance is an interesting case for FlashCopy. Because traditional methods involve so much time and labor, the refresh cycle typically is extended. This reduction in time required allows much more frequent refreshes of the quality assurance database.
10.1.2 FlashCopy functional overview

FlashCopy occurs between a source volume and a target volume. The source and target volumes must be the same size. Multiple FlashCopy mappings (source-to-target relationships) can be defined, and point-in-time consistency can be maintained across multiple point-in-time mappings by using consistency groups. For more information about FlashCopy consistency groups, see FlashCopy consistency groups on page 456. The minimum granularity that IBM Storwize V3700 storage system supports for FlashCopy is an entire volume; it is not possible to use FlashCopy to copy only part of a volume. Additionally, the source and target volumes must belong to the same IBM Storwize V3700 storage system, but they do not have to be in the same storage pool. Before you start a FlashCopy (regardless of the type and options specified) the IBM Storwize V3700 must put the cache into write-through mode flushing the I/O currently bound for the source volume. If you are scripting FlashCopy operations from the CLI you must run the prestartfcmap or prestartfcconsistgrp command. However, this step is managed for you and carried out automatically by the GUI. This is not the same as flushing the host cache, which is not required. After FlashCopy is started, an effective copy of a source volume to a target volume is created. The content of the source volume is immediately presented on the target volume and the original content of the target volume is lost. This FlashCopy operation is also referred to as a time-zero copy (T0 ).
Chapter 10. Copy services
451
Immediately following the FlashCopy operation, both the source and target volumes are available for use. The FlashCopy operation creates a bitmap that is referenced and maintained to direct I/O requests within the source and target relationship. This bitmap is updated to reflect the active block locations as data is copied in the background from the source to target and updates are made to the source. Figure 10-1 shows the redirection of the host I/O toward the source volume and the target volume.
Figure 10-1 Redirection of host I/O
When data is copied between volumes, it is copied in units of address space known as grains. Grains are units of data that are grouped together to optimize the use of the bitmap that tracks changes to the data between the source and target volume. You have the option of using 64 KB or 256 KB grain sizes (256 KB is the default). The FlashCopy bitmap contains 1 bit for each grain and is used to track whether the source grain was copied to the target. The 64 KB grain size uses bitmap space at a rate of four times the default 256 KB size. The FlashCopy bitmap dictates the following read and write behavior for the source and target volumes: Read I/O request to source: Reads are performed from the source volume the same as for non-FlashCopy volumes. Write I/O request to source: Writes to the source cause the grains of the source volume to be copied to the target if they are not already and then the write is performed to the source. Read I/O request to target: Reads are performed from the target if the grains are already copied; otherwise, the read is performed from the source. Write I/O request to target: Writes to the target cause the grain to be copied from the source to the target first, unless the entire grain is being written and then the write completes to the target only.
FlashCopy mappings
A FlashCopy mapping defines the relationship between a source volume and a target volume. FlashCopy mappings can be stand-alone mappings or a member of a consistency group, as described in FlashCopy consistency groups on page 456. 452
Incremental FlashCopy mappings

In an incremental FlashCopy, the initial mapping copies all of the data from the source volume to the target volume. Subsequent FlashCopy mappings only copy data that was modified since the initial FlashCopy mapping. This action reduces the amount of time that it takes to re-create an independent FlashCopy image. You can define a FlashCopy mapping as incremental only when you create the FlashCopy mapping.
Multiple target FlashCopy mappings

You can copy up to 256 target volumes from a single source volume. Each relationship between a source and target volume is managed by a unique mapping such that a single volume can be the source volume for up to 256 mappings. Each of the mappings from a single source can be started and stopped independently. If multiple mappings from the same source are active (in the copying or stopping states), a dependency exists between these mappings. If a single source volume has multiple target FlashCopy volumes, the write to the source volume does not cause its data to be copied to all of the targets. Instead, it is copied to the newest target volume only. The older targets refer to new targets first before referring to the source. A dependency relationship exists between a particular target and all newer targets that share a source until all data is copied to this target and all older targets.
Cascaded FlashCopy mappings

The cascaded FlashCopy function allows a FlashCopy target volume to be the source volume of another FlashCopy mapping. Up to 256 mappings can exist in a cascade. If cascaded mappings and multiple target mappings are used, a tree of up to 256 mappings can be created. Cascaded mappings differ from multiple target FlashCopy mappings in depth. Cascaded mappings have an association in the manner of A > B > C, while multiple target FlashCopy has an association in the manner A > B1 and A > B2.
Background copy
The background copy rate is a property of a FlashCopy mapping defined as a value of 0 100. The background copy rate can be defined and dynamically changed for individual FlashCopy mappings. A value of 0 disables background copy. This option is also called the no-copy option, which provides pointer-based images for limited lifetime uses. With FlashCopy background copy, the source volume data is copied to the corresponding target volume in the FlashCopy mapping. If the background copy rate is set to 0, which means disable the FlashCopy background copy, only data that changed on the source volume is copied to the target volume. The benefit of the use of a FlashCopy mapping with background copy enabled is that the target volume becomes a real independent clone of the FlashCopy mapping source volume after the copy is complete. When the background copy is disabled, the target volume only remains a valid copy of the source data while the FlashCopy mapping remains in place. Copying only the changed data saves your storage capacity (assuming it is thin provisioned and -rsize was correctly set up.)
453
The relationship of the background copy rate value to the amount of data copied per second is shown in Table 10-1.
Table 10-1 Background copy rate Value 1 - 10 11 - 20 21 - 30 31 - 40 41 - 50 51 - 60 61 - 70 71 - 80 81 - 90 91 - 100 Data copied per second 128 KB 256 KB 512 KB 1 MB 2 MB 4 MB 8 MB 16 MB 32 MB 64 MB Grains per second (256 KB grain) 0.5 1 2 4 8 16 32 64 128 256 Grains per second (64 KB grain) 2 4 8 16 32 64 128 256 512 1024
Data copy rate: The data copy rate remains the same regardless of the FlashCopy grain size. The difference is the number of grains copied per second. The gain size can be 64 KB or 256 KB. The smaller size uses more bitmap space and thus limits the total amount of FlashCopy space possible, but can be more efficient regarding the amount of data moved, depending on your environment.
Cleaning rate
The cleaning rate provides a method for FlashCopy copies with dependant mappings (multiple target or cascaded) to complete their background copies before their source goes offline or is deleted after a stop is issued. When you create or modify a FlashCopy mapping, you can specify a cleaning rate for the FlashCopy mapping that is independent of the background copy rate. The cleaning rate is also defined as a value of 0 - 100, which has the same relationship to data copied per second as the backup copy rate (see Table 10-1 on page 454). The cleaning rate controls the rate at which the cleaning process operates. The cleaning process purpose is to copy (or flush) data from FlashCopy source volumes upon which there are dependent mappings. For cascaded and multiple target FlashCopy, the source maybe a target for another FlashCopy or a source for a chain (cascade) of FlashCopy mappings. The cleaning process must complete before the FlashCopy mapping can go to the stopped state. This feature and the distinction between stopping and stopped states was added to prevent data access interruption for dependent mappings, when their source is issued a stop.
FlashCopy mapping states

At any point in time, a mapping is in one of the following states: Idle or Copied The source and target volumes act as independent volumes even if a mapping exists between the two. Read and write caching is enabled for both the source and the target volumes. 454
If the mapping is incremental and the background copy is complete, the mapping only records the differences between the source and target volumes. If the connection to both nodes in the IBM Storwize V3700 storage system that the mapping is assigned to is lost, the source and target volumes go offline. Copying The copy is in progress. Read and write caching is enabled on the source and the target volumes. Prepared The mapping is ready to start. The target volume is online, but is not accessible. The target volume cannot perform read or write caching. Read and write caching is failed by the SCSI front end as a hardware error. If the mapping is incremental and a previous mapping has completed, the mapping only records the differences between the source and target volumes. If the connection to both nodes in the IBM Storwize V3700 storage system that the mapping is assigned to is lost, the source and target volumes go offline. Preparing The target volume is online, but not accessible. The target volume cannot perform read or write caching. Read and write caching is failed by the SCSI front end as a hardware error. Any changed write data for the source volume is flushed from the cache. Any read or write data for the target volume is discarded from the cache. If the mapping is incremental and a previous mapping has completed, the mapping records only the differences between the source and target volumes. If the connection to both nodes in the IBM Storwize V3700 storage system that the mapping is assigned to is lost, the source and target volumes go offline. Stopped The mapping is stopped because you issued a stop command or an I/O error occurred. The target volume is offline and its data is lost. To access the target volume, you must restart or delete the mapping. The source volume is accessible and the read and write cache is enabled. If the mapping is incremental, the mapping is recording write operations to the source volume. If the connection to both nodes in the IBM Storwize V3700 storage system that the mapping is assigned to is lost, the source and target volumes go offline. Stopping The mapping is in the process of copying data to another mapping. If the background copy process is complete, the target volume is online while the stopping copy process completes. If the background copy process is not complete, data is discarded from the target volume cache. The target volume is offline while the stopping copy process runs. The source volume is accessible for I/O operations. Suspended The mapping started, but it did not complete. Access to the metadata is lost, which causes the source and target volume to go offline. When access to the metadata is restored, the mapping returns to the copying or stopping state and the source and target volumes return online. The background copy process resumes. Any data that was flushed and written to the source or target volume before the suspension is in cache until the mapping leaves the suspended state.
455
FlashCopy consistency groups

Consistency groups address the requirement to preserve point-in-time data consistency across multiple volumes for applications having related data that spans them. For these volumes, consistency groups maintain the integrity of the FlashCopy by ensuring that dependent writes (which are described in more detail in Dependent writes on page 456) are run in the applications intended sequence. When consistency groups are used, the FlashCopy commands are issued to the FlashCopy consistency group, which performs the operation on all FlashCopy mappings that are contained within the consistency group. Figure 10-2 shows a consistency group consisting of two FlashCopy mappings.
Figure 10-2 FlashCopy consistency group
FlashCopy mapping management: After an individual FlashCopy mapping is added to a consistency group, it can only be managed as part of the group; operations such as start and stop are no longer allowed on the individual mapping.
Dependent writes
To show why it is crucial to use consistency groups when a data set spans multiple volumes, consider the following typical sequence of writes for a database update transaction: 1. A write is run to update the database log, which indicates that a database update is about to be performed. 2. A second write is run to complete the actual update to the database. 3. A third write is run to update the database log, indicating that the database update completed successfully. The database ensures the correct ordering of these writes by waiting for each step to complete before starting the next step. However, if the database log (updates 1 and 3) and the database (update 2) are on separate volumes, it is possible for the FlashCopy of the database volume to occur before the FlashCopy of the database log. This situation can result in the target volumes seeing writes (1) and (3) but not (2), because the FlashCopy of the database volume occurred before the write completed.
456
In this case, if the database was restarted by using the backup that was made from the FlashCopy target volumes, the database log indicates that the transaction completed successfully when, in fact, it had not. This situation occurs because the FlashCopy of the volume with the database file was started (bitmap was created) before the write had completed to the volume. Therefore, the transaction is lost and the integrity of the database is in question. To overcome the issue of dependent writes across volumes and to create a consistent image of the client data, it is necessary to perform a FlashCopy operation on multiple volumes as an atomic operation using consistency groups. A FlashCopy consistency group can contain up to 512 FlashCopy mappings. The more mappings you have, the more time it takes to prepare the consistency group. FlashCopy commands can then be issued to the FlashCopy consistency group and simultaneously for all of the FlashCopy mappings that are defined in the consistency group. For example, when starting the FlashCopy for the consistency group, all FlashCopy mappings in the consistency group are started at the same time, resulting in a point-in-time copy that is consistent across all FlashCopy mappings that are contained in the consistency group. A consistency group aggregates FlashCopy mappings, not volumes. Thus, where a source volume has multiple FlashCopy mappings, they can be in the same or separate consistency groups. If a particular volume is the source volume for multiple FlashCopy mappings, you might want to create separate consistency groups to separate each mapping of the same source volume. Regardless of whether the source volume with multiple target volumes is in the same consistency group or in separate consistency groups, the resulting FlashCopy produces multiple identical copies of the source data. The consistency group can be specified when the mapping is created. You can also add the FlashCopy mapping to a consistency group or change the consistency group of a FlashCopy mapping later. Important: Do not place stand-alone mappings into a consistency group because they become controlled as part of that consistency group.
FlashCopy consistency group states

At any point, a FlashCopy consistency group is in one of the following states: Idle or Copied All FlashCopy Mappings in this consistency group are in the Idle or Copied state. Preparing At least one FlashCopy mapping in this consistency group is in the Preparing state. Prepared The consistency group is ready to start. While in this state, the target volumes of all FlashCopy mappings in this consistency group are not accessible. Copying At least one FlashCopy mapping in the consistency group is in the Copying state and no FlashCopy mappings are in the Suspended state. Stopping At least one FlashCopy mapping in the consistency group is in the Stopping state and no FlashCopy mappings are in the Copying or Suspended state.
457
Stopped The consistency group is stopped because you issued a command or an I/O error occurred. Suspended At least one FlashCopy mapping in the consistency group is in the Suspended state. Empty The consistency group does not have any FlashCopy mappings.
Reverse FlashCopy
Reverse FlashCopy enables FlashCopy targets to become restore points for the source without breaking the FlashCopy relationship and without waiting for the original copy operation to complete. It supports multiple targets and multiple rollback points. A key advantage of Reverse FlashCopy is that it does not delete the original target, thus allowing processes that use the target, such as a tape backup, to continue uninterrupted. You can also create an optional copy of the source volume that is made before you start the reverse copy operation. This copy restores the original source data, which can be useful for diagnostic purposes. Figure 10-3 shows an example of the reverse FlashCopy scenario.
Figure 10-3 Reverse FlashCopy scenario
458
To restore from a FlashCopy backup by using the GUI, complete the following steps: 1. (Optional) Create a target volume (volume Z) and run FlashCopy on the production volume (volume X) to copy data on to the new target for later problem analysis. 2. Create a FlashCopy map with the backup to be restored (volume Y) or (volume W) as the source volume and volume X as the target volume. 3. Start the FlashCopy map (volume Y volume X). The -restore option: In the CLI, you must add the -restore option to the command svctask startfcmap manually. For more information about the use of the CLI, see Appendix A, Command-line interface setup and SAN Boot on page 593.
Regardless of whether the initial FlashCopy map (volume X to volume Y) is incremental, the Reverse FlashCopy operation only copies the modified data. Consistency groups are reversed by creating a set of new reverse FlashCopy maps and adding them to a new reverse consistency group. Consistency groups cannot contain more than one FlashCopy map with the same target volume. For more information about restoring from a FlashCopy, see Restoring from a FlashCopy on page 484.
10.1.3 Planning for FlashCopy

There are several items that must be considered before a FlashCopy is performed, which we describe in this section.
Guidelines for FlashCopy implementation

Consider the following guidelines for FlashCopy implementation: The source and target volumes must be on the same IBM Storwize V3700 storage system. The source and target volumes do not need to be in the same storage pool. The FlashCopy source and target volumes can be thin-provisioned. The source and target volumes must be the same size. The size of the source and target volumes cannot be altered (increased or decreased) while a FlashCopy mapping is defined. FlashCopy operations perform in direct proportion to the performance of the source and target disks. If you have a fast source disk and slow target disk, the performance of the source disk is reduced because it must wait for the write operation to occur at the target before it can write to the source.
Maximum configurations for FlashCopy

Table 10-2 shows some of the FlashCopy maximum configurations. For more information about the latest values, see the IBM Storwize V3700 Information Center at this website: http://www.ibm.com/support/docview.wss?rs=591&uid=ssg1S1004380
Table 10-2 FlashCopy maximum configurations FlashCopy property FlashCopy targets per source FlashCopy mappings per cluster Maximum 256 4,096
459
FlashCopy property FlashCopy consistency groups per cluster FlashCopy mappings per consistency group
Maximum 127 512
FlashCopy presets
The IBM Storwize V3700 storage system provides three FlashCopy presets, named Snapshot, Clone, and Backup, to simplify the more common FlashCopy operations (Table 10-3).
Table 10-3 FlashCopy presets Preset Snapshot Purpose Creates a point-in-time view of the production data. The snapshot is not intended to be an independent copy, but is used to maintain a view of the production data at the time the snapshot is created. This preset automatically creates a thin-provisioned target volume with 0% of the capacity allocated at the time of creation. The preset uses a FlashCopy mapping with 0% background copy so that only data written to the source or target is copied to the target volume. Creates an exact replica of the volume, which can be changed without affecting the original volume. After the copy operation completes, the mapping that was created by the preset is automatically deleted. This preset automatically creates a volume with the same properties as the source volume and creates a FlashCopy mapping with a background copy rate of 50. The FlashCopy mapping is configured to automatically delete itself when the FlashCopy mapping reaches 100% completion. Creates a point-in-time replica of the production data. After the copy completes, the backup view can be refreshed from the production data, with minimal copying of data from the production volume to the backup volume. This preset automatically creates a volume with the same properties as the source volume. The preset creates an incremental FlashCopy mapping with a background copy rate of 50.
Clone
Backup
Presets: All of the presets can be adjusted by using the Advanced Settings expandable section in the GUI.
10.1.4 Managing FlashCopy by using the GUI

The IBM Storwize V3700 storage system provides a separate function icon to access copy service management. The following windows are available for managing FlashCopy under the Copy Services function icon: FlashCopy Consistency Groups FlashCopy Mappings
460
The Copy Services function icon is shown in Figure 10-4.
Figure 10-4 Copy services function icon
Most of the actions to manage the FlashCopy mapping can be done in the FlashCopy window or the FlashCopy Mappings windows, although the quick path to create FlashCopy presets can only be found in the FlashCopy window.
461
Click FlashCopy in the Copy Services function icon menu and the FlashCopy window opens, as shown in Figure 10-5. In the FlashCopy window, the FlashCopy mappings are organized by volumes.
Figure 10-5 FlashCopy window
Click FlashCopy Mappings in the Copy Services function icon menu and the FlashCopy Mappings window opens, as shown in Figure 10-6. In the FlashCopy Mappings window, the FlashCopy mappings are listed individually.
Figure 10-6 FlashCopy Mappings window
462
The Consistency Groups window is used to manage the consistency groups for FlashCopy mappings. Click Consistency Groups in the Copy Services function icon menu and the Consistency Groups window opens, as shown in Figure 10-7.
Figure 10-7 Consistency Groups window
Quick path to create FlashCopy presets

It is easy to create a FlashCopy by using the presets in the FlashCopy window.
Creating a snapshot
In the FlashCopy window, choose a volume and click New Snapshot from the Actions drop-down menu, as shown in Figure 10-8. Alternatively, highlight your chosen volume and right-click to access the Actions menu.
Figure 10-8 Create a snapshot using the preset
463
You now have a snapshot volume for the volume that you selected.
Creating a clone
In the FlashCopy window, choose a volume and click New Clone from the Actions drop-down menu, as shown in Figure 10-9. Alternatively, highlight your chosen volume and right-click to access the Actions menu.
Figure 10-9 Create a clone from the preset
You now have a clone volume for the volume that you selected.
464
Creating a backup
In the FlashCopy window, choose a volume and click New Backup from the Actions drop-down menu, as shown in Figure 10-10. Alternatively, highlight your chosen volume and right-click to access the Actions menu.
Figure 10-10 Create a backup from the preset
You now have a backup volume for the volume that you selected. You can monitor the progress of the running FlashCopy operations in the FlashCopy window and in the FlashCopy Mappings window, as shown in Figure 10-11. The progress bars for each target volume indicate the copy progress in percentage. The copy progress remains 0% for snapshots; there is no change until data is written to the target volume. The copy progresses for clone and backup keep increasing until the copy process completes.
Figure 10-11 FlashCopy in progress viewed for the FlashCopy Mappings window
465
The copy progress can be also found under the Running Tasks status indicator, as shown in Figure 10-12.
Figure 10-12 Running tasks bar: FlashCopy operations
This view is slightly different than that of the FlashCopy and FlashCopy Mappings windows, as shown in Figure 10-13.
Figure 10-13 FlashCopy operations shown through Running Tasks
After the copy processes complete, you find the FlashCopy mapping with the clone preset (FlashVol2 in our example) is deleted automatically, as shown in Figure 10-14 on page 467. There are now two identical volumes completely independent of each other.
466
Figure 10-14 FlashCopy progresses complete
10.1.5 Managing FlashCopy mappings

The FlashCopy presets cover the most used FlashCopy configurations for general situations. However, customized FlashCopy mappings are still necessary in some complicated scenarios.
Creating FlashCopy mappings

You can create FlashCopy mappings through the FlashCopy window. Select the volume you want to be the source volume for the FlashCopy mapping and click Advanced FlashCopy... from the Actions drop-down menu, as shown in Figure 10-15 on page 468. Alternatively, select the volume and right-click.
467
Figure 10-15 Create advanced FlashCopy
You have the option to create target volumes as part of the mapping process or use existing target volumes. We describe creating new volumes next. For more information about use existing volumes, see Using existing target volumes on page 473.
Creating target volumes

Complete the following steps to create target volumes: 1. Click Create new target volumes if you have not created the target volume yet. After you click Create new target volumes, the wizard guides you to choose a preset., as shown in Figure 10-16. Choose one preset that has the most similar configuration to the one required and click Advanced Settings to make any appropriate adjustments to the advanced settings. Figure 10-17 on page 469 shows the default advanced settings for the snapshot preset.
Figure 10-16 Choose a preset most similar to your requirement
468
Figure 10-17 Default setting for the snapshot preset
The following default advanced settings are available: Background Copy: 0 Incremental: No Auto Delete after completion: No Cleaning Rate: 0
469
Figure 10-18 shows the Advanced Settings for the Clone Preset.
Figure 10-18 Default settings for the clone preset
The following advanced settings are available: Background Copy: 50 Incremental: No Auto Delete after completion: Yes Cleaning Rate: 50
470
Figure 10-19 shows the Advanced Settings for the Backup preset.
Figure 10-19 Default settings for the backup preset
The following advanced settings are available: Background Copy: 50 Incremental: Yes Auto Delete after completion: No Cleaning Rate: 50
Change the settings of the FlashCopy mapping according to your requirements and click Next. 2. You have the option to add your FlashCopy mapping to a consistency group, as shown in Figure 10-20 on page 471. If the consistency group is not ready, the FlashCopy mapping can be added to the consistency group afterward. Click Next to continue.
Figure 10-20 Add FlashCopy mapping to a consistency group
471
You can choose from which storage pool you want to create your target volume. As shown in Figure 10-21, you can select the same storage pool that is used by the source volume or a different one. Click Next to continue.
Figure 10-21 Choose use the same storage pool with the source volume
Next you have the option to define how the new target volumes manage capacity. Create a generic volume is your default choice if you selected Clone or Backup as your basic preset. If you select a thin-provisioned volume, you see more options, as shown in Figure 10-22 on page 472.
Figure 10-22 Create a thin provisioned target volume
3. Click Finish and a task runs to create the mappings and volume, as shown in Figure 10-23 on page 473. Close this window to see the FlashCopy mapping that was created on your volume with a new target, as shown in Figure 10-24 on page 473. The status of the created FlashCopy mapping is Idle; it can be started, as described in Starting a FlashCopy mapping on page 476.
472
Figure 10-23 Advanced FlashCopy create task complete
Figure 10-24 New FlashCopy mapping has been created with a new target
Using existing target volumes

Complete the following steps to use the existing target volumes: 1. In the Advanced FlashCopy menu, if you already have candidate target volumes, select Use Existing Target Volumes, as shown in Figure 10-25 on page 474.
473
Figure 10-25 Create FlashCopy mapping using existing target volume
2. You now must choose the target volume for the source volume you selected. Select the target volume in the drop-down menu in the right pane of the window and click Add, as shown in Figure 10-26.
Figure 10-26 Select the target volume
3. The FlashCopy mapping is now listed, as shown in Figure 10-27 on page 475. Click the red X if the FlashCopy mapping is not the one you want to create. If the FlashCopy mapping is what you want, click Next to continue.
474
Figure 10-27 Add FlashCopy mapping
4. Select the preset and, if necessary, adjust the settings by using Advanced Settings, as shown in Figure 10-28. For more information about the advanced settings, see Creating target volumes on page 468. Make sure that the settings meet your requirements and click Next.
Figure 10-28 Select a preset and make your adjustments
475
5. Now you can add the FlashCopy mapping to a consistency group if necessary, as shown in Figure 10-29. Select Yes to see a drop-down menu from which you can select a consistency group. Click Finish and the FlashCopy mapping is created with the Idle status, as shown in Figure 10-24.
Figure 10-29 Select a consistency group to add the FlashCopy mapping to
New FlashCopy Mappings

You can also create FlashCopy mappings in the FlashCopy Mappings window by clicking New FlashCopy Mapping at the upper left, as shown in Figure 10-30.
Figure 10-30 Create a FlashCopy mapping in the FlashCopy Mappings window
A wizard opens to guide you through the creation of a FlashCopy mapping. The steps are the same as creating an Advanced FlashCopy mapping by using Existing Target Volumes, as described in Using existing target volumes on page 473.
Starting a FlashCopy mapping

Most of the FlashCopy mapping actions are available in the FlashCopy window or the FlashCopy Mapping window. For the actions that are available in both windows, we show in the following sections the steps in the FlashCopy window, although the steps are the same if you were to use the FlashCopy Mapping window.
476
You can start the mapping by selecting the FlashCopy target volume in the FlashCopy window and selecting the Start option from the Actions drop-down menu (see Figure 10-31) or by selecting the volume and right-clicking. The status of the FlashCopy mapping changes from Idle to Copying.
Figure 10-31 Start FlashCopy mapping
Stopping a FlashCopy mapping

The FlashCopy mapping can be stopped by selecting the FlashCopy target volume in the FlashCopy window and clicking the Stop option from the Actions drop-down menu, as shown in Figure 10-32 on page 478. After the stopping process completes, the status of the FlashCopy mapping is changed to Stopped.
477
Figure 10-32 Stopping a FlashCopy mapping
Renaming the target volume

If the FlashCopy target volumes were created automatically by IBM Storwize V3700 storage system, the name of the target volumes is the source volume name plus a suffix that contains numbers. The name of the target volumes can be changed to be more meaningful in your environment. To change the name of the target volume, select the FlashCopy target volume in the FlashCopy window and click Rename Target Volume from the Actions drop-down menu (see Figure 10-33) or right-click the selected volume.
Figure 10-33 Rename a target volume
478
Enter your new name for the target volume, as shown in Figure 10-34. Click Rename to finish.
Figure 10-34 Rename a target volume
Renaming a FlashCopy mapping

The FlashCopy mappings are created with names that begin with fcmap. The name of FlashCopy mappings can be changed to be more meaningful to you. To change the name of a FlashCopy mapping, select the FlashCopy mapping in the FlashCopy Mappings window and click the Rename Mapping option from the Actions drop-down menu, as shown in Figure 10-35.
Figure 10-35 Rename a FlashCopy mapping
You must enter your new name for the FlashCopy mapping, as shown in Figure 10-36 on page 480. Click Rename to finish.
479
Figure 10-36 Enter a new name for the FlashCopy mapping
Deleting a FlashCopy mapping

The FlashCopy mapping can be deleted by selecting the FlashCopy target volume in the FlashCopy window and clicking the Delete Mapping option from the Actions drop-down menu (see Figure 10-37) or by right-clicking the selected volume.
Figure 10-37 Select Delete Mapping
FlashCopy Mapping state: If the FlashCopy mapping is in the Copying state, it must be stopped before it is deleted.
480
You must confirm your action to delete FlashCopy mappings in the window that opens, as shown in Figure 10-38. Verify the number of FlashCopy mappings that you must delete. If you want to delete the FlashCopy mappings while the data on the target volume is inconsistent with the source volume, select the option to do so. Click Delete and your FlashCopy mapping is removed.
Figure 10-38 Confirm the deletion of FlashCopy mappings
Deleting FlashCopy mapping: Deleting the FlashCopy mapping does not delete the target volume. If you must reclaim the storage space that is occupied by the target volume, you must delete the target volume manually.
Showing Related Volumes

You can show the FlashCopy mapping dependencies by selecting a target or source volume in the FlashCopy window and clicking the Show Related Volumes option from the Actions drop-down menu (see Figure 10-39 on page 481) or right-clicking the selected volume.
Figure 10-39 Show Related Volumes menu
481
The FlashCopy mapping dependency tree opens, as shown in Figure 10-40.
Figure 10-40 FlashCopy mapping dependency
Clicking either volume shows the properties of the volume, as shown in Figure 10-41.
Figure 10-41 Target FlashCopy Volume details
Editing properties
The background copy rate and cleaning rate can be changed after the FlashCopy mapping is created by selecting the FlashCopy target mapping in the FlashCopy window and clicking the Edit Properties option from the Actions drop-down menu (as shown in Figure 10-42 on page 483) or by right-clicking.
482
Figure 10-42 Edit Properties menu
You can then modify the value of the background copy rate and cleaning rate by moving the pointers on the bars, as shown in Figure 10-43. Click Save to save changes.
Figure 10-43 Change the copy rate
483
Restoring from a FlashCopy

Complete the following steps to manipulate FlashCopy target volumes to restore a source volume to a previously known state: 1. Identify the FlashCopy relationship that you want to restore. In our example, we want to restore FlashVol1, shown in Figure 10-44.
Figure 10-44 Starting FlashCopy restore
484
2. Create a mapping by using the target volume of the mapping to be restored. In our case, it is FlashVol1_01, as shown in Figure 10-45. Select Advanced FlashCopy Use Existing Target Volumes.
Figure 10-45 Create new reverse mapping
3. The Source Volume is preselected with the target volume that we selected in the previous step. Select the Target Volume from the drop-down menu. Select the source volume that you want to restore. In our case, it is FlashVol1, as shown in Figure 10-46.
Figure 10-46 Select Target Volume
485
4. Click Add. As shown in Figure 10-47, a warning appears because we are using a source as a target. Click Close.
Figure 10-47 Flash restore warning
5. Click Next and you see a Snapshot preset choice, as shown in Figure 10-48.
Figure 10-48 Choose snapshot preset.
Select Snapshot and click Next
486
6. In the next window, the question is asked if the new mapping is to be part of a consistency group, as shown in Figure 10-49. In our example the new mapping is not part of the consistency group, so we click No and then Finish to create the mapping.
Figure 10-49 Add new mapping to consistency group
7. The reverse mapping is created and is shown in the Idle state, as shown in Figure 10-50.
Figure 10-50 New reverse mapping
487
8. To restore the original source volume FlashVol1 with the snapshot we took FlashVol1_01, we select the new mapping and right-click for the Actions menu, as shown in Figure 10-51.
Figure 10-51 Starting the reverse mapping
9. Clicking Start results in FlashVol1 being over written with the original bitmap data that was saved in the FlashCopy FlashVol01_01. The command completes, as shown in Figure 10-52.
Figure 10-52 Restore command
Important: The underlying command that is run by the IBM Storwize V3700 appends the -restore option automatically.
488
10.The reverse mapping now shows as 100% copied, as shown in Figure 10-53.
Figure 10-53 Source volume restore complete
10.1.6 Managing a FlashCopy consistency group

FlashCopy consistency groups can be managed by clicking the Consistency Groups menu that is under the Copy Services function icon, as shown in Figure 10-54.
Figure 10-54 Access to the Consistency Groups window
489
The Consistency Groups window (see Figure 10-55) is where you can manage consistency groups and FlashCopy mappings.
Figure 10-55 Consistency Groups window
In the left pane of the Consistency Groups window, you can list the consistency groups you need. Click Not in a Group, and then expand your selection by clicking the plus icon (+) next to it. All the FlashCopy mappings that are not in any consistency groups are shown. In the lower pane of the Consistency Groups window, you can see the properties of a consistency group and the FlashCopy mappings in it. You can also work with any consistency groups and FlashCopy mappings within the Consistency Groups window, as allowed by their state. All the actions that are allowed for the FlashCopy mapping are described in 10.1.5, Managing FlashCopy mappings on page 467.
Creating a FlashCopy consistency group

To create a FlashCopy consistency group, click New Consistency Group at the top of the Consistency Groups window, as shown in Figure 10-56.
Figure 10-56 New Consistency Group option
490
You are prompted to enter the name of the new consistency group, as shown in Figure 10-57. Following your naming conventions, enter the name of the new consistency group in the field and click Create.
Figure 10-57 Enter the name for the consistency group
After the creation process completes, you find a new consistency group, as shown in Figure 10-58.
Figure 10-58 New consistency group
You can rename the Consistency Group by highlighting it and right-clicking or by using the Actions drop-down menu. Select Rename and enter the new name, as shown in Figure 10-59. Next to the name of the consistency group, the state shows that it is now an empty consistency group with no FlashCopy mapping in it.
Figure 10-59 Renaming a consistency group
491
Adding FlashCopy mappings to a consistency group

Click Not in a Group to list all the FlashCopy mappings with no Consistency Group. You can add FlashCopy mappings to a Consistency Group by selecting them and clicking the Move to Consistency Group option from the Actions drop-down menu, as shown in Figure 10-60.
Figure 10-60 Select the FlashCopy mappings to add to a consistency group
Important: You cannot move mappings that are in the process of copying. Selecting a snapshot that is already running makes the Move to Consistency Group option unavailable.
Selections of a range are performed by highlighting a mapping, pressing and holding the Shift key, and clicking the last item in the range. Multiple selections can be made by pressing and holding the Ctrl key and clicking each mapping individually. The option is also available by right-clicking individual mappings. You are prompted to specify which consistency group you want to move the FlashCopy mapping into, as shown in Figure 10-61. Choose from the list in the drop-down menu. Click Move to Consistency Group to continue.
Figure 10-61 Select consistency group
After the action completes, you find that the FlashCopy mappings you selected are removed from the Not In a Group list to the consistency group you chose.
492
Starting a consistency group

To start a consistency group, highlight the required group and click Start from the Actions drop-down menu or right-click the consistency group, as shown in Figure 10-62.
Figure 10-62 Start a consistency group
After you start the consistency group, all the FlashCopy mappings in the consistency group start at the same point. The state of the consistency group and all the underlying mappings changes to Copying, as shown in Figure 10-63.
Figure 10-63 Consistency group start completes
493
Stopping a consistency group

The consistency group can be stopped by selecting Stop from the Actions drop-down menu or right-clicking, as shown in Figure 10-64.
Figure 10-64 Stop a consistency group
After the stop process completes, the FlashCopy mappings in the consistency group are in the Stopped state, and a red X icon appears on the function icon of this consistency group to indicate an alert, as shown in Figure 10-65.
Figure 10-65 Consistency group stop completes
Previously copied relationships that were added to a consistency group that was later stopped before all members of the consistency group completed synchronization do not go out of the Copied state.
494
Removing FlashCopy mappings from a consistency group

FlashCopy mappings can be removed from a consistency group by selecting the FlashCopy mappings and clicking Remove from Consistency Group from the Actions drop-down menu of the FlashCopy mapping or right-clicking, as shown in Figure 10-66.
Figure 10-66 Remove from consistency group
The FlashCopy mappings are returned to the Not in a Group list after being removed from the consistency group.
Deleting a consistency group

A consistency group can be deleted by clicking Delete from the Actions drop-down menu or right-clicking the selected group, as shown in Figure 10-67.
Figure 10-67 Delete a consistency group
495
Restoring from a FlashCopy Consistency Group

Complete the following steps to manipulate FlashCopy mappings that are captured as part of a consistency group to restore the source volumes of those mappings to the state they were all in at the time the FlashCopy was taken: 1. To restore a consistency group from a FlashCopy, we must create a reverse mapping of all the individual volumes contained within the original consistency group. In our example, we have two FlashCopy mappings (fcmap1 and fcmap4) in a consistency group known as FlashTestGroup, as shown in Figure 10-68.
Figure 10-68 Creating FlashCopy reverse mapping
2. Click New Consistency Group in the upper left corner (as shown in Figure 10-68) and create a consistency group. We created one that is called RedBookTest. 3. Follow the procedure that is described in Restoring from a FlashCopy on page 484 to create reverse mappings for each of the mappings that exist in the source consistency group (FlashTestGroup). When you are prompted to add to a consistency group as shown in Figure 10-49 on page 487, select Yes and from the drop-down menu, select the new reverse consistency group you created in step 2 (in our case, RedBookTest). The result is similar to that shown in Figure 10-69.
Figure 10-69 Reverse Consistency group populated
496
4. To restore the consistency group, highlight the reverse consistency group and click Start, as shown in Figure 10-70.
Figure 10-70 Starting Consistency group restore
5. Clicking Start results in FlashVol1 and FlashVol5 being over written with the original bitmap data that was saved in the FlashTestGroup FlashCopy consistency group mapping. The command completes as shown in Figure 10-71.
Figure 10-71 Consistency Group restore command
497
Important: The IBM Storwize V3700 automatically appends the -restore option to the command. 6. Clicking Close returns to the Consistency Group window. The reverse consistency group now shows as a 100% copied and all volumes in the original FlashTestGroup were restored, as shown in Figure 10-72.
Figure 10-72 Consistency Group restored
10.2 Remote Copy

In this section, we describe how the Remote Copy function works in IBM Storwize V3700. We also provide the implementation steps by using the GUI for Remote Copy configuration and management. Remote Copy consists of the following methods for copying: Metro Mirror: Designed for metropolitan distances with a synchronous copy requirement. Global Mirror: Designed for longer distances without requiring the hosts to wait for the full round-trip delay of the long-distance link through asynchronous methodology. Global Mirror with Change Volumes: An added piece of functionality for Global Mirror that is designed to attain consistency on lower-quality network links. Metro Mirror and Global Mirror are IBM branded terms for the functions Synchronous Remote Copy and Asynchronous Remote Copy. Throughout this book, the term Remote Copy is used to refer to both functions where the text applies to each term equally.
10.2.1 Remote Copy license consideration

The license settings only apply to the system on which you are configuring licenses. For remote-copy partnerships, a license is also required on any remote systems that are in the partnership. If a license is not purchased and activated before the trial period (90 days) expires, the system automatically suspends any configuration that is associated with the function. You can manually remove any configuration that is related to this function or select Monitoring Events in the management GUI. You can run the fix procedure that is related to the event that is generated when the trial license period expires.
498
10.2.2 Remote Copy concepts

In this section, we describe Remote Copy concepts.
Partnership
When a partnership is created, we connect two separate IBM Storwize V3700 systems or an IBM SAN Volume Controller, Storwize V3700, or Storwize V7000 and an IBM Storwize V3700. After the partnership creation is configured on both systems, further communication between the node canisters in each of the storage systems is established and maintained by the SAN network. All inter-cluster communication goes through the Fibre Channel network. Partnership must be defined on both IBM Storwize V3700 or on the IBM Storwize V3700 and the other IBM SAN Volume Controller, Storwize V3700, or Storwize V7000 storage system to make the partnership fully functional. Interconnection: Interconnects between IBM Storwize products were introduced in Version 6.3.0. Because IBM Storwize V3700 supports only version 7.10 or higher, there is no problem with support for this functionality. However, any other Storwize product must be at a minimum level of 6.3.0 to connect to the IBM Storwize V3700 and the IBM Storwize V3700 must set the replication layer by using the svctask chsystem -layer replication limitations that are described in Introduction to layers on page 499.
Introduction to layers
IBM Storwize V3700 implements the concept of layers. Layers determine how the IBM Storwize portfolio interacts with the IBM SAN Volume Controller. Currently, the following layers are available: replication and storage. The replication layer is used when you want to use the IBM Storwize V3700 with one or more IBM SAN Volume Controllers as a Remote Copy partner. The storage layer is the default mode of operation for the IBM Storwize V3700, and is used when you want to use the IBM Storwize V3700 to present storage to an IBM SAN Volume Controller. The layer for the IBM Storwize V3700 can be switched by running the svctask chsystem -layer replication command. Generally, switch the layer while your IBM Storwize V3700 system is not in production. This situation prevents potential disruptions because layer changes are not I/O-tolerant. Figure 10-73 shows the effect of layers on IBM SAN Volume Controller and IBM Storwize V3700 partnerships.
Figure 10-73 IBM Storwize V3700 virtualization layers
499
The replication layer allows an IBM Storwize V3700 system to be a Remote Copy partner with an IBM SAN Volume Controller, while the storage layer allows an IBM Storwize V3700 system to function as back-end storage for an IBM SAN Volume Controller. An IBM Storwize V3700 system cannot be in both layers at the same time.
Limitations on the SAN Volume Controller and Storwize V3700 partnership

IBM SAN Volume Controller and IBM Storwize V3700 systems can be partners in a Remote Copy partnership. However, the following limitations affect that partnership: The layer for the V3700 must be set to replication. The default is storage. If any other SAN Volume Controller or IBM Storwize V3700 ports are visible on the SAN (aside from the ones on the cluster where you are making changes), you cannot change the layer. If any host object is defined to an IBM SAN Volume Controller or IBM Storwize V3700 system, you cannot change the layer. If any MDisks from an IBM Storwize V3700 other than the one you are making the layer change on are visible, you cannot change the layer. If any cluster partnership is defined, you cannot change the layer.
Partnership topologies
A partnership between up to four IBM Storwize V3700 systems are allowed. The following typical partnership topologies between multiple IBM Storwize V3700s are available: Daisy-chain topology, as shown in Figure 10-74.
Figure 10-74 Daisy chain partnership topology for IBM Storwize V3700
Triangle topology, as shown in Figure 10-75.
Figure 10-75 Triangle partnership topology for IBM Storwize V3700
500
Star topology, as shown in Figure 10-76 on page 501.
Figure 10-76 Star topology for IBM Storwize V3700
Full-meshed topology, as shown in Figure 10-77.
Figure 10-77 Full-meshed topology
Partnerships: These partnerships are valid for configurations with SAN Volume Controllers and IBM Storwize V3700 systems if the IBM Storwize V3700 systems are using the replication layer. They are also valid for IBM Storwize V5000 and V7000 products.
Partnership states
A partnership has the following states: Partially Configured Indicates that only one cluster partner is defined from a local or remote cluster to the displayed cluster and is started. For the displayed cluster to be configured fully and to complete the partnership, you must define the cluster partnership from the cluster that is displayed to the corresponding local or remote cluster. Fully Configured Indicates that the partnership is defined on the local and remote clusters and is started.
501
Remote Not Present Indicates that the remote cluster is not present for the partnership. Partially Configured (Local Stopped) Indicates that the local cluster is only defined to the remote cluster and the local cluster is stopped. Fully Configured (Local Stopped) Indicates that a partnership is defined on the local and remote clusters and the remote cluster is present, but the local cluster is stopped. Fully Configured (Remote Stopped) Indicates that a partnership is defined on the local and remote clusters and the remote cluster is present, but the remote cluster is stopped. Fully Configured (Local Excluded) Indicates that a partnership is defined between a local and remote cluster; however, the local cluster is excluded. Usually this state occurs when the fabric link between the two clusters is compromised by too many fabric errors or slow response times of the cluster partnership. Fully Configured (Remote Excluded) Indicates that a partnership is defined between a local and remote cluster; however, the remote cluster is excluded. Usually this state occurs when the fabric link between the two clusters is compromised by too many fabric errors or slow response times of the cluster partnership. Fully Configured (Remote Exceeded) Indicates that a partnership is defined between a local and remote cluster and the remote is available; however, the remote cluster exceeds the number of allowed clusters within a cluster network. The maximum of four clusters can be defined in a network. If the number of clusters exceeds that limit, the IBM Storwize V3700 system determines the inactive cluster or clusters by sorting all the clusters by their unique identifier in numerical order. The inactive cluster partner that is not in the top four of the cluster-unique identifiers shows Fully Configured (Remote Exceeded).
Remote Copy relationships

A Remote Copy relationship is a relationship between two individual volumes of the same size. These volumes are called a master (source) volume and an auxiliary (target) volume. Typically, the master volume contains the production copy of the data and is the volume that the application normally accesses. The auxiliary volume typically contains a backup copy of the data and is used for disaster recovery. The master and auxiliary volumes are defined when the relationship is created, and these attributes never change. However, either volume can operate in the primary or secondary role as necessary. The primary volume contains a valid copy of the application data and receives updates from the host application, which is analogous to a source volume. The secondary volume receives a copy of any updates to the primary volume because these updates are all transmitted across the mirror link. Therefore, the secondary volume is analogous to a continuously updated target volume. When a relationship is created, the master volume is assigned the role of primary volume and the auxiliary volume is assigned the role of secondary volume. The initial copying direction is from master to auxiliary. When the relationship is in a consistent state, you can reverse the copy direction.
502
The two volumes in a relationship must be the same size. The Remote Copy relationship can be established on the volumes within one IBM Storwize V3700 storage system, which is called an intra-cluster relationship. The relationship can also be established in different IBM Storwize V3700 storage systems or between an IBM Storwize V3700 storage system and an IBM SAN Volume Controller, IBM Storwize V5000, or IBM Storwize V7000, which are called inter-cluster relationships. Usage of Remote Copy target volumes as Remote Copy source volumes is not allowed. A FlashCopy target volume can be used as Remote Copy source volume and as a Remote Copy target volume.
Metro Mirror
Metro Mirror is a type of Remote Copy that creates a synchronous copy of data from a master volume to an auxiliary volume. With synchronous copies, host applications write to the master volume but do not receive confirmation that the write operation completed until the data is written to the auxiliary volume. This action ensures that both volumes have identical data when the copy completes. After the initial copy completes, the Metro Mirror function maintains a fully synchronized copy of the source data at the target site at all times. Figure 10-78 shows how a write to the master volume is mirrored to the cache of the auxiliary volume before an acknowledgement of the write is sent back to the host that issued the write. This process ensures that the auxiliary is synchronized in real time if it is needed in a failover situation.
Figure 10-78 Write on volume in a Metro Mirror relationship
The Metro Mirror function supports copy operations between volumes that are separated by distances up to 300 km. For disaster recovery purposes, Metro Mirror provides the simplest way to maintain an identical copy on both the primary and secondary volumes. However, as with all synchronous copies over remote distances, there can be a performance impact to host applications. This performance impact is related to the distance between primary and secondary volumes and, depending on application requirements, its use might be limited based on the distance between sites.
503
Global Mirror
Global Mirror provides an asynchronous copy, which means that the secondary volume is not an exact match of the primary volume at every point. The Global Mirror function provides the same function as Metro Mirror Remote Copy without requiring the hosts to wait for the full round-trip delay of the long-distance link; however, some delay can be seen on the hosts in congested or overloaded environments. Make sure that you closely monitor and understand your workload. In asynchronous Remote Copy (which Global Mirror provides), write operations are completed on the primary site and the write acknowledgement is sent to the host before it is received at the secondary site. An update of this write operation is sent to the secondary site at a later stage, which provides the capability to perform Remote Copy over distances exceeding the limitations of synchronous Remote Copy. The distance of Global Mirror replication is limited primarily by the latency of the WAN Link provided. Global Mirror has a requirement of 80 ms round-trip-time for data sent to the remote location. The propagation delay is roughly 8.2 s per mile or 5 s per kilometer for Fibre Channel connections. Each device in the path adds delay of about 25 s. Devices that use software (such as some compression devices) adds much more time. The time that is added by software-assisted devices is highly variable and should be measured directly. Be sure to include these times when you are planning your Global Mirror design. You should also measure application performance that is based on the expected delays before Global Mirror is fully implemented. The IBM Storwize V3700 storage system provides you with an advanced feature of Global Mirror that permits you to test performance implications before Global Mirror is deployed and a long-distance link is obtained. This advanced feature is enabled by modifying the IBM Storwize V3700 storage system parameters gmintradelaysimulation and gminterdelaysimulation. These two parameters can be used to simulate the write delay to the secondary volume. The delay simulation can be enabled separately for each intra-cluster or inter-cluster Global Mirror. You can use this feature to test an application before the full deployment of the Global Mirror feature. For more information about how to enable the CLI feature, see Appendix A, Command-line interface setup and SAN Boot on page 593. Figure 10-79 on page 505 shows that a write operation to the master volume is acknowledged back to the host that is issuing the write before the write operation is mirrored to the cache for the auxiliary volume.
504
Figure 10-79 Global Mirror write sequence
The Global Mirror algorithms maintain a consistent image on the auxiliary volume at all times. They achieve this consistent image by identifying sets of I/Os that are active concurrently at the master, assigning an order to those sets, and applying those sets of I/Os in the assigned order at the secondary. In a failover scenario where the secondary site must become the master source of data, certain updates might be missing at the secondary site depending on the workload pattern and the bandwidth and distance between local and remote site. Therefore, any applications that use this data must have an external mechanism for recovering the missing updates and reapplying them; for example, a transaction log replay.
10.2.3 Global Mirror with Change Volumes

Global Mirror within the IBM Storwize V3700 is designed to achieve an RPO as low as possible so that data is as up-to-date as possible. This capability places some strict requirements on your infrastructure and in certain situations with low network link quality or congested or overloaded hosts, you maybe impacted by multiple 1920 (congestion) errors. Congestion errors happen in the following primary situations: Congestion at the source site through the host or network. Congestion in the network link or network path. Congestion at the target site through the host or network. Global Mirror has functionality that is designed to address the following conditions that negatively affect some Global Mirror implementations: Estimation of bandwidth requirements tends to be complex. It is often difficult to ensure that the latency and bandwidth requirements can be met. Congested hosts on either the source or target site can cause disruption. Congested network links can cause disruption with only intermittent peaks.
505
To address these issues, Change Volumes were added as an option for Global Mirror relationships. Change Volumes use the FlashCopy functionality but cannot be manipulated as FlashCopy volumes because they are special purpose only. Change Volumes replicate point-in-time images on a cycling period (the default is 300 seconds). This situation means that your change rate only needs to include the condition of the data at the point in time that the image was taken instead of all the updates during the period. This situation can provide significant reductions in replication volume. Figure 10-80 shows a basic Global Mirror relationship without Change Volumes.
Figure 10-80 Global Mirror without Change Volumes
Figure 10-81 shows the Change Volumes.
Figure 10-81 Global Mirror with Change Volumes
With Change Volumes, a FlashCopy mapping exists between the primary volume and the primary Change Volume. The mapping is updated during a cycling period (every 60 seconds to one day.) The primary Change Volume is then replicated to the secondary Global Mirror volume at the target site, which is then captured in another change volume on the target site. This situation provides an always consistent image at the target site and protects your data from being inconsistent during resynchronization. Take a closer look at how Change Volumes might reduce replication traffic.
506
Figure 10-82 shows a number of I/Os on the source volume and the same number on the target volume, and in the same order. Assuming that this set is the same set of data being updated over and over, these updates are wasted network traffic and the I/O can be completed much more efficiently, as shown in Figure 10-83.
Figure 10-82 Global Mirror I/O replication without Change Volumes
In Figure 10-83, the same data is being updated repeatedly, so Change Volumes demonstrate significant IO transmission savings because you only must send I/O number 16, which was the last I/O before the cycling period.
Figure 10-83 Global Mirror I/O replication with Change Volumes
The cycling period can be adjusted by running the chrcrelationship -cycleperiodseconds <60-86400> command. If a copy does not complete in the cycle period, the next cycle does not start until the prior one completes. It is for this reason that the use of Change Volumes gives you the following possibilities for RPO: If your replication completes in the cycling period, your RPO is twice the cycling period. If your replication does not complete within the cycling period, your RPO is twice the completion time. The next cycling period starts immediately after the prior one is finished. Careful consideration must be put into balancing your business requirements with the performance of Global Mirror with Change Volumes. Global Mirror with Change Volumes increases the inter-cluster traffic for more frequent cycling periods, so going as short as possible is not always the answer. In most cases, the default should meet your requirements and perform reasonably well.
507
Important: When Global Mirror volumes are used with Change Volumes, make sure that you remember to select the Change Volume on the auxiliary (target) site. Failure to do so leaves you exposed during a resynchronization operation. Also, the GUI automatically creates Change Volumes for you. However, it is a limitation of this initial release that they are fully provisioned volumes. To save space, you should create thin-provisioned volumes before and use the existing volume option to select your change volumes.
Remote Copy consistency groups

A consistency group is a logical entity that groups copy relationships. By grouping the relationships, you can ensure that these relationships are managed in unison and the data within the group is in a consistent state. For more information about the necessity of consistency groups, see 10.1.6, Managing a FlashCopy consistency group on page 489. Remote Copy commands can be issued to a Remote Copy consistency group, and therefore simultaneously for all Metro Mirror relationships that are defined within that consistency group or to a single Metro Mirror relationship that is not part of a Metro Mirror consistency group. Figure 10-84 shows the concept of Remote Copy consistency groups. Because the RC_Relationships 1 and 2 are part of the consistency group, they can be handled as one entity, while the stand-alone RC_Relationship 3 is handled separately.
Figure 10-84 Remote Copy consistency group
508
Remote Copy relationships can only belong to one consistency group, but they do not have to belong to a consistency group. Relationships that are not part of a consistency group are called stand-alone relationships. A consistency group can contain zero or more relationships. All relationships in a consistency group must have matching primary and secondary clusters, which are sometimes referred to as master and auxiliary clusters. All relationships in a consistency group must also have the same copy direction and state. Metro Mirror and Global Mirror relationships cannot belong to the same consistency group. A copy type is automatically assigned to a consistency group when the first relationship is added to the consistency group. After the consistency group is assigned a copy type, only relationships of that copy type can be added to the consistency group.
Remote Copy and consistency group states

Stand-alone Remote Copy relationships and consistency groups share a common configuration and state model. All of the relationships in a non-empty consistency group have the same state as the consistency group. The following states apply to the relationships and the consistency groups, except for the Empty state, which is only for consistency groups: InconsistentStopped The primary volumes are accessible for read and write I/O operations, but the secondary volumes are not accessible for either one. A copy process must be started to make the secondary volumes consistent. InconsistentCopying The primary volumes are accessible for read and write I/O operations, but the secondary volumes are not accessible for either one. This state indicates that a copy process is ongoing from the primary to the secondary volume. ConsistentStopped The secondary volumes contain a consistent image, but it might be outdated with respect to the primary volumes. This state can occur when a relationship was in the ConsistentSynchronized state and experiences an error that forces a freeze of the consistency group or the Remote Copy relationship. ConsistentSynchronized The primary volumes are accessible for read and write I/O operations. The secondary volumes are accessible for read-only I/O operations. Idling The primary volumes and the secondary volumes are operating in the primary role. Consequently, the volumes are accessible for write I/O operations. IdlingDisconnected The volumes in this half of the consistency group are all operating in the primary role and can accept read or write I/O operations. InconsistentDisconnected The volumes in this half of the consistency group are all operating in the secondary role and cannot accept read or write I/O operations.
509
ConsistentDisconnected The volumes in this half of the consistency group are all operating in the secondary role and can accept read I/O operations but not write I/O operations. Empty The consistency group does not contain any relationships.
10.2.4 Remote Copy planning

Before you use Remote Copy, you must plan for its usage.
General guidelines for Remote Copy

General guidelines for Remote Copy include the following items: The remote mirroring license must be acquired for the primary and remote systems. Partnerships between up to four IBM Storwize V3700 storage systems, IBM SAN Volume Controller systems, IBM Storwize VXXXX, or IBM Storwize V3700 is allowed. The partnership must be defined on any partnered IBM Storwize storage systems or IBM SAN Volume Controller systems to make it fully functional. The two volumes in a relationship must be the same size. The Remote Copy relationship can be established on the volumes within one IBM Storwize V3700 storage system or in different IBM Storwize V3700 storage systems. You cannot use Remote Copy target volumes as Remote Copy source volumes. However, a FlashCopy target volume can be used as Remote Copy source volume. There are other restrictions outlined in Table 10-5 on page 512. The Metro Mirror function supports copy operations between volumes that are separated by distances up to 300 km. One Remote Copy relationship can only belong to one consistency group. All relationships in a consistency group must have matching primary and secondary clusters, which are sometimes referred to as master and auxiliary clusters. All relationships in a consistency group must also have the same copy direction and state. Metro Mirror and Global Mirror relationships cannot belong to the same consistency group. To manage multiple Remote Copy relationships as one entity, relationships can be made part of a Remote Copy consistency group, which ensures data consistency across multiple Remote Copy relationships and provides ease of management. An IBM Storwize V3700 storage system implements flexible resynchronization support, enabling it to resynchronize volume pairs that have experienced write I/Os to both disks and to resynchronize only those regions that are known to have changed. Global Mirror with Change Volumes should have Change Volumes defined for the master and auxiliary volumes.
510
Remote Copy configuration limits

Table 10-4 lists the Remote Copy configuration limits.
Table 10-4 Remote Copy configuration limits Parameter Number of Remote Copy consistency groups per cluster Number of Remote Copy relationships per consistency group Total Remote Copy volume capacity per system. Value 256 8,192 1024 TB
SAN planning for Remote Copy

In this section, we describe some guidelines for planning for a SAN for Remote Copy.
Zoning recommendation
Node canister ports on each IBM Storwize V3700 must communicate with each other for the partnership creation to be performed. These ports must be visible to each other on your SAN. Proper switch zoning is critical to facilitating inter-cluster communication. The following SAN zoning recommendations can be considered: For each node canister, exactly two Fibre Channel ports should be zoned to exactly two Fibre Channel ports from each node canister in the partner cluster. If dual-redundant inter-switch links (ISLs) are available, the two ports from each node should be split evenly between the two ISLs; that is, exactly one port from each node canister should be zoned across each ISL. For more information, see this website: http://www-01.ibm.com/support/docview.wss?uid=ssg1S1003634&myns=s033&mynp=famil yind5329743&mync=E Additionally, all local zoning rules should be followed. A properly configured SAN fabric is key to not only local SAN performance, but Remote Copy. For more information, see this website: http://pic.dhe.ibm.com/infocenter/storwize/v3700_ic/index.jsp?topic=%2Fcom.ibm. storwize.v3700.641.doc%2Fv3700_ichome_641.html
Fabrics: When a local fabric and a remote fabric are connected for Remote Copy purposes, the ISL hop count between a local node and a remote node cannot exceed seven.
Remote Copy link requirements

The following link requirements are valid for Metro Mirror and Global Mirror: Round-trip latency The total round-trip latency must be less than 80 ms, and less than 40 ms in each direction. Latency simulations should be performed with your applications before any network links are put in place to see if the applications perform at an acceptable level while meeting the round-trip latency requirement.
511
Bandwidth The bandwidth must satisfy the following requirements: If you are not using Change Volumes: Can sustain peak write load for all mirrored volumes and background copy traffic. If you are using Change Volumes with Global Mirror: Can sustain change rate of Source Change Volumes and background copy traffic. More background copy rate (the best practice is 10% to 20% of maximum peak load) for initial synchronization and resynchronization. Remote Copy internal communication at idle with or without Change Volumes is approximately 2.6 Mbps (the minimum amount). Redundancy: If the link between two sites is configured with redundancy so that it can tolerate single failures, the link must be sized so that the bandwidth and latency requirement can be met during single failure conditions.
Interaction between Remote Copy and FlashCopy

Table 10-5 lists which combinations of FlashCopy and Remote Copy are supported.
Table 10-5 FlashCopy and Remote Copy interaction Component FlashCopy source Remote Copy primary Supported Remote Copy secondary Supported. When the FlashCopy relationship is in the Preparing and Prepared states, the cache at the Remote Copy secondary site operates in write-through mode. This process adds latency to the already latent Remote Copy relationship. This combination is supported with the restriction that the FlashCopy mapping cannot be copying, stopping, or suspended. Otherwise, the restrictions are the same as at the Remote Copy primary site.
FlashCopy target
This combination is supported. Issuing stop -force might cause the Remote Copy relationship to fully resynchronize.
If you are not using Global Mirror with Change Volumes, for disaster recovery purposes, you can use the FlashCopy feature to create a consistent copy of an image before you restart a Global Mirror relationship. When a consistent relationship is stopped, the relationship enters the consistent_stopped state. While in this state, I/O operations at the primary site continue to run. However, updates are not copied to the secondary site. When the relationship is restarted, the synchronization process for new data is started. During this process, the relationship is in the inconsistent_copying state. The secondary volume for the relationship cannot be used until the copy process completes and the relationship returns to the consistent state. When this situation occurs, start a FlashCopy operation for the secondary volume before you restart the relationship. While the relationship is in the Copying state, the FlashCopy feature can provide a consistent copy of the data. If the relationship does not reach the synchronized state, you can use the FlashCopy target volume at the secondary site.
512
10.3 Troubleshooting Remote Copy

Remote Copy (Global Mirror and Metro Mirror) has two primary error codes: 1920 or 1720. A 1920 error is a congestion error. This error means that the source, the link between source and target, or the target cannot keep up with the rate of demand. A 1720 error is a heartbeat or cluster partnership communication error. This error tends to be more serious because failing communication between your cluster partners involves some extended diagnostic time.
10.3.1 1920 error

A 1920 error (event ID 050010) can have several triggers. The following cause projections are probable: Primary cluster or SAN fabric problem (10%) Primary cluster or SAN fabric configuration (10%) Secondary cluster or SAN fabric problem (15%) Secondary cluster or SAN fabric configuration (25%) Inter-cluster link problem (15%) Inter-cluster link configuration (25%) In practice, the error that is most often overlooked is latency. Global Mirror has a round-trip-time tolerance limit of 80 ms. A message that is sent from your source cluster to your target cluster and the accompanying acknowledgement must have a total time of 80 ms or 40 ms each way. The primary component of your round-trip time is the physical distance between sites. For every 1,000 km there is a 5 ms delay. This delay does not include the time added by equipment in the path. Every device adds a varying amount of time (depending on the device) but expect about 25 s for pure hardware devices. For software-based functions (such as compression implemented in software), the delay added tends to be much higher (usually in the millisecond plus range). Consider an example. Company A has a production site that is 1,900 km distant from their recovery site. Their network service provider uses a total of five devices to connect the two sites. In addition to those devices, Company A uses a SAN Fibre Channel Router at each site to provide FCIP to encapsulate the Fibre Channel traffic between sites. There are now seven devices, and 1900 km of distance delay. All the devices add 200 s of delay each way. The distance adds 9.5 ms each way, for a total of 19 ms. Combined with the device latency, that is 19.4 ms of physical latency at a minimum. This latency is under the 80 ms limit of Global Mirror, but this number is the best case number. Link quality and bandwidth play a significant role here. Your network provider likely ensures a latency maximum on your network link; be sure to stay below the Global Mirror RTT (Round Trip Time) limit. You can easily double or triple the expected physical latency with a lower quality or lower bandwidth network link. As a result, you are suddenly within range of exceeding the limit the moment a large flood of I/O happens that exceeds the bandwidth capacity you have in place. When you receive a 1920 error, always check the latency first. Remember that the FCIP routing layer can introduce latency if it is not properly configured. If your network provider reports a much lower latency, this report can be an indication of a problem at your FCIP Routing layer. Most FCIP Routing devices have built-in tools to allow you to check the RTT. When you are checking latency, remember that TCP/IP routing devices (including FCIP routers) report RTT that uses standard 64-byte ping packets.
513
Figure 10-85 shows why the effective transit time should only be measured by using packets large enough to hold a Fibre Channel frame. This packet size is 2148 bytes (2112 bytes of payload and 36 bytes of header) and you should allow some more capacity to be safe because different switching vendors have optional features that might increase this size.
Figure 10-85 The effect of packet size (in bytes) versus the link size
Before you proceed, take a quick look at the second largest component of your round-trip-time, that is, serialization delay. Serialization delay is the amount of time that is required to move a packet of data of a specific size across a network link of a given bandwidth. This delay is based on a simple concept: the time that is required to move a specific amount of data decreases as the data transmission rate increases. In Figure 10-85, there are orders of magnitude of difference between the different link bandwidths. It is easy to see how 1920 errors can arise when your bandwidth is insufficient and why you should never use a TCP/IP ping to measure RTT for FCIP traffic. Figure 10-85 compares the amount of time in microseconds required to transmit a packet across network links of varying bandwidth capacity. The following packet sizes are used: 64 bytes: The size of the common ping packet. 1500 bytes: The size of the standard TCP/IP packet. 2148 bytes: The size of a Fibre Channel frame. Remember that your path MTU affects the delay that is incurred in getting a packet from one location to another when it causes fragmentation or is too large and causes too many retransmits when a packet is lost. After you verify your latency by using the correct packet size, proceed with normal hardware troubleshooting.
514
10.3.2 1720 error

The 1720 error (event ID 050020) is the other primary error code of Remote Copy. Because the term System Partnership implies that all involved virtualization systems are partners, they must communicate with each other. When a partner on either side stops communicating, you see a 1720 error appear in your error log. According to official documentation, there are no likely field replaceable unit breakages or other causes. In practice, the source of this error is most often a fabric problem or a problem in the network path between your partners. When you receive this error, if your fabric has more than 64 HBA ports zoned, you should check your fabric configuration for zoning of more than one HBA port for each node. One port for each node that is associated with the host is the recommended zoning configuration for fabrics. For those fabrics with 64 or more host ports, this recommendation becomes a rule. You must follow this zoning rule or the configuration is technically unsupported. Improper zoning leads to SAN congestion, which can inhibit remote link communication intermittently. Checking the zero buffer credit timer through IBM Tivoli Storage Productivity Center and comparing its value against your sample interval might reveal potential SAN congestion. When a zero buffer credit timer is above 2% of the total time of the sample interval, it is likely to cause problems. Next, always ask your network provider to check the status of the link. If the link is okay, watch for repetition of this error. It is possible in a normal and functional network setup to have occasional 1720 errors, but multiple occurrences point to a larger problem. If you receive multiple 1720 errors, recheck your network connection and then check the IBM Storwize V3700 partnership information to verify their status and settings. Perform diagnostic tests for every piece of equipment in the path between the two systems. It often helps to have a diagram showing the path of your replication from both logical and physical configuration viewpoints. If your investigation fails to resolve your Remote Copy problems, you should contact your IBM support representative for a complete analysis.
10.4 Managing Remote Copy using the GUI

The IBM Storwize V3700 storage system provides a separate function icon for copy service management. The following windows are available for managing Remote Copy, which are accessed through the Copy Services function icon: Remote Copy Partnerships As the name implies, these windows are used to manage Remote Copy and the partnership.
10.4.1 Managing cluster partnerships

The Partnership window is used to manage a partnership between clusters. To access the Partnership window, click the Copy Services function icon and then click Partnerships, as shown in Figure 10-86 on page 516.
515
Figure 10-86 Partnership window
Creating a partnership
No partnership is defined in our example (see Figure 10-87), so you must create a partnership between the IBM Storwize V3700 systems. Click New Partnership in the Partnership window.
Figure 10-87 Create a cluster partnership
516
If there is no partnership candidate, an error window opens, as shown in Figure 10-88.
Figure 10-88 No candidates are available to create a partnership
Check the zoning and the system status and make sure that the clusters can see each other. Then you can create your partnership by selecting the appropriate remote storage system (see Figure 10-89), and defining the available bandwidth between both systems.
Figure 10-89 Select the remote IBM Storwize storage system for a new partnership
The bandwidth you must input here is used by the background copy process between the clusters in the partnership. To set the background copy bandwidth optimally, make sure that you consider all three resources (the primary storage, the inter-cluster link bandwidth, and the auxiliary storage) to avoid overloading them and affecting the foreground I/O latency. Click Create and the partnership definition is complete on the first IBM Storwize V3700 system. You can find the partnership listed in the left pane of the Partnership window. If you select the partnership, more information for this partnership is displayed on the right, as shown in Figure 10-90 on page 518.
517
Figure 10-90 Partially configured partnership
Important: The state of the partnership is Partially Configured: Local because we did not define it on the other IBM Storwize V3700. For more information about partnership states, see Remote Copy and consistency group states on page 509. Complete the same steps on the second storage system for the partnership to become fully configured. The Remote Copy partnership is now implemented between the two IBM Storwize V3700 systems and both systems are ready for further configuration of Remote Copy relationships, as shown in Figure 10-91.
Figure 10-91 Fully configured partnership
You can also change the bandwidth setting for the partnership in the Partnerships window. Click Apply Changes to confirm your modification.
518
Stopping and starting a partnership

You can stop the partnership by clicking Stop Partnership from the Actions drop-down menu, as shown in Figure 10-92. If you stop the partnership, the relationship that uses this partnership is disconnected.
Figure 10-92 Stop the partnership
After you stop the partnership, your partnership is listed as Fully Configured: Stopped, as shown in Figure 10-93.
Figure 10-93 Fully configured partnership in stopped state
You can restart a stopped partnership by clicking Start Partnership from the Actions drop-down menu. The partnership returns to the fully configured status when it is restarted.
Deleting a partnership
You can delete a partnership by selecting Delete Partnership from the Actions drop-down menu, as shown in Figure 10-92.
519
10.4.2 Managing stand-alone Remote Copy relationships

A Remote Copy relationship can be defined between two volumes, where one is the master (source) and the other one is the auxiliary (target) volume. Usage of Remote Copy auxiliary volumes as Remote Copy master volumes is not allowed. Open the Remote Copy window to manage Remote Copy by clicking the Copy Services icon and then clicking Remote Copy, as shown in Figure 10-94.
Figure 10-94 Open Remote Copy window
520
The Remote Copy window (see Figure 10-95) is where you can manage Remote Copy relationships and Remote Copy consistency groups.
Figure 10-95 Remote Copy window
The Remote Copy window displays a list of Remote Copy consistency groups. You can also take actions on the Remote Copy relationships and Remote Copy consistency groups. Click Not in a Group and all the Remote Copy relationships that are not in any Remote Copy consistency groups are displayed. To customize the blue column heading bar and select different attributes of Remote copy relationships, right-click anywhere in the blue bar.
Creating stand-alone Remote Copy relationships

Important: Before a remote copy relationship is created, target volumes that are the same size as the source volumes that you want to mirror must be created. For more information about creating volumes, see Chapter 5, Basic volume configuration on page 189. To create a Remote Copy relationship, click New Relationship at the top of the Remote Copy window, as shown in Figure 10-95). A wizard opens and guides you through the Remote Copy relationship creation process. As shown in Figure 10-96 on page 522, you must set the Remote Copy relationship type first. Based on your requirements, you can select Metro Mirror (synchronous replication) or Global Mirror (asynchronous replication). Select the appropriate replication type and click Next.
521
Figure 10-96 Select the appropriate Remote Copy type
You must select where your auxiliary (target) volumes are: the local system or the already defined second storage system. In our example (see Figure 10-97), choose another system to build an inter-cluster relationship. Click Next to continue.
Figure 10-97 Select Remote Copy partner
The Remote Copy master and auxiliary volume must be specified. Both volumes must have the same size. As shown in Figure 10-98 on page 523, the system offers only appropriate auxiliary candidates with the same volume size as the selected master volume. After you select the volumes based on your requirement, click Add.
522
Figure 10-98 Select the master and auxiliary volume
You can define multiple and independent relationships by clicking Add. You can remove a relationship by clicking the red cross. In our example, we create two independent Remote Copy relationships, as shown in Figure 10-99.
Figure 10-99 Define multiple independent relationships
A window opens and asks if the volumes in the relationship are already synchronized. In most situations, the data on the master volume and on the auxiliary volume are not identical, so click No and then click Next to enable an initial copy, as shown in Figure 10-100.
523
Figure 10-100 Activate initial data copy
If you select Yes, the volumes are already synchronized in this step, a warning message opens, as shown in Figure 10-101. Make sure that the volumes are truly identical, and then click OK to continue.
Figure 10-101 Warning message to make sure that the volumes are synchronized
You can choose to start the initial copying progress now, or wait to start it at a later time. In our example, select Yes, start copying now and then click Finish, as shown in Figure 10-102.
Figure 10-102 Choose if you want to start copying now or later
After the Remote Copy relationships creation completes, two independent Remote Copy relationships are defined and displayed in the Not in a Group list, as shown in Figure 10-103.
524
Figure 10-103 Remote Copy relationship create process completes
Optionally, you can monitor the ongoing initial synchronization in the Running Tasks status indicator, as shown in Figure 10-104 on page 525. Highlight one of the operations and click it to see the progress.
Figure 10-104 Remote copy initialization progress through Running Tasks
Stopping a stand-alone Remote Copy relationship

The Remote Copy relationship can be stopped by selecting the relationship and clicking Stop from the Actions drop-down menu, as shown in Figure 10-105.
525
Figure 10-105 Stop Remote Copy relationship
A prompt appears. Click to allow secondary read/write access, if required, and then click Stop Relationship, as shown in Figure 10-106.
Figure 10-106 Option to allow secondary read/write access
After the stop completes, the state of the Remote Copy relationship is changed from Consistent Synchronized to Idling, as shown in Figure 10-107. Read/write access to both volumes is now allowed unless you selected otherwise.
526
Figure 10-107 Remote Copy relationship stop completes
Starting a stand-alone Remote Copy relationship

The Remote Copy relationship can be started by selecting the relationship and clicking Start from the Actions drop-down menu, as shown in Figure 10-108.
Figure 10-108 Start a Remote Copy relationship
When a Remote Copy relationship is started, the most important item is selecting the copy direction. Both master and auxiliary volumes can be the primary. Make your decision based on your requirements and click Start Relationship. In our example, choose the master volume to be the primary, as shown in Figure 10-109.
527
Figure 10-109 Choose the copy direction
Switching the direction of a stand-alone Remote Copy relationship

The copy direction of the Remote Copy relationship can be switched by selecting the relationship and clicking Switch from the Actions drop-down menu, as shown in Figure 10-110.
Figure 10-110 Switch Remote Copy relationship
A warning message opens and shows you the consequences of this action, as shown in Figure 10-111. If you switch the Remote Copy relationship, the copy direction of the relationship becomes the opposite; that is, the current primary volume becomes the secondary, while the current secondary volume becomes the primary. Write access to the current primary volume is lost and write access to the current secondary volume is enabled. If it is not a disaster recovery situation, you must stop your host I/O to the current primary volume in advance. Make sure that you are prepared for the consequences, and if so, click OK to continue.
528
Figure 10-111 Warning message for switching direction of a Remote Copy relationship
After the switch completes, your Remote Copy relationship is tagged, as shown in Figure 10-112, and shows you that the primary volume in this relationship was changed.
Figure 10-112 Note the switch icon on the state of the relationship
Renaming a stand-alone Remote Copy relationship

The Remote Copy relationship can be renamed by selecting the relationship and clicking Rename from the Actions drop-down menu, as shown in Figure 10-113.
529
Figure 10-113 Rename the Remote Copy relationship
Enter the new name for the Remote Copy relationship and click Rename.
Deleting a stand-alone Remote Copy relationship

The Remote Copy relationship can be deleted by selecting the relationship and clicking Delete Relationship from the Actions drop-down menu, as shown in Figure 10-114.
Figure 10-114 Delete a Remote Copy relationship
You must confirm this deletion by verifying the number of relationships to be deleted, as shown in Figure 10-115. Click Delete to proceed.
530
Figure 10-115 Confirm the relationship deletion
10.4.3 Managing a Remote Copy consistency group

A Remote Copy consistency group can be managed from the Remote Copy window as well.
Creating a Remote Copy consistency group

To create a Remote Copy consistency group, click New Consistency Group, as shown in Figure 10-116.
Figure 10-116 Create a Remote Copy consistency group
You must enter a name for your new consistency group, as shown in Figure 10-117.
531
Figure 10-117 Enter a name for the new consistency group
You are prompted for the location of auxiliary volumes, as shown in Figure 10-118 on page 532. In our case, these volumes are on another system. Select the option and from the drop-down menu, select the correct remote system. In our example, we only have one remote system defined. Click Next to continue.
Figure 10-118 Remote Copy consistency group auxiliary volume location window
You are then prompted to create an empty consistency group or add relationships to it, as shown in Figure 10-119.
Figure 10-119 Creating an empty consistency group
532
If you select No and click Finish, the wizard completes and creates an empty Remote Copy Consistency Group. Selecting Yes prompts for the type of copy to create, as shown in Figure 10-120.
Figure 10-120 Remote Copy consistency group copy type
Choose the relevant copy type and click Next. In the following window, you can choose existing relationships to add the new consistency group. This step is optional. Use the Ctrl and Shift keys to select multiple relationships to add. If you decide that you do not want to use any of these relationships but want to create relationships, then click Next. However, if you already highlighted a relationship and then decide you do not want any of these, the relationship cannot be removed. You must cancel the wizard and start again, as shown in Figure 10-121 on page 534.
533
Figure 10-121 Selecting existing relationships
The next window is optional and gives the option to create relationships to add to the consistency group, as shown in Figure 10-122.
Figure 10-122 Creating relationships for Remote Copy consistency group
534
Select the relevant Master and Auxiliary volumes for the relationship you want to create and click Add. Multiple relationships can be defined by selecting another Master and Auxiliary volume and clicking Add again. When you finish, click Next. The next window prompts for whether the relationships are synchronized, as shown in Figure 10-123.
Figure 10-123 Volume synchronization
In the next window, you are prompted whether you want to start the volumes copying now, as shown in Figure 10-124.
Figure 10-124 Remote Consistency group start copying option
After you select this option, click Finish to create the Remote Copy Consistency Group. Click Close to close the task window and the new consistency group is now shown in the GUI, as shown in Figure 10-125 on page 536.
535
Figure 10-125 New Remote Consistency group created.
In our example, we created a consistency group with a single relationship and added further Remote Copy relationships to the consistency group afterward. You can find the name and the status of the consistency group next to the Relationship function icon. It is easy to change the name of consistency group by right-clicking the name, selecting Rename and then entering a new name. Alternatively, you can highlight the consistency group and select Rename from the Actions drop-down menu. Similarly, you find all the Remote Copy relationships in this consistency group below the Relationship function icon. The actions on the Remote Copy relationships can be applied here by using the Actions drop-down menu or right-clicking the relationships, as shown in Figure 10-126.
Figure 10-126 Drop-down menu options
536
Adding Remote Copy to a consistency group

The Remote Copy relationships in the Not in a Group list can be added to a consistency group by selecting the volumes and clicking Add to Consistency Group from the Actions drop-down menu, as shown in Figure 10-127.
Figure 10-127 Add Remote Copy relationships to a consistency group
You must choose the consistency group to which to add the Remote Copy relationships. Based on your requirements, select the appropriate consistency group and click Add to Consistency Group, as shown in Figure 10-128.
Figure 10-128 Choose the consistency group to add the remote copies to
Your Remote Copy relationships are now in the consistency group that you selected.
537
Starting a consistency group

The Remote Copy relationship can be started by clicking Start from the Actions drop-down menu, as shown in Figure 10-129.
Figure 10-129 Start the consistency group
The consistency group starts copying data from the primary to the secondary.
Stopping a consistency group

The Remote Copy relationship can be stopped by clicking Stop in the Actions drop-down menu, as shown in Figure 10-130.
Figure 10-130 Stop the consistency group
538
You can allow read/write access to secondary volumes by selecting the option (see Figure 10-131) and then clicking Stop Consistency Group.
Figure 10-131 Confirm consistency group stop and decide to allow secondary read/write access
Switching a consistency group

As with the switch action on the Remote Copy relationship, you can switch the copy direction of the consistency group. To switch the copy direction of the consistency group, click Switch from the Actions drop-down menu, as shown in Figure 10-132.
Figure 10-132 Switch the copy direction of a consistency group
A warning message opens, as shown in Figure 10-133 on page 540. After the switch, the primary cluster in the consistency group is changed. Write access to current master volumes is lost, while write access to the current auxiliary volumes is enabled. This affects host access, so make sure that these settings are what you need. If the settings are as you want them, click OK to continue.
539
Figure 10-133 Warning message to confirm the switch
Removing Remote Copy relationships from a consistency group

The Remote Copy relationships can be removed from the consistency group by selecting the Remote Copy relationships and clicking Remove from Consistency Group from the Actions drop-down menu, as shown in Figure 10-134.
Figure 10-134 Remove Remote Copy relationships from a consistency group
You are prompted to confirm the Remote Copy relationships you want to delete from the consistency group, as shown in Figure 10-135 on page 541. Make sure the Remote Copy relationships that are shown in the field are the ones you want to remove from the consistency group, and then click Remove to proceed.
540
Figure 10-135 Confirm the relationships to remove from the Remote Copy consistency group
After the removal process completes, the Remote Copy relationships are deleted from the consistency group and displayed in the Not in a Group list.
Deleting a consistency group

The consistency group can be deleted by selecting Delete from the Actions drop-down menu, as shown in Figure 10-136.
Figure 10-136 Delete a consistency group
You must confirm the deletion of the consistency group, as shown in Figure 10-137. Click OK if you are sure that this consistency group must be deleted.
Figure 10-137 Warning to confirm deletion of the consistency group
541
The consistency group is deleted. Any relationships that were part of the consistency group are returned to the Not in a Group list.
542
11
Chapter 11.
RAS, monitoring, and troubleshooting

In this chapter, we show the ways in which the IBM Storwize V3700 can be administered from a monitoring and troubleshooting point of view. This chapter includes the following topics: Reliability, availability and serviceability on the IBM Storwize V3700 Hardware and LED description IBM Storwize V3700 components Configuration backup procedure Software upgrade Troubleshooting Recommended Actions Event log navigation Support Shutting down the IBM Storwize V3700 Powering on the IBM Storwize V3700
543
11.1 Reliability, availability, and serviceability on the IBM Storwize V3700

This section describes the reliability, availability, and serviceability (RAS) features of the IBM Storwize V3700 including monitoring and troubleshooting. RAS features are important concepts in the design of the IBM Storwize V3700. Hardware and software features, design considerations, and operational guidelines all contribute to make the IBM Storwize V3700 reliable. Fault tolerance and a high level of availability are achieved by the following features: The RAID capabilities of the underlying disk subsystems. The compass architecture that is used by the IBM Storwize V3700 nodes. Auto-restart of nodes that are hung. Battery units to provide cache memory protection in the event of a site power failure. Host system multipathing and failover support. High levels of serviceability are achieved by providing the following benefits: Cluster error logging Asynchronous error notification Dump capabilities to capture software detected failures Concurrent diagnostic procedures Directed maintenance procedures Concurrent log analysis and memory dump data recovery tools Concurrent maintenance of all IBM Storwize V3700 components Concurrent upgrade of IBM Storwize V3700 Software and microcode Concurrent addition or deletion of a node canister in a cluster Software recovery through the Service Assistant Tool Automatic software version correction when a node is replaced Detailed status and error conditions that are displayed via the Service Assistant Tool Error and event notification through Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP), syslog, and email Node canister support package gathering via USB, in case of network connection problem At the heart of the IBM Storwize V3700 is a redundant pair of node canisters. The two canisters share the data that is transmitting and receiving load between the attached hosts and the disk arrays.
544
11.2 IBM Storwize V3700 components

This section describes each of the components that make up the IBM Storwize V3700 system. Components are described in terms of location, function, and serviceability.
11.2.1 Enclosure midplane assembly

The enclosure midplane assembly is the unit that contains the node or expansion canisters and the power supply units. The enclosure midplane assembly initially is generic and is configured as a control enclosure midplane or an expansion enclosure midplane. During the basic system configuration, Vital Product Data (VPD) is written to the enclosure midplane assembly, which decides whether the unit is a control enclosure midplane or an expansion enclosure midplane.
Control enclosure midplane

The control enclosure midplane holds node canisters and the power supply units. The control enclosure midplane assembly has specific VPD, such as WWNN 1, WWNN 2, machine type and model, machine part number, and serial number. The control enclosure midplane must be replaced only by a trained service provider. After a generic enclosure midplane assembly is configured as a control enclosure midplane, it is no longer interchangeable with an expansion enclosure midplane.
Expansion enclosure midplane

The expansion enclosure midplane holds expansion canisters and the power supply units. The expansion enclosure midplane assembly also has specific VPD, such as machine type and model, machine part number, and serial number. After a generic enclosure midplane assembly is configured as an expansion enclosure midplane, it is no longer interchangeable with a control enclosure midplane. The expansion enclosure midplane must be replaced only by a trained service provider. Figure 11-1 shows the rear view of the Enclosure Midplane Assembly.
Figure 11-1 Enclosure Midplane Assembly rear view
For more information about replacing the control or expansion enclosure midplane, see the IBM Storwize V3700 Information Center at this website: http://pic.dhe.ibm.com/infocenter/storwize/V3700_ic/index.jsp
Chapter 11. RAS, monitoring, and troubleshooting
545
11.2.2 Node canisters: Ports and LED

There are two node canister slots along the top of the unit. The left slot is canister 1 and the right slot is canister 2. Figure 11-2 shows the back of a fully equipped node enclosure.
Figure 11-2 Node canister
USB ports
There are two USB connectors side-by-side and they are numbered as 1 on the left and as 2 on the right. There are no indicators that are associated with the USB ports. Figure 11-3 shows the USB ports.
Figure 11-3 Node Canister USB ports
Ethernet ports
There are two 10/100/1000 Mbps Ethernet ports side-by-side on the canister and they are numbered 1 on the left and 2 on the right. Port 1 is required and port 2 optional. The ports are shown in Figure 11-4.
Figure 11-4 Node canister Ethernet ports
546
Each port has two LEDs and their status is shown in Table 11-1.
Table 11-1 Ethernet LEDs status LED Link state Activity Color Green Yellow Meaning It is on when there is an Ethernet link. It is flashing when there is activity on the link.
SAS ports
There are four 6-Gbps Serial Attached SCSI (SAS) ports side-by-side on both canisters. They are numbered 1 on the left to 4 on the right. IBM Storwize V3700 uses port 1 and 2 and 3 for host connectivity and port 4 to connect optional expansion enclosures. The ports are shown in Figure 11-5.
Figure 11-5 Node canister SAS ports
The SAS LED status meanings are described in Table 11-2.

Table 11-2 SAS LED Status State green Meaning Indicates at least one of the SAS lanes on this connector are operational. If the light is off when it is connected, there is a problem with the connection. amber If the light is on, one of the following errors occurred: One or more, but not all, of the four lanes are up for this connector (if none of the lanes are up, the activity light is off) One or more of the up lanes are running at a different speed to the others One or more of the up lanes are attached to a different address to the others
547
The IBM Storwize V3700 uses SFF mini-SAS connector cable to connect expansion enclosures, as shown in Figure 11-6.
Figure 11-6 Mini-SAS SFF 8644 connector
Battery status
Each node canister includes a battery, the status of which is displayed on three LEDs on the back of the unit, as shown in Figure 11-7.
Figure 11-7 Node canister battery status
The battery indicator status meanings are described in Table 11-3.

Table 11-3 Battery indicator on Node canister Color Green (left) Name Battery Status Definition Fast flash: Indicates that the battery is charging and has insufficient charge to complete a single dump. Flashing: Indicates that the battery has sufficient charge to complete a single dump only. Solid: Indicates that the battery is fully charged and has sufficient charge to complete two dumps. Indicates a fault with the battery. Indicates that hardened or critical data is writing to disk.
Amber Green (right)
Fault Battery in use
548
Canister status
The status of each canister is displayed by three LEDs, as shown in Figure 11-8.
Figure 11-8 System status indicator
The system status LED meanings are described in Table 11-4.

Table 11-4 System status indicator Color Green (left) Name System Power Definition Flashing: The canister is in standby mode in which case IBM Storwize V3700 is not running. Fast flashing: The cannister is running a self test. On: The cannister is powered up and the IBM Storwize V3700 code is running. Off: There is no power to the canister, the canister is in standby mode, Power On SelfTest (POST) is running on the canister, or the operating system is loading. Flashing: The node is in candidate or service state; it cannot perform I/O. It is safe to remove the node. Fast flash: A code upgrade is running. On: The node is part of a cluster. Off: The node is in candidate or active state. This state does not mean there is no hardware error on the node. Any error that is detected is not severe enough to stop the node from participating in a cluster (or there is no power). Flashing: Identifies the canister. On: The node is in service state, or there is an error that is stopping the software from starting.
Green (mid)
System Status
Amber
Fault
549
11.2.3 Node canister replaceable hardware components

The IBM Storwize V3700 node canister includes the following replaceable components: Host Interface Card Memory Battery All of the components are customer-replaceable parts. Figure 11-9 shows the location of these parts within the node canister.
Figure 11-9 Node canister customer replaceable parts
Host Interface Card replacement

For more information about the replacement process, see the IBM Storwize V3700 Information Center at this website: http://pic.dhe.ibm.com/infocenter/storwize/v3700_ic/index.jsp?topic=%2Fcom.ibm.sto rwize.v3700.710.doc%2Ftbrd_rmvrplparts_1955wm.html At the website, browse to Troubleshooting Removing and replacing parts Replacing host interface card.
550
The host interface card replacement is shown in Figure 11-10.
Figure 11-10 Host Interface card replacement
Memory replacement
For more information about the memory replacement process, see the IBM Storwize V3700 Information Center at this website: http://pic.dhe.ibm.com/infocenter/storwize/v3700_ic/index.jsp?topic=%2Fcom.ibm.sto rwize.v3700.710.doc%2Ftbrd_rmvrplparts_1955wm.html At the website, browse to Troubleshooting Removing and replacing parts Replacing the node canister memory (4-GB DIMM).
551
Figure 11-11 shows the memory location.
Figure 11-11 Memory replacement
Battery Backup Unit replacement

Caution: The battery is a lithium ion battery. To avoid possible explosion, do not incinerate the battery. Exchange the battery only with the part that is approved by IBM. Because the Battery Backup Unit (BBU) is seated in the node canister, the BBU replacement leads to a redundancy loss until the replacement is finished. Therefore, it is recommended to replace the BBU only when advised to do so. It is also recommended to follow the Directed Maintenance Procedures (DMP). For more information about how to replace the BBU, see the Information Center at this website: http://pic.dhe.ibm.com/infocenter/storwize/v3700_ic/index.jsp?topic=%2Fcom.ibm.sto rwize.v3700.710.doc%2Ftbrd_rmvrplparts_1955wm.html At the website, browse to Troubleshooting Removing and replacing parts Replacing battery in a node canister.
552
Complete the following steps to replace the BBU: 1. Grasp the blue touch points on each end of the battery, as shown in Figure 11-12.
Figure 11-12 BBU replacement: Step 1
2. Lift the battery vertically upwards until the connectors disconnect. Important: During a BBU change, the battery must be kept parallel to the canister system board while it is removed or replaced, as shown in Figure 11-13. Keep equal force (or pressure) on each end.
Figure 11-13 BBU replacement: Step 2 Chapter 11. RAS, monitoring, and troubleshooting
553
11.2.4 Expansion canister: Ports and LED

There are two expansion canister slots along the top of the unit.
SAS ports
SAS ports are used to connect the expansion canister to the node canister or to an extra expansion in the chain. Figure 11-14 shows the SAS ports that are on the expansion canister. Port 1 is for incoming SAS cables and Port 2 for outgoing cables.
Figure 11-14 Expansion canister SAS ports
The meaning of the SAS port LEDs is described in Table 11-5.

Table 11-5 SAS LED status meaning State green amber Meaning Indicates at least one of the SAS lanes on this connector is operational. If the light is off when connected, there is a problem with the connection. If the light is on, one of the following errors occurred: One or more, but not all, of the four lanes are up for this connector (if none of the lanes are up, the activity light is off). One or more of the up lanes are running at a different speed to the others. One or more of the up lanes are attached to a different address to the others.
Canister status
Each expansion canister has its status displayed by three LEDs, as shown in Figure 11-15.
Figure 11-15 Enclosure canister status
554
The LED status is described in Table 11-6.

Table 11-6 Enclosure canister status Color Green (left) Green (mid) Name Power Status Definition Indicates that the canister is receiving power. If the light is on, the canister is running normally. If the light is flashing, there is an error communicating with the enclosure. Amber Fault If the light is solid, there is an error that is logged against the canister or the firmware is not running.
11.2.5 Disk subsystem

The IBM Storwize V3700 disk sub-system is made up of enclosures, one control enclosure and up to four expansion enclosures. Each enclosure contains the drives that are based on the enclosure type. This section describes the parts of the disk subsystem.
SAS cabling
Expansion enclosures are attached to control enclosures by using SAS cables. There is one supported SAS chain and up to four expansion enclosures can be attached. The node canister uses SAS ports 4 for enclosures. Important: When an SAS cable is inserted, ensure that the connector is oriented correctly by confirming that the following conditions are met: The pull tab must be below the connector. Insert the connector gently until it clicks into place. If you feel resistance, the connector is probably oriented the wrong way. Do not force it. When inserted correctly, the connector can be removed only by pulling the tab. The expansion canister has SAS port 1 for channel input and SAS port 2 for output to connect another expansion enclosure.
555
The SAS cabling is shown in Figure 11-16.
Figure 11-16 SAS cabling
A strand starts with an SAS initiator chip inside an IBM Storwize V3700 node canister and progresses through SAS expanders, which connect disk drives. Each canister contains an expander. Each drive has two ports, each of which is connected to a different expander and strand. This configuration means both nodes have direct access to each drive and there is no single point of failure. At system initialization, when devices are added to or removed from strands (and at other times), the IBM Storwize V3700 Software performs a discovery process to update the state of the drive and enclosure objects.
556
Slot numbers in enclosures

The IBM Storwize V3700 is made up of enclosures. There are four types of enclosures, as described in Table 11-7.
Table 11-7 Enclosure slot numbering Enclosure type Enclosure 12x 3.5-inch drives: Control enclosure 2072-12C Expansion enclosure 2072-12E Number of slots Enclosure with 12 slots.
Enclosure 24x 2.5-inch drives: Control enclosure 2072-24C Expansion enclosure 2072-24E
Enclosure with 24 slots.
Array goal
Each array has a set of goals that describe the wanted location and performance of each array member. A sequence of drive failures and hot spare takeovers can leave an array unbalanced; that is, with members that do not match these goals. The system automatically rebalances such arrays when appropriate drives are available.
RAID level
An IBM Storwize V3700 supports RAID 0, RAID 1, RAID 5, RAID 6, or RAID 10. Each RAID level is described in Table 11-8.
Table 11-8 RAID levels that are supported by an IBM Storwize V3700 RAID level 0 1 5 Where data is striped Arrays have no redundancy and do not support hot-spare takeover. Provides disk mirroring, which duplicates data between two drives. A RAID 1 array is internally identical to a two-member RAID 10 array. Arrays stripe data over the member drives with one parity strip on every stripe. RAID 5 arrays have single redundancy with higher space efficiency than RAID 10 arrays, but with some performance penalty. RAID 5 arrays can tolerate no more than one member drive failure. Arrays stripe data over the member drives with two parity strips on every stripe. A RAID 6 array can tolerate any two concurrent member drive failures. Drive count (Min - Max) 1-8 2 3 - 16
5 - 16
557
RAID level 10
Where data is striped Arrays stripe data over mirrored pairs of drives. RAID 10 arrays have single redundancy. The mirrored pairs rebuild independently. One member out of every pair can be rebuilding or missing at the same time. RAID 10 combines the features of RAID 0 and RAID 1.
Drive count (Min - Max) 2 - 16
Disk scrubbing
The scrub process runs when arrays do not have any other background processes. The process checks that the drive logical block addresses (LBAs) are readable and array parity is synchronized. Arrays are scrubbed independently and each array is entirely scrubbed every seven days.
Solid-state drives
Solid-date drives (SSDs) are treated no differently by an IBM Storwize V3700 than traditional hard disk drives (HDDs) in relation to RAID arrays or MDisks. The individual SSD drives in the IBM Storwize V3700 are combined into an array, usually in RAID 10 or RAID 5 format. It is unlikely that RAID 6 SSD arrays are used because of the double parity impact, with two SSD logical drives that are used for parity only.
11.2.6 Power Supply Unit

All enclosures require two power supply units (PSUs) for normal operation. A single PSU can power the entire enclosure for redundancy. Figure 11-17 shows the power supplies.
Figure 11-17 Power supply
The left side PSU is numbered 1 and the right side PSU is numbered 2.
558
PSU LED indicator

The indicators are the same for the control and expansion unit. Figure 11-18 shows the PSU LED Indicators.
Figure 11-18 PSU LED Indicators
Table 11-9 shows the colors and meaning of the LEDs.

Table 11-9 PSU LED definitions Position 1 2 3 4 Color Green Green Amber Blue Marking In DC Fault exclamation mark OK Name AC Status DC Status Fault Service action that is allowed Definition Main power is delivered DC power is available Fault on PSU N/A
559
11.3 Configuration backup procedure

If there is a serious failure that requires that the system configuration must be restored, the configuration backup file must be used. The file contains configuration data such as arrays, pools, and volumes (but no customer applications data). The backup file is updated by the cluster daily. Even so, it is important to save the file after you made changes to your system configuration. This requires a command-line interface (CLI) connection to start a manual backup. Download this file regularly to your management workstation to protect the configuration data (a best practice is to automate this download procedure by using a script and save it every day on a remote system).
11.3.1 Generating a configuration backup using the CLI

To generate a configuration backup by using the CLI, run the svcconfig backup command, as shown in Example 11-1.
Example 11-1 Example for backup CLI command
svcconfig backup The progress of the command is shown by advancing dots, as shown in Example 11-2.
Example 11-2 Backup CLI command progress and output
.................................................................................. .................................................................................. .................... CMMVC6155I SVCCONFIG processing completed successfully The svcconfig backup command creates three files that provide information about the backup process and cluster configuration. These files are created in the /tmp directory on the configuration node and are listed on the support view. The three files that are created by the backup process are described Table 11-10.
Table 11-10 File names that are created by the backup process File name svc.config.backup.xml svc.config.backup.sh svc.config.backup.log Description This file contains your cluster configuration data. This file contains the names of the commands that were issued to create the backup of the cluster. This file contains details about the backup, including any error information that might be reported.
560
11.3.2 Downloading a configuration backup using the GUI

To download a configuration backup file by using the GUI, complete the following steps: 1. Click the Settings icon and then click Support, as shown in Figure 11-19.
Figure 11-19 Configuration backup open support view
2. Select the configuration node on the support view, as shown in Figure 11-20.
Figure 11-20 Configuration backup select configuration node
3. Select the Show full log listing... option (as shown in Figure 11-21) to list all of the available log files that are stored on the configuration node.
Figure 11-21 Support package selection
561
4. Search for a file named /dumps/svc.config.backup.xml_* (as shown in Figure 11-22). Select the file, right-click it, and select Download.
Figure 11-22 Configuration backup start download
5. Save the configuration backup file on your management workstation (as shown in Figure 11-23) where it can be found easily.
Figure 11-23 Configuration backup save file
562
Even if the configuration backup file is updated automatically, it might be of interest to verify the time stamp of the actual file. Therefore, the /dumps/svc.config.backup.xml_xx file must be opened with an editor, such as WordPad, as shown in Figure 11-24.
Figure 11-24 Open backup XML file with WordPad
Open the /dumps/svc.config.backup.xml_xx file with an editor (we used WordPad) and search for the string timestamp=, which is found near of the top of the file. Figure 11-25 shows the file opened and the time stamp information in it.
Figure 11-25 Timestamp in backup XML file
563
11.4 Software upgrade

The system upgrade process involves the upgrading of your entire IBM Storwize V3700 environment. Allow up to a week to plan your tasks, review your preparatory upgrade tasks, and complete the upgrade of the IBM Storwize V3700 environment. The upgrade procedures can be divided into these general processes. Table 11-11 shows the software upgrade tasks.
Table 11-11 Software upgrade tasks Sequence 1 Upgrade tasks Decide whether you want to upgrade automatically or manually. During an automatic upgrade procedure, the clustered system upgrades each of the nodes systematically. The automatic method is the preferred procedure for upgrading software on nodes. However, you can upgrade each node manually. Ensure that CIM object manager (CIMOM) clients are working correctly. When necessary, upgrade these clients so that they can support the new version of IBM Storwize V3700 code. Ensure that multipathing drivers in the environment are fully redundant. If you experience failover issues with multipathing driver support, resolve these issues before you start normal operations. Upgrade other devices in the IBM Storwize V3700 environment. Examples might include upgrading hosts and switches to the correct levels. Upgrade your IBM Storwize V3700.
4 5
Important: The amount of time it takes to perform an upgrade can vary depending on the amount of preparation work that is required and the size of the environment. Some code levels support upgrades only from specific previous levels. If you upgrade to more than one level above your current level, you might be required to install an intermediate level. Important: Ensure that you have no unfixed errors in the log and that the system date and time are correctly set. Start the fix procedures, and ensure that you have fixed any outstanding errors before you attempt to concurrently upgrade the code.
11.4.1 Upgrading software automatically

During the automatic upgrade process, each node in the system upgrades individually. While the node is upgrading, it is temporarily unavailable and all I/O operations to that node fail. As a result, the I/O error counts increase and the failed I/O operations are directed to the partner node of the working pair. Applications do not see any I/O failures. While each node restarts, there might be some degradation in the maximum I/O rate that can be sustained by the system. After each of the nodes in the system are successfully restarted with the new code level, the new level is automatically committed.
564
When new nodes are added to the system, the upgrade package is automatically downloaded to the new node from the IBM Storwize V3700 system. The upgrade can be performed concurrently with normal user I/O operations. However, performance can be affected.
Multipathing requirement
Before you upgrade, ensure that the multipathing driver is fully redundant with every path available and online. You might see errors that are related to some of the paths failing and the error count increases during the upgrade. This is a result of each node effectively going offline to I/O while it upgrades and re-starts. When the node comes back, the paths become available and fully redundant again. After a 30-minute delay, the paths to the other node go down as that begins to upgrade.
11.4.2 GUI upgrade process

The automatic upgrade process begins by starting the upgrade wizard in a GUI, as shown in Figure 11-26. Browse to Settings General Upgrade Software Launch Upgrade Wizard.
Figure 11-26 Start Upgrade wizard
As a first step, the upgrade test utility must be downloaded from the internet. The correct link is provided within the panel. If the tool was downloaded and is stored on the management station, it can be uploaded, as shown in Figure 11-27 on page 566.
565
Figure 11-27 Download Upgrade test Utility
A confirmation panel (as shown in Figure 11-28) opens.
Figure 11-28 Upload test utility completed
The version to which the system should be upgraded must be entered next. By default, the latest code level is shown, as shown in Figure 11-29.
Figure 11-29 Enter version to be checked by tool
Important: You must choose the correct code level because you cannot recheck this information later. The version that is selected is used throughout the rest of the process.
566
Figure 11-30 shows the panel that indicates the background test task is running.
Figure 11-30 Wait utility to complete
The utility can be run as many times as necessary on the same system to perform a readiness check-in preparation for a software upgrade. Next, the code must be downloaded to the management workstation. If the code was already downloaded to the management station, it can be directly uploaded to the IBM Storwize V3700, as shown in Figure 11-31. Verify that the correct code file is used.
Figure 11-31 Download Code
As shown in Figure 11-32, a confirmation window opens.
Figure 11-32 Code upload that is completed.
The automated code upgrade can be started when the Automatic upgrade option is selected in the decision panel (as shown in Figure 11-33 on page 568), which is the default. If the upgrade is done manually for any reason, the selection must be made (an automatic upgrade is recommended).
567
Figure 11-33 Upload mode decision
If you choose to select the Service Assistant Manual upgrade option, see to 11.4.3, Upgrading software manually on page 568. Selecting Finish starts the upgrade process on the nodes. Messages inform you when the nodes are upgraded. When all nodes are rebooted, the upgrade process is complete. It can take up to two hours to finish this process.
11.4.3 Upgrading software manually

Important: It is highly recommended to upgrade the IBM Storwize V3700 automatically following the upgrade wizard. If a manual upgrade is used, make sure that you do not skip any step. The steps for manual upgrade are shown on the Service Assistant Manual Upgrade panel. Complete the following steps to manually upgrade the software: 1. In the management GUI, click Settings General Upgrade Software and run the Launch Upgrade wizard. In step 5 of the wizard, select Service Assistant Manual upgrade, as shown in Figure 11-34.
Figure 11-34 Select manual upgrade mode
568
After you select manual upgrade, a warning is shown, as shown in Figure 11-35.
Figure 11-35 Manual upgrade warning
Both nodes are set to status Waiting for Upgrade in the Upgrade Machine Code panel, as shown in Figure 11-36.
Figure 11-36 Node status to waiting for upgrade
2. In the management GUI, select System Details and select the canister (node) you want to upgrade next. As shown in Figure 11-37, select Remove Node in the Action menu, which shows you an alert in Health Status.
Figure 11-37 Remove the non-config node from cluster
Important: Make sure you select the non-config node first.
569
A warning message appears, as shown in Figure 11-38.
Figure 11-38 Remove node warning message
The non-config node is removed from GUI Upgrade Machine Code panel, as shown in Figure 11-39.
Figure 11-39 Non-config node was removed
In the System Details panel, the node is shown as Unconfigured, as shown in Figure 11-40.
Figure 11-40 Node status shows unconfigured
3. In the Service Assistant panel, the node that is ready for upgrade must be selected. Select the node showing Node status as service mode and that has no available cluster information, as shown in Figure 11-41.
Figure 11-41 Select node in service mode for upgrade
570
4. In the Service Assistant panel, select Upgrade Manually and then select the machine code version to which you want to upgrade, as shown in Figure 11-42.
Figure 11-42 Select machine code file for upgrade
5. Click Upgrade to start the upgrade process on the first node. 6. The node is automatically added to the system after upgrade. Upgrading and adding the node can take up to 30 minutes, as shown in Figure 11-43.
Figure 11-43 Non-config node completed upgrade
7. Repeat steps 2 - 4 to the remaining node (or nodes). After you remove config node from the cluster for upgrade, a warning appears, as shown in Figure 11-44.
Figure 11-44 Config node failover warning
571
Important: The config node remains in Service State when it is added again to the cluster. Therefore, exit Service State manually. 8. To exit from service state, browse to the home panel of the Service Assistant and open the Action menu. Select Exit Service State, as shown in Figure 11-45.
Figure 11-45 Exit service state to add node back in cluster
Both the nodes are now back into the cluster (as shown in Figure 11-46) and the system is running on the new code level.
Figure 11-46 Cluster is active again and running new code level
572
11.5 Event log

Whenever a significant change in the status of IBM Storwize V3700 is detected, an event is logged in to the event log. All events are classified as alerts or messages. An alert is logged when the event requires some action. Some alerts have an associated error code that defines the service action that is required. The service actions are automated through the fix procedures. If the alert does not have an error code, the alert represents an unexpected change in state. This situation must be investigated to see whether it is to be expected or represents a failure. Investigate an alert and resolve it as soon as it is reported. A message is logged when a change that is expected is reported; for instance, an IBM FlashCopy operation completes. The event log panel can be opened via the GUI by clicking Monitoring Events, as shown in Figure 11-47.
Figure 11-47 Open eventlog panel
When opened, the event log looks as shown in Figure 11-48.
Figure 11-48 The event log view
573
11.5.1 Managing the event log

The event log has a size limit. After it is full, newer entries replace older entries that are not required. To avoid a repeated event that fills the event log, some records in the event log refer to multiple occurrences of the same event. When event log entries are coalesced in this way, the time stamp of the first occurrence and the last occurrence of the problem is saved in the log entry. A count of the number of times that the error condition occurred also is saved in the log entry. Other data refers to the last occurrence of the event.
Event log panel columns

Right-clicking in any column header raises the option menu to select columns that are shown or hidden. Figure 11-49 shows all of the possible columns that can be displayed in the error log view.
Figure 11-49 All possible event log columns
We describe the following available fields that are recommended at a minimum to assist you in diagnosing the problems: Event ID This number precisely identifies the reason why the event was logged. Error code This number describes the service action that should be followed to resolve an error condition. Not all events have error codes that are associated with them. Many event IDs can have the same error code because the service action is the same. Sequence number A number that identifies the event.
574
Event count The number of events that are coalesced into this event log record. Fixed When an alert is shown for an error condition, it indicates whether the reason for the event was resolved. In many cases, the system automatically marks the events that are fixed when appropriate. There are some events that must be manually marked as fixed. If the event is a message, this field indicates that you read and performed the action. The message must be marked as read. Last time The time when the last instance of this error event was recorded in the log. Root sequence number If set, this number is the sequence number of an event that represents an error that probably caused this event to be reported. Resolve the root event first.
Event log panel options

This panel shows the main Event log panel options, which should be used to handle system events, as shown in Figure 11-50.
Figure 11-50 Eventlog Panel
Event log filter options

The following log filter options are available: Show all This option lists all available events. Unfixed Messages and Alerts This option lists unfixed events. This option is useful to find events that must be handled but no actions are required or recommended.
575
Recommended Actions (default) Only events with recommended actions (Status Alert) are displayed. Warning: Check for this filter option if no event is listed. There might be events that are not associated to recommended actions. Figure 9-51 shows an event log with no items found, which does not necessarily mean that the event log is clear. We check whether the log is clear by using the filter option Show all.
Figure 11-51 No items found in event log
Actions on single event

Right-clicking a single event gives the following options that might be used for that specific event: Mark as Fixed It is possible to start the Fix Procedure on this specific event, even if it is not the recommended next action. Some events, such as messages, must be set to Mark as Fixed. Show entries within... minutes/hours/days This option is to limit the error log list to a specific date or a time slot. The following selectable values are available: Minutes: 1, 5, 10, 15, 30, and 45 Hours: 1, 2, 5, and 12 Days: 1, 4, 7, 15, and 30 Clear Log This option clears the complete error log, even if only one event was selected. Warning: These actions cannot be undone and might prevent the system from being analyzed in the case of severe problems. Properties This option provides more sense data for the selected event that is shown in the list.
Recommended Actions
A fix procedure is a wizard that helps you to troubleshoot and correct the cause of an error. Some fix procedures reconfigure the system and are based on your responses. Ensure that actions are carried out in the correct sequence to prevent or mitigate loss of data. For this reason, you must always run the fix procedure to fix an error, even if the fix might seem obvious.
576
To run the fix procedure for the error with the highest priority, go to the Recommended Action panel at the top of the Event page and click Run This Fix Procedure. When you fix higher priority events first, the system can often automatically mark lower priority events as fixed. For more information about how to run a DMP, see 11.5.2, Alert handling and recommended actions on page 577.
11.5.2 Alert handling and recommended actions

All events in Alert status require attention. Alerts are listed in priority order and should be fixed sequentially by using the available fix procedures.
Example: SAS cable fault

For this example, we created an error on one SAS cable connection between two expansion enclosures by removing the cable from one port. The following example shows how faults are represented in the error log, how information about the fault can be gathered, and the recommended action (DMP) can be used to fix the error: Detect an alert The Health Status indicator, which is permanently present on most of the GUI panels (for more information, see Chapter 3, Graphical user interface overview on page 73) is showing a yellow alert. Click the indicator to retrieve the specific information, as shown in Figure 11-52.
Figure 11-52 Health check shows degraded system status
Review the event log for more information. Find alert in event log The default filter in the error log view is Recommended actions. This option lists the alert event only. Figure 11-53 shows the recommended action list.
Figure 11-53 Recommended action list
577
Gather more information: Show all Find the events that are logged around the alert to understand what happened or find more information for better understanding and to find the original problem. Use the Show all filter to see all of the logged events, as shown in Figure 11-54.
Figure 11-54 Show all events
Gather more information: Alert properties More details about the event (for example, enclosure ID and canister ID) can be found in the properties option, as shown in Figure 11-55 on page 579. This information might be of interest for problem fixing or for root cause analysis.
578
Figure 11-55 Alert properties
Run recommended action (DMP) It is highly recommended to fix alerts under the guidance of the recommended action (DMP). There are running tasks in the background that might be missed when the DMP is bypassed. Not all alerts have DMPs available. To start the DMP, right-click the alert record or click Run this fix procedure at the top of the window. The steps and panels of DMP are specific to the error that must be fixed. The following figures represent the recommended action (DMP) for the SAS cable event example.
579
Figure 11-56 shows the DMP SAS cable event step 1.
Figure 11-56 SAS cable Recommended action DMP step 1
580
581
582
Figure 11-63 shows the DMP SAS cable event step 8
583
When all of the steps of the DMP are processed successfully, the recommended action is complete and the problem should be fixed. Figure 11-64 shows the red color of the event status changed to green. The system health status is green and there are no further alerts that must be addressed.
Figure 11-64 Recommended action that is completed
Handling multiple alerts

If there are multiple alerts logged, the IBM Storwize V3700 recommends a next action to fix the problem (or problems). Figure 11-65 shows the event log that displays multiple alert.
Figure 11-65 Multiple alert events displayed in the event log
The Next Recommended Action function orders the alerts by severity and displays the events with the highest severity first. If multiple events have the same severity, they are ordered by date and the oldest event is displayed first. The following order of severity starts with the most severe condition: Unfixed alerts (sorted by error code; the lowest error code has the highest severity) Unfixed messages 584
Monitoring events (sorted by error code; the lowest error code has the highest severity) Expired events Fixed alerts and messages Faults are often fixed with the fixing of the most severe fault.
11.6 Collecting support information

When you have a problem and call the IBM Support Center, you might be asked to provide support data.
11.6.1 Support data via GUI

Click Settings and then the Support tab (as shown in Figure 11-66) to begin the procedure of collecting support data.
Figure 11-66 Support Files VIA GUI
Click Download Support Package, as shown in Figure 11-67
Figure 11-67 Download Support Package
The panel that is shown in Figure 11-68 opens and you can select one of four different versions of the svc_snap support package.
Figure 11-68 Support Package Selection
585
The version that you download depends on the event you are investigating. For example, if you noticed a node was restarted in the event log, capture the snap with the latest existing statesave. The following components are included in the support package: Standard logs Contains the most recent logs that were collected from the system. These logs are most commonly used by Support to diagnose and solve problems. Standard logs plus one existing statesave Contains the standard logs from the system and the most recent statesave from any of the nodes in the system. Statesaves also are known as dumps or live dumps. Standard logs plus most recent statesave from each node This option is the mostly used by support team for problem analysis. They contain the standard logs from system and the most recent statesave from each node in the system. Standard logs plus new statesave This option might be requested by the Support team for problem determination. It generates a new statesave (livedump) for all of the nodes and packages them with the most recent logs. Save the resulting snap file in a directory for later usage or upload to IBM support.
11.6.2 Support information via Service Assistant

The IBM Storwize V3700 management GUI collects information from all the components in the system. The Service Assistant collects information from all node canisters. The Snap file is the information collected and packaged together in a single file. If the package is collected by using the Service Assistant, ensure that the node from which the logs are collected is the current node, as shown in Figure 11-69.
Figure 11-69 Collect logs with Service Assistance
586
Support information can be downloaded with or without the latest statesave, as shown in Figure 11-70.
Figure 11-70 Download support file via Service Assistant
11.6.3 Support Information onto USB stick

Whenever GUI, Service Assistant, or a remote connection is not available, it is possible to collect snaps from each single node by using the USB stick. Complete the following steps to collect snaps by using the USB stick: 1. Create a text file that includes the following command: satask snap -dump 2. Save the file as satask.txt in the root directory of the USB stick. 3. Insert the USB stick in the USB port of the node from which the support data should be collected. 4. Wait until no write activities are recognized (this process can take 10 minutes or more). 5. Remove the USB stick and check the results, as shown in Figure 11-71.
Figure 11-71 Single snap result files on USB stick
587
satask_result file
The satask_result.html file is the general response to the command that is issued via the USB stick. If the command did not run successfully, it is shown in this file. Otherwise, any general system information is stored here, as shown in Figure 11-72.
Figure 11-72 satask_result.txt on USB stick
Snap dump on USB

A complete statesave of the node where the USB was attached is stored in a.zip file. The name of the file includes the node name and the time stamp. The content of the .zip file is shown in Figure 11-73.
Figure 11-73 Single snap dump on USB stick
11.7 Powering on and shutting down IBM Storwize V3700

In the following sections, we describe the process to power on and shut down the IBM Storwize V3700 system by using the GUI and the CLI.
11.7.1 Shutting down the system

In this section, we show how to shut down the IBM Storwize V3700 system by using the GUI and CLI. Important: You should never shut down your IBM Storwize V3700 by powering off the PSUs, removing both PSUs, or removing both power cables from a running system.
588
Powering down by using the GUI

You can shut down only one node canister or the entire cluster. When you shut down only one node canister, all of the activities remain active. When you shut down the entire cluster, you must power on locally to restart the system. To shut down by using the GUI, complete the following steps: 1. Browse to Monitoring function icon (as shown in Figure 11-74) and click System Details.
Figure 11-74 Power down via system details
2. Select the root level of the system detail tree, click Actions and select Shut Down System, as shown in Figure 11-75.
Figure 11-75 Power Down System option
589
The following process can be used as an alternative to step 1 and step 2, as shown in Figure 11-76: a. Browse to the Monitoring navigator and open the System view. b. Click the system that is under the system display. c. An information panel opens. Click the Manage tab. d. Click Shut Down System to shut down, as shown in Figure 11-76.
Figure 11-76 Shut down system via Monitoring system GUI
3. The Confirm System Shutdown window opens. A message opens and prompts you to confirm whether you want to shut down the cluster. Ensure that you stopped all FlashCopy mappings, data migration operations, and forced deletions before you continue. Enter Yes and click OK to begin the shutdown process, as shown in Figure 11-77.
Figure 11-77 Shut Down confirmation
4. Wait for the power LED on both node canisters in the control enclosure to flash at 1 Hz, which indicates that the shutdown operation completed (1 Hz is half as fast as the drive indicator LED).
590
Tip: When you shut down an IBM Storwize V3700, it does not automatically restart. You must manually restart the system.
Shutting down by using the command-line interface

The use of the CLI is the other option to shut down an IBM Storwize V3700 and the PuTTY utility. Warning: If you are shutting down the entire system, you lose access to all volumes that are provided by this system. Shutting down the system also shuts down all IBM Storwize V3700 nodes. This shutdown causes the hardened data to be dumped to the internal hard disk drive. Run the stopsystem command to shut down a clustered system, as shown in Example 11-3.
Example 11-3 Shut down
stopsystem Are you sure that you want to continue with the shut down? # Type y to shut down the entire clustered system.
11.7.2 Powering on
Complete the following steps to power on the system: Important: This process assumes all power is removed from the enclosure. If the control enclosure is shut down but the power is not removed, the power LED on all node canisters flash at a rate of half of one second on, half of one second off. In this case, remove the power cords from both power supplies and then reinsert them. 1. Ensure that any network switches that are connected to the system are powered on. 2. Power on any expansion enclosures by connecting the power cord to both power supplies in the rear of the enclosure or turning on the power circuit. 3. Power on the control enclosure by connecting the power cords to both power supplies in the rear of the enclosure and turning on the power circuits. The system starts. The system starts successfully when all node canisters in the control enclosure have their status LED permanently on, which should take no longer than 10 minutes. 4. Start the host applications.
591
592
Appendix A.
Command-line interface setup and SAN Boot

This appendix describes the setup of the command-line interface (CLI) and provides more information about the SAN Boot function.
593
Command-line interface
The IBM Storwize V3700 system has a powerful CLI, which offers even more functions than the GUI. This section is not intended to be a detailed guide to the CLI because that topic is beyond the scope of this book. The basic configuration of the IBM Storwize V3700 CLI and some example commands are covered. However, the CLI commands are the same as in the IBM SAN Volume Controller. In addition, there are more commands that are available to manage internal storage. If a task completes in the GUI, the CLI command is always displayed in the task box detail, as shown throughout this book. Detailed CLI information is available in the IBM Storwize V3700 Information Center under the Command Line section, which can be found at this website: http://pic.dhe.ibm.com/infocenter/storwize/V3700_ic/index.jsp?topic=%2Fcom.ibm.sto rwize.V3700.641.doc%2Fsvc_clicommandscontainer_229g0r.html Implementing the IBM Storwize V7000 V6.3, SG24-7938 also has information about the use of the CLI. The commands in that book also apply to the IBM Storwize V3700 system.
Basic setup
In the IBM Storwize V3700 GUI, authentication is done using a user name and password. The CLI uses a Secure Shell (SSH) to connect from the host to the IBM Storwize V3700 system. A private and public key pair or user name and password is necessary. The following steps are required to enable CLI access with SSH keys: 1. A public key and private key are generated as a pair. 2. A public key is uploaded to the IBM Storwize V3700 system using the GUI. 3. A client SSH tool must be configured to authenticate with the private key. 4. A secure connection can be established between the client and IBM Storwize V3700 system. Secure Shell is the communication vehicle that is used between the management workstation and the IBM Storwize V3700 system. The SSH client provides a secure environment from which to connect to a remote machine. It uses the principles of public and private keys for authentication. SSH keys are generated by the SSH client software. The SSH keys include a public key, which is uploaded and maintained by the clustered system, and a private key, which is kept private on the workstation that is running the SSH client. These keys authorize specific users to access the administration and service functions on the system. Each key pair is associated with a user-defined ID string that can consist of up to 40 characters. Up to 100 keys can be stored on the system. New IDs and keys can be added, and unwanted IDs and keys can be deleted. To use the CLI, an SSH client must be installed on that system, the SSH key pair must be generated on the client system, and the clients SSH public key must be stored on the IBM Storwize V3700 systems. The SSH client that is used in this book is PuTTY. There is also a PuTTY key generator that can be used to generate the private and public key pair. The PuTTY client can be downloaded at no cost from the following website: http://www.chiark.greenend.org.uk Download the following tools: PuTTY SSH client: putty.exe 594
PuTTY key generator: puttygen.exe
Generating a public and private key pair

To generate a public and private key pair, complete the following steps: 1. Start the PuTTY key generator to generate the public and private key pair, as shown in Figure A-1.
Figure A-1 PuTTY key generator
Make sure that the following options are selected: SSH2 RSA Number of bits in a generated key: 1024 2. Click Generate and move the cursor over the blank area to generate the keys, as shown in Figure A-2.
Appendix A. Command-line interface setup and SAN Boot
595
Figure A-2 Generate keys
To generate keys: The blank area that is indicated by the message is the large blank rectangle on the GUI inside the section of the GUI labeled Key. Continue to move the mouse pointer over the blank area until the progress bar reaches the far right side. This action generates random characters to create a unique key pair. 3. After the keys are generated, save them for later use. Click Save public key, as shown in Figure A-3.
Figure A-3 Save public key
4. You are prompted for a name (for example, pubkey) and a location for the public key (for example, C:\Support Utils\PuTTY). Click Save.
596
Ensure that you record the name and location of this SSH public key as it must be specified later. Public key extension: By default, the PuTTY key generator saves the public key with no extension. Use the string pub for naming the public key; for example, pubkey, to differentiate the SSH public key from the SSH private key. 5. Click Save private key, as shown in Figure A-4.
Figure A-4 Save private key
6. You receive a warning message, as shown in Figure A-5. Click Yes to save the private key without a passphrase.
Figure A-5 Confirm the security warning
7. When prompted, enter a name (for example, icat), select a secure place as the location, and click Save. Key generator: The PuTTY key generator saves the private key with the PPK extension. 8. Close the PuTTY key generator.
597
Uploading the SSH public key to the IBM Storwize V3700

After you create your SSH key pair, you must upload your SSH public key onto the IBM Storwize V3700 system. Complete the following steps to upload the key: 1. Open the user section, as shown in Figure A-6.
Figure A-6 Open user section
2. Right-click the user for which you want to upload the key and click Properties, as shown in Figure A-7.
Figure A-7 Superuser properties
3. To upload the public key, click Browse, select your public key, and click OK, as shown in Figure A-8. 598
Figure A-8 Select public key
4. Click OK and the key is uploaded, as shown in Figure A-9.
Figure A-9 Public key upload complete
5. Click Close to return to the GUI.
599
Configuring the SSH client

Before the CLI can be used, the SSH client must be configured. Complete the following steps to configure the client: 1. Start PuTTY, as shown in Figure A-10.
Figure A-10 PuTTY
In the right side pane under the Specify the destination you want to connect to section, select SSH. Under the Close window on exit section, select Only on clean exit, which ensures that if there are any connection errors, they are displayed in the users window. 2. From the Category pane on the left side of the PuTTY Configuration window, click Connection SSH to open the PuTTY SSH Configuration window, as shown in Figure A-11.
600
Figure A-11 SSH protocol version 2
3. In the right side pane, in the Preferred SSH protocol version section, select 2. 4. From the Category pane on the left side of the PuTTY Configuration window, click Connection SSH Auth. As shown in Figure A-12, in the right side pane, in the Private key file for authentication: field under the Authentication Parameters section, browse to or manually enter the fully qualified directory path and file name of the SSH client private key file that was created earlier (for example, C:\Support Utils\PuTTY\icat.PPK).
601
Figure A-12 SSH authentication
5. From the Category pane on the left side of the PuTTY Configuration window, click Session to return to the Session view, as shown in Figure A-10 on page 600. 6. In the right side pane, enter the host name or system IP address of the IBM Storwize V3700 clustered system in the Host Name field, and enter a session name in the Saved Sessions field, as shown in Figure A-13.
Figure A-13 Enter session information
602
7. Click Save to save the new session, as shown in Figure A-14.
Figure A-14 Save Session
8. Highlight the new session and click Open to connect to the IBM Storwize V3700 system. 9. PuTTY now connects to the system and prompts you for a user name. Enter superuser as the user name and press Enter (see Example A-1).
Example: A-1 Enter user name
login as: superuser Authenticating with public key "rsa-key-20130521" Last login: Tue May 21 15:21:55 2013 from 9.174.219.143 IBM_Storwize:mcr-atl-cluster-01:superuser> The CLI is now configured for IBM Storwize V3700 administration.
Example commands
A detailed description about all of the available commands is beyond the scope of this book. In this section, sample commands are presented that we referenced in this book. The svcinfo and svctask prefixes are no longer needed in IBM Storwize V3700. If you have scripts that use this prefix, they run without problems. If you enter svcinfo or svctask and press the Tab key twice, all of the available subcommands are listed. Pressing the Tab key twice also auto-completes commands if the input is valid and unique to the system. Enter lsvdisk, as shown in Example A-2, to list all configured volumes on the system. The example shows that six volumes are configured.
Example: A-2 List all volumes
IBM_Storwize:mcr-atl-cluster-01:superuser>lsvdisk
603
id name IO_group_id IO_group_name status mdisk_grp_id mdisk_grp_name capacity type FC_id FC_name RC_id RC_name vdisk_UID opy_count fast_write_state se_copy_count RC_change compressed_copy_count 0 V3700_Vol1 0 io_grp0 online 0 V3700_Pool 20.00GB striped 6005076300800 empty 1 no 0 1 V3700_Vol2 0 io_grp0 online 0 V3700_Pool 2.00GB striped 6005076300800 empty 1 no 0 2 V3700_Vol3 0 io_grp0 online 0 V3700_Pool 2.00GB striped 6005076300800 empty 1 no 0 3 V3700_Vol4 0 io_grp0 online 0 V3700_Pool 2.00GB striped 6005076300800 empty 1 no 0 4 V3700_Vol5 0 io_grp0 online 0 V3700_Pool 2.00GB striped 6005076300800 empty 1 no 0 5 V3700_Vol6 0 io_grp0 online 0 V3700_Pool 2.00GB striped 6005076300800 empty 1 no 0
Enter lshost to see a list of all configured hosts on the system, as shown in Example A-3.
Example: A-3 List hosts
IBM_Storwize:mcr-atl-cluster-01:superuser>lshost id name port_count iogrp_count status 0 windows2008r2 2 4 online
To map the volume to the hosts, enter mkvdiskhostmap, as shown in Example A-4.
Example: A-4 Map volumes to host
IBM_Storwize:mcr-atl-cluster-01:superuser>mkvdiskhostmap -host ESXi-1 -scsi 0 ESXi-Redbooks Virtual Disk to Host map, id [0], successfully created To verify the host mapping, enter lsvdiskhostmap, as shown in Example A-5.
Example: A-5 List all hosts mapped to a volume
-force
IBM_Storwize:mcr-atl-cluster-01:superuser>lshostvdiskmap ESXi-1 id name SCSI_id vdisk_id vdisk_name vdisk_UID 4 ESXi-1 0 2 ESXi-Redbooks 600507680185853FF000000000000011 In the CLI, there are more options available than in the GUI. All advanced settings can be set; for example, I/O throttling. To enable I/O throttling, change the properties of a volume by using the changevdisk command, as shown in Example A-6). To verify the changes, run the lsvdisk command.
604
Example: A-6 Enable advanced properties: I/O throttling
IBM_Storwize:mcr-atl-cluster-01:superuser>chvdisk -rate 1200 -unit mb ESXi-Redbooks IBM_Storwize:mcr-atl-cluster-01:superuser> IBM_Storwize:mcr-atl-cluster-01:superuser>lsvdisk ESXi-Redbooks id 2 name ESXi-Redbooks . . vdisk_UID 600507680185853FF000000000000011 virtual_disk_throttling (MB) 1200 preferred_node_id 2 . . IBM_Storwize:mcr-atl-cluster-01:superuser>
Command output: The lsvdisk command lists all available properties of a volume and its copies. To make it easier to read, lines in Example A-6 were deleted.
If you do not specify the unit parameter, the throttling is based on I/Os instead of throughput, as shown in Example A-7.
Example: A-7 Throttling based on I/O
IBM_Storwize:mcr-atl-cluster-01:superuser>chvdisk -rate 4000 ESXi-Redbooks IBM_Storwize:mcr-atl-cluster-01:superuser>lsvdisk ESXi-Redbooks id 2 name ESXi-Redbooks . . vdisk_UID 600507680185853FF000000000000011 throttling 4000 preferred_node_id 2 . . IBM_Storwize:mcr-atl-cluster-01:superuser> To disable I/O throttling, set the I/O rate to 0, as shown in Example A-8.
Example: A-8 Disable I/O Throttling
IBM_Storwize:mcr-atl-cluster-01:superuser>chvdisk -rate 0 ESXi-Redbooks IBM_Storwize:mcr-atl-cluster-01:superuser>lsvdisk ESXi-Redbooks id 2 . . vdisk_UID 600507680185853FF000000000000011 throttling 0 preferred_node_id 2 IBM_Storwize:mcr-atl-cluster-01:superuser>
605
SAN Boot
IBM Storwize V3700 supports SAN Boot for Windows, VMware, and many other operating systems. SAN Boot support can change, so regularly check the IBM Storwize V3700 interoperability matrix at this website: http://www.ibm.com/support/docview.wss?uid=ssg1S1004111 The IBM Storwize V3700 Information Center has more information about SAN Boot for different operating systems. For more information, see this website: http://pic.dhe.ibm.com/infocenter/storwize/v3700_ic/index.jsp?topic=%2Fcom.ibm.sto rwize.v3700.710.doc%2Fsvc_hostattachmentmain.html For more information about SAN Boot, see the IBM System Storage Multipath Subsystem Device Driver User's Guide, GC52- 1309-03, which can be found at this website: ftp://ftp.software.ibm.com/storage/subsystem/UG/1.8--3.0/SDD_1.8--3.0_User_Guide_E nglish_version.pdf
Enabling SAN Boot for Windows

Complete the following steps to install Windows host by using SAN Boot: 1. Configure the IBM Storwize V3700 system so that only the boot volume is mapped to the host. 2. Configure the Fibre Channel SAN so that the host sees only one IBM Storwize V3700 system node port. Multiple paths during installation are not supported. 3. Configure and enable the host bus adapter (HBA) BIOS. 4. Install the operating system using the normal procedure and select the volume as the partition on which to install. HBAs: You might need to load another HBA device driver during installation, depending on your Windows version and the HBA type. 5. Install SDDDSM after the installation completes. 6. Modify your SAN zoning to allow multiple paths. 7. Check your host to see whether all paths are available. 8. Set redundant boot devices in the HBA BIOS to allow the host to boot when its original path fails.
Enabling SAN Boot for VMware

Complete the following steps to install a VMware ESXhost by using SAN Boot: 1. Configure the IBM Storwize V3700 system so that only the boot volume is mapped to the host. 2. Configure the Fibre Channel SAN so that the host sees only one IBM Storwize V3700 system node port. Multiple paths during installation are not supported. 3. Configure and enable the HBA BIOS. 4. Install the operating system using the normal procedure and select the volume as the partition on which to install. 606
HBAs: You might need to load another HBA device driver during installation, depending on your ESX level and the HBA type. 5. Modify your SAN zoning to allow multiple paths. 6. Check your host to see if all paths are available and modify the multipath policy, if required.
Windows SAN Boot migration

If you have a host that runs a Windows 2000 Server, Windows Server 2003, or Windows Server 2008 operating system, and have existing SAN Boot images that are controlled by storage controllers, you can migrate these images to image-mode volumes that are controlled by the IBM Storwize V3700 system. SAN Boot procedures: For more information about SAN Boot procedures for other operating systems, see the IBM Storwize V3700 Information Center at this website: http://pic.dhe.ibm.com/infocenter/storwize/V3700_ic/index.jsp?topic=%2Fcom.ibm. storwize.V3700.641.doc%2FV3700_ichome_641.html Complete the following steps to migrate your existing SAN Boot images: 1. If the existing SAN Boot images are controlled by an IBM storage controller that uses the IBM Subsystem Device Driver (SDD) as the multipathing driver, you must use SDD V1.6 or higher. Run the SDD datapath set bootdiskmigrate 2076 command to prepare the host for image migration. See the Multipath Subsystem Device Driver (SDD) matrix to download packages at this website: http://www.ibm.com/support/docview.wss?rs=540&context=ST52G7&dc=DA400&uid=ssg1S 7001350&loc=en_US&cs=utf-8&lang=en#WindowsSDD 2. Shut down the host. 3. Complete the following configuration changes on the storage controller: a. Write down the SCSI LUN ID each volume is using (for example, boot LUN SCSI ID 0, Swap LUN SCSI ID 1, and Database Lun SCSID 2). b. Remove all of the image-to-host mappings from the storage controller. c. Map the existing SAN Boot image and any other disks to the IBM Storwize V3700 system. 4. Change the zoning so that the host can see the IBM Storwize V3700 I/O group. 5. Complete the following configuration changes on the IBM Storwize V3700 system: a. Create an image mode volume for the managed disk (MDisk) that contains the SAN Boot image. Use the MDisk unique identifier to specify the correct MDisk. b. Create a host object and assign the host HBA ports. c. Map the image mode volume to the host using the same SCSI ID as before. For example, you might map the boot disk to the host with SCSI LUN ID 0. d. Map the swap disk to the host, if required. For example, you might map the swap disk to the host with SCSI LUN ID 1. 6. Change the boot address of the host by completing the following steps: a. Restart the host and open the HBA BIOS utility of the host during the booting process.
607
b. Set the BIOS settings on the host to find the boot image at the worldwide port name (WWPN) of the node that is zoned to the HBA port. 7. If SDD V1.6 or higher is installed and you ran the bootdiskmigrate command in step 1, reboot your host, update SDDDSM to the latest level, and go to step 14. If SDD V1.6 is not installed, go to step 8. 8. Modify the SAN Zoning so that the host sees only one path to the IBM Storwize V3700. 9. Boot the host in single-path mode. 10.Uninstall any multipathing driver that is not supported for IBM Storwize V3700 system. 11.Install SDDDSM. 12.Restart the host in single-path mode and ensure that SDDDSM was properly installed. 13.Modify the SAN Zoning to enable multipathing. 14.Rescan drives on your host and check that all paths are available. 15.Reboot your host and enter the HBA BIOS. 16.Configure the HBA settings on the host. Ensure that all HBA ports are boot-enabled and can see both nodes in the IBM Storwize V3700 I/O group that contains the SAN Boot image. Configure the HBA ports for redundant paths. 17.Exit the BIOS utility and finish starting the host. 18.Map any other volumes to the host, as required.
608
Related publications
The publications listed in this section are considered particularly suitable for a more detailed discussion of the topics that are covered in this book.
IBM Redbooks
The following IBM Redbooks publications provide more information about the topics in this book. Some publications that are referenced in the following list might be available in softcopy only: Implementing the IBM System Storage SAN Volume Controller V6.3, SG24-7933 Implementing the IBM Storwize V7000 V6.3, SG24-7938 SAN Volume Controller: Best Practices and Performance Guidelines, SG24-7521 Implementing an IBM/Brocade SAN with 8 Gbps Directors and Switches, SG24-6116 You can search for, view, download, or order these documents and other Redbooks, Redpapers, Web Docs, draft, and other materials, at the following website: http://www.ibm.com/redbooks
IBM Storwize V3700 publications

Storwize V3700 publications are available at this website: https://ibm.biz/BdxyDL
IBM Storwize V3700 support

Storwize V3700 support is available at this website: https://ibm.biz/BdxyD9
Help from IBM

IBM Support and downloads https://ibm.com/support IBM Global Services https://ibm.com/services
609
610
Index
A
active-active architecture 12 Advance FlashCopy menu 473 Advanced Settings 179, 182, 468 alerts 16, 27, 66, 494 algorithms 14 aliases 20 analyses 433434, 459, 544 architecture 1, 12, 544 arrays 1314 asynchronous replication 521 authentication 158, 184, 594, 601602 Authentication Parameters 601 auto-complete commands 603 autoexpand 21 autoexpansion 21 automatic data placement 417 real 21, 195, 197 solid-state disks 413 storage 2, 15, 317, 453 thin provisioned volumes 460 used 16, 21 used free 21 virtual 21, 195, 197 volumes 15, 206, 348, 434, 511 warning 21 Cascaded FlashCopy mappings 453 chains 3, 30, 500 CHAP 369 chat sessions 24 CIMOM 13 clones 3, 453, 464, 466, 469 clusters 13, 17, 31, 198 allowed 502 auxiliary 509510 background copy rate 130 backups 560 configuration 28, 560 data 560 configuration nodes 12 creating 45 error logging 544 extent sizes 16 FlashCopy consistency groups per cluster 460 FlashCopy mappings per cluster 459 host mappings 4 I/O groups 12 Image Mode volumes 18 inactive 502 internal storage 4 IP addresses 25, 29, 34, 221, 243, 602 local 502 management 4, 35, 38 master 509510 master and auxiliary 509510 MDisks 4 data 18 network 502 node canisters 544 number of Remote Copy consistency groups per cluster 511 partnerships 501, 511, 515, 517 primary 509510, 539 primary and secondary 510 public keys 594 remote 501502 secondary 509510 shutdown 589590 colliding writes 511 command-line interface (CLI) 13, 2425, 38, 40, 427, 459, 504, 560, 588, 593594, 600, 603604
B
background copies 130, 453455, 460, 482483, 512, 517 bandwidth 517 background copy rate 453454, 460 backup copy rate 454 backups 25, 29, 449, 457, 460, 465, 502 application data 13 FlashCopy 450, 459 image 4 management IP address 34 system configuration data 13 tape 450, 458 volumes 460, 465 bandwidth 30, 130, 505, 512, 517518 batteries 10 bitmaps 452, 457 boot 154
C
cache 16, 412, 454455, 503504 Call Home 25 email 2425 candidate 320, 329 canisters 10, 28, 34, 152, 499, 544 expansion 10 slots 8 capacity 195 cold data 435 configurable warning 21 current internal storage 317 free 197 hot data 435 pools 201
611
commands 19, 38, 456457, 508, 560, 594, 603 concepts 544 configuration 189, 238, 258 access redundancy 28 advanced host 210 backups 560561 basic 594 basic volumes 213 changes 607 cluster activity 12 clusters 13 data 560 Easy Tier 418 enabling 185 FlashCopy 467 hosts 176 initial 50 IP addresses for Ethernet ports 3435 issues 25 Metro Mirror limits 511 nodes 9, 12, 3435, 560 options 3 recommended storage 330 steps 27 storage controller changes 607 supported HBA driver 153, 162 system changes 560 system restore 560 tasks 13 wizards 177, 181, 187, 329 Configuration tab 157 connectivity IBM Storwize V7000 and Brocade SAN Switches and Directors 31 iSCSI 183 iSCSI Ethernet ports 183 consistency point in time 456 consistency groups 129, 452, 456, 459, 471, 476, 489495, 508, 510, 521, 531, 537542 empty 491, 509 Consistency Groups menu 489 Consistency Groups window 460, 490 consistent copies 512 data set 451 image 457, 505, 509 relationship 512 ConsistentDisconnected 510 ConsistentStopped 509 ConsistentSynchronized 509 containers 348 contingency 21 capacity 21 control enclosures 3, 810, 28, 30 state information 9 Copied state 454, 457 copies primary 20, 198, 417
splitting 20 copy bandwidth 517 operations 22, 458, 460 processes 130, 455, 509, 512, 517 rate 130, 453454, 460, 482483, 512 copy processes stopping 455 Copy Services 460463, 489, 515 copy services functions 449 Copying state 455, 457, 477, 480, 512 creating advanced FlashCopy mappings 476 Fibre Channel hosts 180 HP/UX or TPGS hosts 179 partnerships 499, 511 Remote Copy relationships 521, 524 Reverse FlashCopy mappings 459 second host 180 second hosts 180 thin-provisioned volumes 195 volume copies 189 volumes and FlashCopy mappings 3 Critical Fix Notification 573
D
data analyses 413 application 13, 505, 560 backup 13 client 457 cluster configuration 13 configuration 560 consistency 510 consistent copy 512 error-related 25 hot 411, 417, 433 loss 192, 320 master volume 523 MDisks 18, 344 memory dumps 544 migration 18, 413, 590 mirrored 327 mirrored volumes 20 movement 417 performance 433 placement 411412 production 460, 502 protection 560 read and write 4, 455 recording medium 4 relocation 412 sets 456 sources 457458 striped 14, 557 support 585 transmitting and receiving load 544 workload performance 413 Data Migration Planner 415
612
Data Migrator 415 Data Placement Advisor (DPA) 415 database integrity 457 date and time 37, 50, 427 decoupled 17 default location 427 delete consistency groups 541 FlashCopy mappings 460, 481 mappings 455 partnerships 129, 519 deleting 20 dependent writes 456457 detected hardware issues 55, 66 software failures 544 device-specific modules (DSM) 154 Directed Maintenance Procedure (DMP) 318, 415 disk drive types 11 drives 5, 608 3.5-inch 557 dependent 322 disk 8, 10, 30 enclosures 34 failure 1314, 327 fast SAS or FC 413 faults 14 hard disk 411 hot spare 331 internal 34, 13, 315, 318, 320, 330 objects 13 overview 316 logical 38 expanding 38 MDisks 344, 347, 352 mirrored 14 pairs 14, 327 RAID arrays 557 slots 5 solid-state 412, 419420, 422423, 433434 spare 320
E
Easy Tier 411 Automatic Data Placement Mode 416 enabling 428 enabling and disabling 425 enabling or disabling 431 evaluation mode 429, 433 extent migration 417 hot spots 417 internal volumes 413 log files 427 measurements 427 operating modes 416 overview 412 performance data 433 process 414 SSD 327, 334, 420421
states 418 statuses 424 enclosures 4, 28, 555, 557558 chains 3 expansion 4, 10, 2830, 555 errors asynchronous notification 544 cluster logging 544 ConsistentStopped state 509 hardware 455 I/O 458 partnership candidates 517 service panel 544 svc.config.backup.log 560 Ethernet cabling 28 LED statuses 546 ports 28, 3435, 546 switches 19 EUIs 12 events 3 alerts 27 definition 4 detected 24 disaster 13 extended logging 165 failure 4 logs 586 node canisters 35 notifications 24, 66, 544 offline fabrics 30 site power failure 544 SNMP traps 24 svc_snap files 586 syslog messages 25 expansion enclosures 316 extended unique identifiers 12 extents 16, 412 allocation 414 cold 414 Easy Tier 412, 433 hot 414, 417, 434435 I/O activity 417 level 412 mappings 18 MDisks 15, 21 migration 411, 413, 416417, 426 migration plans 412 real capacity 195 sizes 1516, 20 striped volumes 17 external storage MDisks 340 ports 30
F
fabric 4 errors 502 Fibre Channel ports 28 links 502 Index
613
remote 511 WWPN zones 30 failed 320 failover situation 503 failovers 12, 34, 152, 505 fault-tolerant controller 9 Fibre Channel ports 28, 511 FlashCopy 38, 195, 450451 capabilities 38 commands 456457 consistency group states Prepared 457 Preparing 457 Stopped 458 consistency groups 457, 489490 states 457 Suspended 457 copy services 449 database volumes 456 integrity 456 mapping states 454 Idling/Copied 456 Prepared 455 Preparing 455 Stopped 455 Suspended 455 mapping states Stopped 477, 494 mappings 3, 452, 454, 456457, 459460, 471472, 477, 479480, 490492, 494495, 590 creating 467 deleting 480481 dependency tree 482 renaming 479 operations 459460 properties 459 Remote Copy 512 thin provisioning 21 volumes multiple target 453 target 457, 477478, 480, 482, 503, 510 FlashCopy Mapping window 476 FlashCopy Mappings menu 462 flexibility 333 foreground I/O latency 517
HBAs BIOS 37, 153, 606 installing 153, 164 port connection 36 ports 607608 heat maps 414 high availability 198 Host Type setting 369 hosts 189 adding ports 373 clusters 37 configuration 176 configured and mapped overview 214 creating 176 details 215, 221, 233, 241, 253 ESX 166, 174 Fibre Channel 232233, 240, 252253 iSCSI 174, 241 Fibre Channel 176 connections 30 Windows 2008 215, 228 I/O 452 initiator names 181 iSCSI 182, 222 iSCSI access 28, 34 iSCSI CHAP Secret 369 manual mapping process 207 mappings 4, 186, 189, 207, 209, 212213, 215, 221, 229 verifying 604 mirrored volumes 198 names 20, 181 paths 573 ports 30, 178 WWPNs 177, 187 rebooting 223 renaming 369 servers 12, 21, 164, 195 systems 4, 12, 1415, 17, 20, 152153, 164166 TPGS 179 unmapping 360 virtual capacity 195 volumes access 36, 219 Windows 606 Windows 2008 153, 156157, 216, 218, 229, 231 iSCSI 161, 218, 220, 227, 231 WWPNs 30 hot spare 13, 317, 320, 420, 557
G
Global Mirror 23, 498, 504505, 509510, 521 relationships 512 gminterdelaysimulation 504 gmintradelaysimulation 504 grains 197, 452 granularity 451
I
I/O groups 9, 12, 242, 511, 556, 607608 I/O Monitoring (IOM) 415 I/O statistics 417, 431 IBM Assist On-site restricting access 24 IBM Assist On-site tool 24 IBM SAN Volume Contoller (SVC) 568, 594, 598 IBM Storage Tier Advisor Tool (STAT) 414, 433 IBM Storwize V7000 177, 187
H
hardware failures 25
614
amber fault LED 45 architecture 1 basic volume configuration 189 Call Home configuration 66 command-line interface 41, 594 components 12 configuration instructions 36 control enclosures 8 copy services 449 creating generic volumes 192 creating mirrored volumes 198 creating new partnerships 516 disk subsystems 557 downloading and installing supported firmware 164 Easy Tier configuration using the CLI 427 overview 412 rules 417 FlashCopy concepts 451 guidelines for implementation 459 mapping states 455 GUI 3, 15, 24, 26, 38, 156, 166, 174 creating hosts 151, 213 Easy Tier configuration 419 managing and configuring Remote Copy 515 managing and implementing Remote Copy 498 managing FlashCopy 460 overview 73 hardware installation planning 28, 61 hardware overview 7 host configuration 151 planning 36 Information Center 158 initial configuration 27, 38, 50 initiator 222 internal storage 2 iSCSI 1920 connections 161 overview 184 LAN configuration planning 34 management 13 GUI 3 models 5 monitoring host paths 573 multipathing 155 multitiered storage pools 16 overview 1 performance optimized setup 334 ports login maximums 31 provisioning storage 190 RAID 2 supported levels 557 RAS 544 Remote Copy general guidelines 510 partnerships 499 synchronous and asynchronous 23 renaming target volumes 478
SAN configuration planning 30 requirements 31 SAN Boot 36, 606 SAS cabling 556 shutdown 591 using the GUI 589 SNMP traps 24 software upgrades 544 STAT reports 434 Supported Hardware List 152 system configuration backup 13 terminology 3 thin-provisioned volumes 21 uploading the SSH public key 598 VMware ESX iSCSI attachment 166 multipathing 166 Volume ID 435 volume types 191 websites 25 Windows SAN Boot migration 607 IBM Subsystem Device Driver (SDD) 607 IBM Subsystem Device Driver DSM (SDDDSM) 155156, 216, 229, 606 updates 608 IBM Support Center 24 IBM Tivoli Storage Productivity Center 13 identical data 503 IdlingDisconnected 509 image mode 14, 18, 417, 607 InconsistentCopying 509 InconsistentDisconnected 509 InconsistentStopped 509 Incremental FlashCopy mappings 453 initialization process 331 inter-cluster 504, 522 communication 499 link bandwidth 517 internal storage 315, 317, 594 configuring 329 definition 4 intra-cluster 504 IP addresses 20, 25, 2829, 3435, 3738, 50, 170, 221, 242243, 602 IP network 19, 25 IP port numbers 242 iSCISI Configuration tab 221 iSCSI 19 access 34 addresses 20 attachment 166 Windows 2008 156 CHAP Secret 369 connections 12 ESX attachment 240, 252 initiator 172
Index
615
Ethernet ports 183 hosts 28 creating 176 initiator names 19, 157, 166, 172, 181, 242 interface 152 Microsoft software initiator 157 name 19 nodes 19 ports 221, 225 settings 184 volumes 213 mappings 242 Windows 2008 220, 228 iSCSI Alias 184 iSCSI Configuration tab 221, 224 iSCSI Host menu 181 iSCSI qualified names (IQN) 12, 20 iSCSI Service 157 iSCSI Software Adapter Properties window 172 ISL hop count 511 iSNS 184
M
maintenance contract 25 management copy services 515 FlashCopy 460 IP addresses 13, 35 system 38, 4041, 50 Management Information Base (MIB) 24 mappings FlashCopy 452 cleaning rate 454 host definition 4 source volumes 457 volumes 152 master console 24 MDisks 338 additional actions 345 arrays 331, 347 capacity 317 definition 4 extended help 338 HDD tier 417 higher tier 413 internal storage definition 4 lower tier 412 overview 14 Properties action 346 RAID 341 single-tiered storage pools 16 storage pools 191 swapping drives 343 unmanaged 341 definition 14 window 346 Member MDisk tab 395 memory dumps 544 metadata 21, 455 Metro Mirror 23, 417, 498, 503504, 508511, 521 consistency groups 508 relationships 508 microcode 544 Microsoft Multipath Input Output (MPIO) 154, 223 migration 20 automatic 16 Automatic Data Placement 417 Easy Tier 412, 417 extents 411412, 417 FlashCopy 451 image mode volumes 18 images 607 plan 414 SAN Boot images 607 volumes 16 mirroring advance mirroring settings 202 host based software 198 remote 28, 129 modes 14, 23, 166, 416
J
JBOD 14
K
key generators 594595, 597 key pairs 40, 594, 596 keys HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINESYSTEMCurrentControlSe tControlClass4D36E97B-E325-11CE-BFC1-08002BE10318} <bus ID>Parameters axRequestHoldTime 161 HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINESYSTEMCurrentControlSe tControlClass4D36E97B-E325-11CE-BFC1-08002BE10318} <bus ID>ParametersLinkDownTime 161 HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINESystemCurrentControlSet ServicesiskimeOutValue 154 private 594595, 597, 601 public 594, 596, 598 SSH 594, 598 USB 41, 45
L
lanes PHY 4 latency 412, 511, 517 LEDs 45, 321, 547, 554 logged 21 logical block addresses (LBA) 18 logical disks 17, 189 logs messages 25 lower tiers 414 LUNs 153, 166
616
monitoring 13, 413, 417, 544 Move to Consistency Group option 492 multipath I/O 155 multipath storage solution 154 multiple paths 36, 606 multitiered storage pools 16
N
Nearline SAS 11, 331 network management program 24 network time protocol (NTP) 37 nodes 544 adding back to a cluster 38 canisters 8, 30, 34, 45, 499, 511, 544 definitions 4 Ethernet ports 28 overview 546 expansion canisters definition 4 FlashCopy mapping states 455 hung 544 internal storage definition 4 Internet 20 IP addresses 28, 35 pairs 198 partner 12 port 1 28 ports 606 quorum disks 14 replacing 544 surviving 9 non-zero contingency 21
O
operations copy 503, 510 data migration 590 I/O 455, 509, 512 IOPS 16 iSCSI 161 start and stop 456 stop 456 write 455, 504 ordering 456 overwritten 451
Fully Configured (Remote Exceeded) 502 Fully Configured (Remote Excluded) 502 Fully Configured Stopped 519 Local Excluded 502 Partially Configured 501 Remote Not Present 502 Stopped 502, 519 stopped 519 passphrases 597 peak loads 512 performance high performance disk tiers 426, 434435 I/O 412 impacts 503 logs 412 needs 2 optimized setups 334 requirements 166 storage 412 testing 504 PHY 4 point in time (PiT) 3, 22, 454, 457, 504 copies 22, 457 data 456 pools primary 200, 205 secondary 201, 206 Pools function icon extended help 348 ports FC Host Adapter 153, 164 iSCSI 225 iSCSi 221 node canister 511 power supply 8, 10 slots 8 power supply units (PSU) 558 removing 588 P-parity 14 presets 3, 327, 331, 333, 335, 460461, 463, 467 private keys 594595, 597, 601 public keys 594, 596, 598 PuTTY 594597, 600, 602 key generators 597
Q
Q-parity 14 quorum disks 4, 14
P
parity strips 14 partnerships clusters 501 managing 515 creating 499, 511, 516 deleting 129 disconnected 519 new 129 states Fully Configure (Remote Stopped) 502
R
RAID definition 13 MDisks 4 mirrored 13, 327 overview 13 performance 13 presets 3, 327, 331 types 16
Index
617
RAID 0 13, 327 redundancy 13 RAID 1 1314 RAID 10 14, 327 failure 14 RAID 5 14, 327, 434 redundancy 14 RAID 6 14, 327, 334 RAID arrays 3, 17, 38 goals 13, 557 spare 331 RAID levels 13, 315, 327, 331, 333, 420 redundancy 13 rebalancing 13, 557 receivers 25 Redbooks website 609 Contact us xiv redundancy access 3 arrays 1314 boot devices 606 clustered system management 34 fabrics 30 hosts 36 inter-switch links 511 paths 608 PSUs 558 spare drives 326 relationship consistent 512 Relationship function icon 536 relationships background copies 454 cleaning rate 454 copy direction 528 FlashCopy 22, 452453, 458 Global Mirror 512 image mode volumes 18 inter-cluster 522 Metro Mirror 503, 508 partnerships 519 Remote Copy 509 removing 523 stopping 525 reliability 152 reliability, availability, and serviceability (RAS) 544 remote clusters 501502 fabric 511 mirroring 28 nodes 511 service 24 storage system 517 Remote Copy asynchronous 498, 504 configuration 498 consistency groups 508509 creating 531 managing 531 copy services 449
description 498 general guidelines 510 Global Mirror 504 limits 511 link requirements 511 management 498 Metro Mirror 503 partnerships 518 planning 510 synchronous 498, 504 Remote Copy relationships 129, 502, 509510, 523 deleting 530, 540 multiple 510 renaming 529 stand-alone 520521 starting 527 stopping 525 switching direction 528 Remote Mirroring 129 response times 16 restore points 22, 458 Reverse FlashCopy 22, 458459 roles primary 502
S
SAN Boot 36, 164, 593, 606607 hosts 153 SAN fabrics 9, 19, 36 SAN Volume Controller clusters 594, 598 SCSI commands 19 front ends 455 LUN IDs 607 SCSI IDs 215, 221, 229, 233, 241, 253, 369 secondary read/write access 526 security features 24 requirements 166 Serial Attached SCSI (SAS) 4, 1011, 2930, 331, 413, 547 connectivity 4 connectors 10 initiators 556 interfaces 10 ports 4, 10, 547 service tasks 13 Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP) 24, 38, 544 manager 24 messages 24 settings 24 single points of failure 556 single-tiered 16, 413 sites primary 504, 512 remote 505 secondary 504505, 512
618
target 503 SMTP server 25, 37 snapshots 4, 460, 464465 solid-state drives (SSD) 11, 411 arrays 331, 434 capacity 435 Easy Tier 334, 420 Easy Tier presets 331 extents 417 hot data 417 MDisks 433, 558 multiered storage pools 422 performance 411 response times 411 tiers 414 sorting 502 sources 452, 458, 460, 505 Global and Metro Mirror 417 multiple 22 spare role 320 SSH 40, 594, 597598, 600 client 594, 600601 keys 594, 598 states consistent 502, 508 link 547 model 509 processes 4 stopped 454, 494 stopping 453, 455 suspended 455 statistics 416 file 426 I/O 417, 431 log file 426 stop 526, 528 command 455 partnerships 519 process 494 storage primary 37, 517 secondary 517 storage area networks (SAN) configuration 30 failure 14 zoning 177, 187, 511, 606 storage pools adding drives 13 capacity 4, 15, 344 clustered systems 16 configured overview 428 definition 4, 15 Easy Tier 431 multitiered 422 overview 313 performance 413 single-tiered 428 striped volumes 17 target 413
thin provisioning definition 4 strand 556 definition 4 striping 1314 summary reports 414 superuser 38, 50 svctask 604 syslog manager 25 messages 2425 protocol 25 syslog messages sender 25
T
T0 22 targets 20, 226, 242, 417, 452, 458, 460, 472 IP address 242 names 19 TCP ports 20 thin provisioned 192, 453 definition 4 thin provisioning 4, 2021 thrashing 13 threshold warning 16 tie 14 time-zero copy 22 traffic 166, 168, 170, 226 troubleshooting 24, 38, 321
U
UDP 25 unbalanced 13, 557 unconfigured drives 335 unused 320, 330 updates 452, 456, 502, 505, 512 database transaction 456 drives and enclosures 556 HBA BIOS 153 write operations 504 upgrades software 564 upper tier 414 USB 41, 45, 546 User Datagram Protocol 25
V
VDisks auxiliary 504 virtualization 12, 17 volumes 34, 9, 12, 14, 17, 166, 189, 192, 196, 198, 201, 203, 206207, 209, 212, 215216, 218, 221, 229, 231, 233, 238, 241, 253, 258, 412, 425, 435, 450, 463, 472, 606 auxiliary 502, 504505, 520, 522523, 527, 539 boot 606 capacity
Index
619
per I/O group 511 clones 464 copies 418419, 431432, 435 data placement 412 database 456 definition 4 details 429 discovering 210 entire 451 expanding 21 extents 413 fully allocated 21, 192 hot spots 12 I/O handling management 12 image mode 18, 607 iSCSI 242 level 417 mappings 208, 604 overview 369 master 502, 504505, 520, 522523, 527, 539 maximum size 1516 migrating 16, 20, 413 mirrored 16, 2021, 203, 207, 417 automatic data placement 417 creating 199 peak write load 512 mirroring 16 non-mirrored 20 overview 17 pairs 510 primary 502, 504, 509, 527528 properties 425, 604605 Remote Copy master 522 removing 362, 378, 384 secondary 502, 504, 509, 512, 528, 538539 sequential 18, 417 size 522 snapshots 464 source 22, 451455, 457460, 467, 472, 474, 478, 481, 502503, 510, 520, 523, 527 striped 17, 192 definition 17 target 22, 450452, 455457, 459460, 465, 468, 474, 476482, 502503, 510, 512, 520, 522523 multiple 22 thin-mirror 203 thin-provisioned 2122, 195197, 459460, 472 UID 215, 221, 229, 233, 241, 253
Z
zero contingency 21 zone 30, 152 zoning recommendation 511
W
warranty period 25 Windows 40, 42, 152153, 155157, 161, 213, 215216, 218, 220221, 227229, 231, 433, 606607 timeout value 153154 wizard 330 WWPNs 12, 30
620
(1.0 spine) 0.875<->1.498 460 <-> 788 pages
Back cover
Easily manage and deploy systems with embedded GUI Experience rapid and flexible provisioning Protect data with remote mirroring
Organizations of all sizes are faced with the challenge of managing massive volumes of increasingly valuable data. But storing this data can be costly, and extracting value from the data is becoming more and more difficult. IT organizations have limited resources but must stay responsive to dynamic environments and act quickly to consolidate, simplify, and optimize their IT infrastructures. The IBM Storwize V3700 system provides a smarter solution that is affordable, easy to use, and self-optimizing, which enables organizations to overcome these storage challenges. Storwize V3700 delivers efficient, entry-level configurations that are specifically designed to meet the needs of small and midsize businesses. Designed to provide organizations with the ability to consolidate and share data at an affordable price, Storwize V3700 offers advanced software capabilities that are usually found in more expensive systems. Built upon innovative IBM technology, Storwize V3700 addresses the block storage requirements of small and midsize organizations. Providing up to 240 TB of capacity packaged in a compact 2U, Storwize V3700 is designed to accommodate the most common storage network technologies to enable easy implementation and management. This IBM Redbooks publication is intended for pre- and post-sales technical support professionals and storage administrators. The concepts in this book also relate to the IBM Storwize V3500. This book was written at a software level of Version 7 Release 1.
INTERNATIONAL TECHNICAL SUPPORT ORGANIZATION
BUILDING TECHNICAL INFORMATION BASED ON PRACTICAL EXPERIENCE

IBM Redbooks are developed by the IBM International Technical Support Organization. Experts from IBM, Customers and Partners from around the world create timely technical information based on realistic scenarios. Specific recommendations are provided to help you implement IT solutions more effectively in your environment.
For more information: ibm.com/redbooks

SG24-8107-01 ISBN 0738438774

Ibm Storeviz 3700

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Ibm Storeviz 3700

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Ibm Storeviz 3700

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Front cover

Implementing the IBM Storwize V3700

Copyright IBM Corp. 2013. All rights reserved.

Implementing the IBM Storwize V3700

Implementing the IBM Storwize V3700

Implementing the IBM Storwize V3700

Copyright IBM Corp. 2013. All rights reserved.

Implementing the IBM Storwize V3700

Copyright IBM Corp. 2013. All rights reserved.

Implementing the IBM Storwize V3700

Now you can become a published author, too!

Stay connected to IBM Redbooks

Implementing the IBM Storwize V3700

October 2013, Second Edition

Copyright IBM Corp. 2013. All rights reserved.

Implementing the IBM Storwize V3700

Overview of the IBM Storwize V3700 system

Copyright IBM Corp. 2013. All rights reserved.

1.1 IBM Storwize V3700 overview

Implementing the IBM Storwize V3700

1.2 IBM Storwize V3700 terminology

Control enclosure Data migration Drive Enclosure

Chapter 1. Overview of the IBM Storwize V3700 system

IBM Storwize V3700 term Event

PHY Power Supply Unit Quorum disk

Serial-Attached SCSI (SAS) ports Snapshot Storage pool Strand

Thin provisioning or thin provisioned Turbo Performance Volume

Implementing the IBM Storwize V3700

IBM Storwize V3700 term Worldwide port names

1.3 IBM Storwize V3700 models

Chapter 1. Overview of the IBM Storwize V3700 system

Implementing the IBM Storwize V3700

1.4 IBM Storwize V3700 hardware

Figure 1-3 IBM Storwize V3700 hardware components

Chapter 1. Overview of the IBM Storwize V3700 system

1.4.1 Control enclosure

Figure 1-6 IBM Storwize V3700 node canister

Implementing the IBM Storwize V3700

Chapter 1. Overview of the IBM Storwize V3700 system

1.4.2 Expansion enclosure

Figure 1-7 Expansion enclosure of the IBM Storwize V3700

Figure 1-8 Expansion canister ports

Implementing the IBM Storwize V3700

1.4.3 Host interface cards

1.4.4 Disk drive types

(1) 2.5 drive in a 3.5 drive carrier.

Chapter 1. Overview of the IBM Storwize V3700 system

1.5 IBM Storwize V3700 terms

1.5.2 Node canister

1.5.3 I/O Group

Implementing the IBM Storwize V3700

1.5.4 Clustered system

1.5.6 Managed disks

1.5.7 Quorum disks

1.5.8 Storage pools

Chapter 1. Overview of the IBM Storwize V3700 system

Single-tiered Storage Pool

Multitiered Storage Pool

Implementing the IBM Storwize V3700

Figure 1-9 IBM Storwize V3700 Striped volume